8866 H1 Physics 2010 JC Prelims With Ans

A-PDF Merger DEMO : Purchase from www.A-PDF.
com
1 to remove the watermark
Anglo-Chinese Junior College

Physics Preliminary Examination
Higher 1
PHYSICS 8866/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice 31 Aug 2010
1 hour
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write in soft pencil.

Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your Name and Index number in the answer sheet provided.
There are 30 questions in this section. Answer all questions. For each question there are
four possible answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and circle your choice in soft pencil on the separate
Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this Question Paper.
This paper consists of 15 printed pages

2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10−19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg
acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s−2
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + 1

2
at 2
v2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = p ΔV
hydrostatic pressure, p = ρgh
resistors in series, R = R1 + R2 + …
resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + …
2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1

3
1 Which of the following pairs consists of two base SI units
A kilogram, newton
B hertz, kelvin
C ampere, mol
D coulomb, second
2 The specific heat capacity of a liquid, c, can be determined by measuring the change in
temperature, θ f - θ i, of the liquid of mass m when heat H is supplied to it. The value of
c is then calculated using the formula
H
c=
m(θf θ i )
The values measured are

H = ( 9.6 ± 0.6) kJ
m = (200.0 ± 0.5) g
θ f = (40.0 ± 0.2) °C
θ i = (20.0 ± 0.1) °C
What is the percentage uncertainty in the value of c?
A 8.0 % B 7.0 % C 6.6 % D 6.5 %
3 A car is travelling at a velocity of 24 m s-1 due west initially. At a later time, it is seen
travelling at a velocity of 10 m s-1 due south.
Given that the direction North N, points vertically upwards, which of the following vector
R represents the change in velocity of the car?
A B C D
N N N N
R R
R R
2010ACJC8866P1 [Turn over

4
4 Which displacement-time graph best represents the motion of a falling sphere until it
begins to travel with terminal velocity?
A B
C D
5 A particle moves along a straight line. A variable K, of the particle's motion is plotted
against time as shown in Fig 5.
Fig 5
At any time, the slope of the graph is the acceleration of the particle. What is the
variable K?
A the displacement of the particle

B the distance travelled by the particle
C the speed of the particle
D the velocity of the particle

5
6 Newton's third law concerns the forces of interaction between two bodies. Which of the
following statements relating to the third law is not correct?
A The two forces are equal and opposite so the bodies are in equilibrium.
B The two forces are always in opposite directions.
C The two forces are at all times equal in magnitude.
D The two forces must act on different bodies.
7 A block of mass 0.60 kg is on a rough horizontal surface in Fig 7. A constant force of

12 N is applied to the block and it accelerates at 4.0 m s–2.
block 4.0 m s−2
Fig 7 12 N
horizontal surface
What is the magnitude of the frictional force acting on the block?
A 2.4 N B 9.6 N C 14 N D 16 N
8 In a particular crash test, a car of mass 1 500 kg collides with a wall, as shown in Fig 8.
The initial and final velocities of the car are shown. If the collision lasts for 0.150 s, find
the impulse caused by the collision on the car.
− 15 m s−1 + 2.6 m s−1
Fig 8
A 18600 Ns to the right

B 26400 Ns to the right
C 18600 Ns to the left
D 26400 Ns to the left
2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1 [Turn over

6
9 Two equal masses travel towards each other on a frictionless air track at speeds of
60 cm s–1 and 30 cm s–1. They stick together on impact.
What is the speed of the masses after impact?
A 15 cm s–1
B 20 cm s–1
C 30 cm s–1
D 45 cm s–1
10 A canopy roof, hinged to a vertical wall at one end and secured by a steel rod at the
other end as shown below, is in equilibrium.
Steel Rod
Canopy roof
The weight of the canopy roof is W, the force exerted by the rod on the roof is F and
the reaction by the wall on the roof is R.
Which vector triangle represents the forces acting on the canopy roof?
A B
F F
R W W R
C D
F
F
R
W
W
R

7
11 A traditional Chinese physician is measuring the mass of herbs with his weighing scale.
The scale consists of a uniform 40 g rod, a 100 g counterweight and an 80 g pan.
The rod is 30 cm long, the pan is placed at one end of the rod and the whole system is
supported by a string 8 cm away from the pan as shown below.
String support
14 cm 8 cm
Rod
Counterweight
Pan
The counterweight is located at 14 cm from the other end of the rod when the system is
in equilibrium. What is the mass of the herbs resting on the pan?
A 20 g B 55 g C 100 g D 135 g

8
12 A person of weight 500 N does a bungee jump using an elastic rope of unstretched
length 40 m and having a spring constant k equal to 50 N m-1. During the initial fall
there is a transfer of energy from gravitational potential energy to kinetic energy and
elastic potential energy. The person falls through a distance of 80 m before beginning
to move upwards.
Which set of graphs correctly represent the variation of the three energies?
A B
50 50
45 45
40 40
35 35
Energy / kJ
Energy / kJ
30 30
25 25
20 20
15 15
10 10
5 5
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Distance of fall / m Distance of fall / m
C D
50 50
45 45
40 40
35 35
Energy / kJ
Energy / kJ
30 30
25 25
20 20
15 15
10 10
5 5
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Distance of fall / m Distance of fall / m
13 On braking, 400kJ of heat were produced when a vehicle of mass 1200kg was brought
to rest on a level road. The speed of the vehicle just before the brakes were applied
was
A 12.4 m s-1
B 25.8 m s-1
C 124 m s-1
D 258 m s-1

9
14 A bird reaches a high speed by falling from the nest before swooping away. What is the
minimum distance it must fall to achieve a speed of 10 m s−1.
A 3.80 m
B 4.90 m
C 5.10 m
D 5.75 m
15 The diagram shows the profile of a transverse wave at a particular instant. The wave is
traveling to the right. The frequency of the wave is 12.5 Hz.
Q P
At the instant shown the displacement is zero at the point P.

What is the shortest time to elapse before the displacement is zero at point Q?
A 0.01 s B 0.02 s C 0.03 s D 0.07 s
16 A sound wave of frequency 400 Hz is traveling in a gas at a speed of 320 m s-1.
What is the phase difference between two points 0.1 m apart in the direction of travel?
π π 2π 4π
A rad B rad C rad D rad
4 2 5 5

10
17 Fig 17 shows a trace produced by a sound wave on a cathode-ray oscilloscope. The

timebase is set at 4 ms cm-1.
1 cm
Fig 17
What is the frequency of the sound wave?
A 5 Hz B 10 Hz C 20 Hz D 50 Hz
18 Two coherent monochromatic waves of equal amplitude are brought together to form
an interference pattern on a screen. Which of the following graphs could represent the
variation of intensity with position (x) across the pattern of fringes?

11
19 Continuous water waves are diffracted through a gap in a barrier in a ripple tank.
Which change will cause the diffraction of the waves to decrease?
A increasing the wavelength of the waves

B Increasing the width of the gap
C reducing the frequency of the waves
D reducing the width of the gap
20 In a Young’s double slit experiment which one of the following will increase the fringe
separation?
A Increasing the slit separation

B Placing the apparatus in a medium of higher refractive index
C Using light of lower frequency
D Decreasing the distance between the slit and the screen
21 Which one of the following statements must be true about two wave-trains of
monochromatic light arriving at a point on a screen if the wave-trains are coherent?
A They interfere constructively

B Their path difference is always in integral multiples of the wavelength.
C They are in phase
D They have a constant phase difference

12
22 A cylindrical wire 4.0 m long has a resistance of 31 Ω and is made of metal of resistivity
1.0 × 10–6 Ω m.
What is the radius of cross-section of the wire?
A 1.0 × 10–8 m
B 2.0 × 10–8 m
C 6.4 × 10–8 m
D 2.0 × 10–4 m
23 Which of the following expression is used to define resistance?
A Power
(current )2
B (resistivity )( length )
Area
C potential difference
current
D energy
(time )(current )2

13
24 In the circuit below, the battery has negligible internal resistance. Three identical lamps
L, M and N, having identical resistances are connected as shown.
The filament of lamp N breaks. Which one of the following shows the subsequent
changes to the brightness of lamp L and lamp M?
Lamp L Lamp M
A stays the same Decreases
B increases stays the same
C increases Decreases
D decreases Increases
25 Which diagram shows a potential divider circuit that can vary the voltage across the
lamp?
26 A compass is placed above a wire. The compass needle is seen to point toward the north.
When a current is made to flow through the wire, the needle deflects to point along the
northwest direction.
The orientation of the wire and direction of the current are
orientation of wire direction of current
A north-south south to north
B north-south north to south
C east-west west to east
D east-west east to west

14
27 A current balance is used to measure the magnetic flux density B of a electromagnet. The
length PQ of of a current balance is inserted inside a large electromagnet. The direction of
the magnetic field is as shown in Fig 27. Length of PQ is L. PQ and RS are d1 and d2
respectively from the pivot. A load of mass m is placed along the RS length. Take
acceleration due to gravity to be g.
The direction and magnitude of the current along length PQ are
P
S
B
Q R
Fig 27
direction magnitude
m d2
A from P to Q
B L d1
m g d2
B from P to Q
B L d1
m d2
C from Q to P
B L d1
m g d2
D from Q to P
B L d1
An electron moves in the negative x direction, through a uniform magnetic field in the
28
negative y direction. The magnetic force on the electron is:
A in the positive z direction

B in the negative z direction
C in the positive y direction
D in the negative x direction

15
29 When a parallel beam of white light passes through a cool vapour, dark lines appear in
the spectrum of the emergent light. This is principally because energy is absorbed and
A Is not re-radiated at all

B Is re-radiated as infra-red
C Is re-radiated as ultra-violet
D Is re-radiated uniformly in all directions
30 How would the maximum kinetic energy EK of the photoelectrons and the number of
photoelectrons emitted per second n be affected by using a more intense source of the
same wavelength?
EK n
A unchanged increased
B unchanged unchanged
C increased increased
D increased unchanged

Anglo-Chinese Junior College
Physics Preliminary Examination
Higher 1
CANDIDATE
CLASS
NAME
CENTRE INDEX
S
NUMBER NUMBER
PHYSICS 8866/02
Paper 2 Structured questions 20 Aug 2010
2 hours
Candidates answer on the Question Paper
No additional Materials are required
Write your Name and Index number in the spaces provided at the boxes above and on all
the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Section A
Answer all questions.
Section B
Answer any two questions. For examiners’ use only
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. Section A
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each 1 /6
question or part question.
2 / 7
3 / 8
4 / 7
5 / 12
Section B
6 / 20
7 / 20
8 / 20
Total / 80
This paper consists of 19 printed pages

2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10−19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg
Formulae

2
at 2
v2 = u 2 + 2as

3 For
Examiner’s
Section A Use
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided.
1 (a) Give reasoned estimates of the following quantities. In each case, give your
answer in an SI unit.
(i) The density of a mobile phone.
density = unit [2]
(ii) The current in the power cord connecting a 400 litre refrigerator to the power
supply in Singapore.
current = unit [2]
(b) A student is measuring the diameter of a metal sphere, of similar size to a marble,
using a vernier caliper.
(i) Suggest one possible source of systematic error that may arise.
[1]
(ii) Suggest one possible source of random error that may arise.
[1]

4
For
Examiner’s
2 A waiter holds a tray horizontally in one hand between fingers and thumb as shown Use
in Fig 2.
Fig 2
(a) (i) State the conditions for the tray to be in equilibrium.
[2]
(a) (ii) If the mass of the tray is 0.12 Kg, calculate the magnitudes of forces P
and Q.
P = ....................... N
Q = ……………….. N [3]
(b) The waiter places a glass on the tray. Explain if it is possible for the force, P to
have the same value as in part (a) after the glass is added.
[2]

5 For
Examiner’s
3 (a) A copper wire S is stretched over two supports X and Y as shown in Fig 3.1. A Use
permanent magnet is positioned at the central region of the wire.
Fig 3.1
The signal generator provides an alternating current as shown in Fig 3.2 where the
direction and magnitude of the current changes periodically.
current
Fig 3.2
(i) Explain why the wire in Fig 3.1 will vibrates when the signal generator is
operating.
[2]
(ii) Stationary waves with one or more loops, similar to the one shown are set up
only when the signal generator is set to certain frequencies.
Explain why stationary waves occur and only at certain frequencies.
[3]

6
For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The wave with three loops is produced when signal generator is set to 60 Hz.
(i) Deduce the frequency which results in the formation of only one loop.
Frequency = …………….. Hz [2]
(ii) Draw a diagram to show that what would be observed when the signal
generator is set to 100 Hz.
[1]
4 (a) Fig 4 shows the variation of the photocurrent I with the potential of the anode
with respect to the cathode V, in the photoelectric experiment.
I/nA
Fig 4
- Vs 0 V1 V/V
Suggest possible reasons for the following observations as seen from Fig 4.
(i) no photocurrent is detected for values of V lower than − Vs
(ii) increasing photocurrent for values of V between − Vs and 0 V.
(iii) saturation current was not achieved immediately when V became greater
than 0 V.
[3]

7 For
Examiner’s
(b) An orbiting satellite can become charged by the photoelectric effect when Use
sunlight ejects electrons from its outer surface. Satellites must be designed to
minimise such charging. Suppose a satellite is coated with platinum, a metal
with a very large work function of 5.32 eV.
(i) Determine the longest wavelength of incident sunlight that can eject an
electron from platinum.
λ = ……………… m [2]
(ii) The incident photon has a particle like nature. Determine the momentum of
the photon.
momentum = ……………… Ns [2]

8
For
Examiner’s
5 Hydroelectricity Use
Three Gorges Dam is a hydroelectric river dam that spans the Yangtze River located in
the Yiling District of Yichang, at the Hubei province, China. It is the world's largest
electricity-generating plant of any kind.
The dam body was completed in 2006. Except for a ship lift, all of the originally planned
components of the project were completed on October 30, 2008 when the 26th generator
was brought into commercial operation. Currently, it contains 26 completed generators in
the shore power plant, each with a capacity of 700 MW. Six additional generators in the
underground power plant are being installed and are not expected to become fully
operational until around 2011. The completed dam will possess 32 main generators with
2 smaller generators (50 MW each) to power the plant itself. The project produces
hydroelectricity, increases the river's navigation capacity, and reduces the potential for
floods downstream by providing flood storage space. From completion until September
2009 the dam has generated 348.4 TWh of electricity, covering more than one third of its
project cost.

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
Maximum Installed
Capacity
Current Installed
Capacity Limit
Maximum Possible
Power Output at
18 300 MW capacity
Maximum Possible
Power Output at
22 500 MW capacity
Actual Power Output

in 2008 (MW)
Maximum Plant Intake

with 32 Main
Generators
Maximum Plant Intake

with 26 Main
Flow rate / m3 s-1
Generators
Average Actual
Flow Rate

10
For
Examiner’s
(a) (i) Considering the maximum electric generating capacity of the Use
generators, calculate the average power of each of the new generators
that will be installed in 2011.
Average Power = …………… W [2]
(ii) When all the generators are up in 2011, calculate the time required to
generate 100 TWh of electricity.
Time = …………… days [2]
(b) Considering conservation of energy, estimate the maximum water level

trapped behind the dam in July.
You may assume that density of water = 1000 kg m-3.
Maximum water level = …………… m [3]
(c) From the graphs, suggest whether a higher flow rate necessarily leads to
larger amount of energy being generated.
[2]

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) Referring to the temperature charts above, account for the low flow rate and
power output in January.
[1]
(e) State one advantage of hydroelectricity over the burning of coal and state
another alternative source of energy that have the same advantage.
[2]

12
For
Examiner’s
Section B Use
Answer two the questions for this section.
6 (a) Distinguish between elastic and inelastic collisions.
[2]
(b) A rope of length L is attached to a support at point C. A person of mass m1 sits on

a ledge at position A holding the other end of the rope so that it is horizontal and
taut, as shown in Fig. 6. The person then drops off the ledge and swings down on
the rope toward position B on a lower ledge where an object of mass m2 is at rest.
At position B the person grabs hold of the object and simultaneously lets go of the
rope. The person and object then land together in the lake at point D, which is a
vertical distance L below position B.
Fig. 6
Assuming air resistance and the mass of the rope are negligible,
(i) show that the speed v1 of the person just before the collision with the object is
given by v1 = 2 gL
[2]
(ii) deduce an expression for the speed v2 of the person and object just after the
collision in terms of m1, m2, L, and the acceleration of free fall g. State any
assumption made,
Assumption:
Expression for v2 is [3]

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) hence deduce the expression for the time of flight T, and the horizontal
displacement, xo of the person from position B until he lands in the water at
point D, assuming that the direction of v2 is horizontal,
Expression for T is
Expression for xo is [5]
(iv) if air resistance is not negligible, state and explain how the horizontal
displacement x1, of the person from position B until he lands in the water
would be affected,
[3]
(c) (i) State Newton’s second law of motion,
[2]
(ii) Referring to part (b), if the acceleration of the person just before the collision
with the object at B is vertically upwards and directed from B to C, and
2
v
has a magnitude given by 1 ,
L
1. draw a free body diagram of the person just before the collision with
the object at B.
[1]
14
For
Examiner’s
2. hence determine the tension in the rope just before the collision of the Use
person with the object.
tension = N [2]
7 (a) Fig 7.1 (a) shows the position of the particles of in a medium when they are at
equilibrium while Fig 7.1(b) shows their positions when in the presence of a
travelling longitudinal sinusoidal wave.
(i) Deduce the magnitude of the displacement of particle 2 (see Fig 7.1(a)
and (b)) when the wave is passing through it?
[1]
(ii) Draw the displacement-position graph of the particles in the wave at the
instant shown. Displacement to the right is taken as positive.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fig 7.1 (a)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fig 7.1 (b)
Displacement / cm
Position / cm
[2]
(b) A satellite passing the planet Jupiter communicates with its controller on Earth
using microwave transmitter with output power 24.0 W and wavelength
79 600 μm . Jupiter is 588 x 109 m from the earth at the time when the
communication takes place.
(i) State whether microwave is longitudinal or transverse.

[1]
(ii) Calculate the time taken for a signal to travel from the satellite to the
Earth.
time taken = s [2]

15 For
Examiner’s
Assuming that the power transmitted by the satellite is radiated uniformly in all Use
directions,
(iii) calculate the intensity of the microwave received on earth
intensity received = [3]
(iv) calculate the power received on the Earth by a dish aerial of effective
area 250 m2.
power received = W [1]
(c) Fig 7.2 shows a Young’s double slit experiment. The monochromatic light from
S1 and S2 produces on the screen bright and dark parallel bands called
fringes.
S1
S
Light S2
source
Screen
Fig 7.2
(i) Explain the term diffraction with reference to the above experiment.
[1]
(ii) Explain the formation of the bright and dark fringes.
[5]

16
For
Examiner’s
(iii) Given that the slit separation between S1 and S2 is 140 μm , the Use
wavelength of light is 600 nm and the distance between the screen to the
double slits is 0.700 m, determine the distance between second and third
bright fringes.
Distance = ………….. m [2]
(d) Two identical sources S1 and S2, dipping in phase into water in a ripple tank
generate the wavefronts as shown in Fig 7.3. Deduce and label on Fig 7.3, all
the actual positions of the bright fringes (BF) and dark fringes (DF) that are
formed on the screen.
S1
S2
Fig 7.3 Screen

[2]

17 For
Examiner’s
8 (a) (i) Define potential difference and the volt. Use
potential difference
volt
[3]
(ii) Define resistance and the ohm of a conductor.
resistance
ohm
[2]
(b) A filament lamp operates normally at a potential difference (p.d.) of 6.0 V. The
variation with p.d. V, of the current I, in the lamp is shown in Fig 8.1.
Fig 8.1

18
For
Examiner’s
Use Fig 8.1 to determine, for this lamp, Use
(i) the resistance when it is operating at a p.d. of 6.0 V,
resistance of lamp = Ω
(ii) the change in resistance when the p.d increases from 6.0 V to
8.0 V. Hence explain the I -V characteristics of a filament lamp.
change in resistance = Ω
[6]
(c) The lamp is connected into the circuit of Fig 8.2.
Fig 8.2
R is a fixed resistor of resistance 200 Ω. The battery has e.m.f. E and negligible
internal resistance.
(i) On Fig 8.1, draw a line to show the variation with p.d. V of the current I in
the resistor R. [2]
(ii) Assuming the filament lamp operates normally find the e.m.f. of the
battery.
e.m.f. = Ω
[2]
(d) Fig 8.3 shows the variation with temperature (measures in degrees Celsius,
0
C) of the resistance of a thermistor.

19 For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig 8.3
(i) If the resistance of the thermistor could be read to 204 ± 2 Ω,

determine its temperature to an appropriate number of decimal places
with its uncertainty.
0
temperature = C [2]
(ii) Suppose the resistor in Fig 8.2 is replaced by a thermistor with

characteristics shown in Fig 8.3,
1. State and explain what will be observed in the filament lamp in the
circuit when the temperature in the surrounding area decreases.
2. Suggest and explain a probable application for this circuit
[3]

H1 P1
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 Q14 Q15 Q16 Q17 Q18 Q19 Q20
C A B D D A B B A D B A B C C A D A B C
Q21 Q22 Q23 Q24 Q25 Q26 Q27 Q28 Q29 Q30 Q31 Q32 Q33 Q34 Q35 Q36 Q37 Q38 Q39 Q40
D D C C C B D B D A
H1 P2
1(a)(i) V = b × l × h = 90 cm3, (accept values from 50 cm3 to 150 cm3)
m = 150 g, (accept values from 80 g to 200 g)
m
∴ρ = = 1.7 g cm-3 (accept values from 0.5 g cm-3 to 4 g cm-3); accept
V
corresponding values if alternative units are used (e.g. kg m-3)
1(a)(ii) V = 230 V (accept values from 220 V to 240 V) and

P = 500 W (accept values from 200 W to 900 W)
P
∴ I = = 2.27 A (accept values from 0.8 A to 4 A)
V
1(b)(i) - zero error

- parallax error where observer is always looking from one side
1(b)(ii) - the object is not perfectly spherical

- parallax error where observer is looking from either side inconsistently
- inability to place the vernier caliper exactly at the centre line of the
sphere every time a measurement is taken
2ai The resultant force acting on the tray is zero in all direction [or P+W=Q].
The resultant torque acting on the tray about any axes is zero.
ii W=0.12 x 9.81 = 1.18N

Taking moments around P
Q x 0.1=W x 0.25
Q =2.9 N
P =2.9N-1.2N
P =1.7 N
iii If the glass is place at where Q acts, resultant moment remains at zero, the
increased in value
Note :if placed to right side of Q, P will decrease, left side of Q P will increase
Hence possible
3 (a) (i) When an alternating current passes through the wire placed in a perpendicular
magnetic field acting, an alternating force acts
at right angles to the wire.
Hence the wire vibrates .
(a) (ii) For a given length of the wire, the resonance only occurs at integral
multiples of half a wavelength
The copper wire would therefore only resonates when the signal generator
c
is set to frequency = integral multiples of ,
2L
(that is corresponding to the fundamental frequencies and other resonance
frequencies of the vibrating wire.)
In each case, the transverse wave traveling along the wire is reflected at
the fixed points x and y, which act as nodes, thus producing a stationary
wave since the incident and reflected waves superimposed and have the
same frequency, speed and approximately the same amplitude.
(b) (i) Three loops are produced when the signal generator is at 60 Hz.
L – length of stretched wire
3 loops Î L = 3λ/2 = 3/2 (V/60) ⇒ v = 40 L
1 loop Î L = λ/2 = ½ (V/f)
∴ f = ½ (v/L) = ½ (40) = 20 Hz
Therefore a single loop would be formed when the signal generator is set
at 20 Hz
(b)(ii) At 100 Hz five loops (of stationary waves) will be formed
4(a)(i) Vs is (stopping potential). Electrons with max KE cannot reach the anode/cannot be
collected.
(ii) (Electrons are emitted with a range of KE), hence when anode is make less negative
with respect to cathode, some electrons may be able to reach the anode
(iii) Saturation not achieved immediately once V is +ve because the electrons are scattered
randomly in different directions. (Hence with higher V, the path of more electrons may
be altered so that it is able to reach the anode due to the increased in the magnitude of
the electric force.)
(Saturation current is achieved at V1 when all emitted electrons are collected.)
4(b)(i) φ = 5.32 x 1.6 x 10-19 = 8.51 x 10-19 J
hc/λ = 8.51 x 10-19 J
λ= 2.34 x 10-7 m
(ii)
r
p =h/λ
r
p =2.83 x 10-27 N s
5ai) Current power stations: 700 MW X 26 + 50 MW X 2 = 18300 MW

Total Power: 22500 MW
Hence, remaining 6 power stations = 22500 MW - 18300 MW= 4200 MW
Each of the 6 power stations provides 700 MW.

5aii) Total time needed = 100, 000, 000 M / 22500 M= 4444 hours
Total time needed in days= 185 days.
5bi) Energy = mgh

Power = (dm/dt) gh= (dV/dt) ρgh
In July, Power = 14000 MW,

h =14000000000/(1000*9.81*30000)
h=47.6 m.
5c High water flow did not result in higher power output,

Water may be released regularly at low heights to reduce risk of flooding during the
rainy seasons.
5d In temperate china, low temperatures result in freezing occurring, leaving little amount of
liquids to flow through the dam and little amount of energies to be generated
5e There is lesser carbon dioxide emission, thus it does not result in build up of
greenhouse gases in the future.
Another technique is geothermal power stations.(Allow any alternative)
(A1 follows advantage given)
6(a) In elastic collision total kinetic energy is conserved , in inelastic collision total
kinetic energy is not conserved
In both types of collisions, linear momentum and total energy are conserved
(b) By conservation of energy, and taking a is const since no air resistance

(i) the zero of potential to be at the height
of B or Loss in GPE = gain in KE
1
m1 v1 = m1gL
2
v2 = 2gL
2
⇒ v1 = 2 gL
(ii) m1 v1= ( m1 + m2) v2

m1 m1
v2 = v1 = 2gL
( m1 + m2 ) ( m1 + m2 )
Assumption is there is no net external force acting and there is conservation of
linear momentum,
(iii) To find time taken T to fall from B to D, consider the vertical motion
1 2 1
and apply x = ut + gt ⇒ L= g T2
2 2
2L
⇒ T=
g
(iv) m1 2L 2m1 L
xBD = v2 T = ( 2gL ) ( ) =
( m1 + m2 ) g ( m1 + m2 )
2m1 L
Hence x = xBD + L = +L
( m1 + m2 )
(3m1 + m2 ) L
=
( m1 + m2 )
(v) x1 will be shorter than xBD

Reasons:
1. When there is air resistance, the retarding effect of air resistance is such
that the net acceleration of the ball downwards due to the weight of the
ball and the opposing effect of air resistance is less than that due to
gravity alone.
2. At B the speed v2 will be smaller as some gravitational potential energy
at A has been lost to do work against air resistance
(c)(i) It states that the rate of change of momentum of a body is directly

proportional to the net external force acting on it
and it takes place in the direction of the net external force.

(ii) 1 Show correct free body diagram
2 v
2
T – m1g = m1 1
L
2
v
T = m1 1 + m1g
L
= 2m1g + m1g = 3 m1g
7(a)i) Displacement = 0.5 cm
ii)
(b)i) Transverse
ii) dis tan ce

time =
speed
588 × 109
=
3 × 108
= 1960 s
iii) P
I=
A
P
=
4π r 2
24
=
4π (588 × 109 )2
= 5.52 × 10 −24 Wm −2
iv) P=IA
= 5.52 x 10-24 x 250 m2
= 1.38 x 10-21 W
(c)i) Diffraction is the spreading of the waves when it reaches the slit whose size is
comparable to that of the wavelength of the wave.
ii) Both waves starts in phase since from same source

Light diffracts on passing through slit S1 and S2.
When the two waves meet, interference occurs.
On the screen, when the 2 waves meet in phase, they will interfere constructively to
form bright fringes.
When the 2 waves meet and are out of phase by π , they will interfere destructively to
form dark fringes.
Alternative:
If students uses path difference award MAX 1 mark for the last 2 B1 mark if
first B1 mark not awarded.
(iii) λD
y=
d
600 × 10 −9 × 0.7
=
140 × 10−6
= 3.0 × 10−3 m
(d)
BF (n=2)
DF (n=2)
S1
BF (n=1)
DF (n=1)
BF (n=0)
DF (n=1)
BF (n=1)
S2
DF (n=2)
BF (n=2)
8(a)(i) The electric potential difference between two points in a circuit or across a
conductor is defined as the rate of transformation of electrical energy
to other forms of energy per unit current passing through the two points.
(V = P/I)
OR The electric potential difference between two points in a circuit is the amount
of electrical energy transformed
per unit charge to some other forms of energy when the charge passes
from one point to the other. (V = W/Q)
The volt is defined as potential difference between two points on a conductor
carrying a current of one ampere when the power dissipated is one watt.
(1 V = 1 W A−1)
OR The volt is defined as the potential difference between two points in a circuit
where one joule of electrical energy is converted to other forms of energy
when one coulomb of charge passes from one point to the other.
(1 V = 1 J C−1)
The resistance R of a conductor is defined as the ratio where V is the potential
(ii) difference across the conductor and I is the current flowing through the
conductor. {i.e. R = V/I }
The ohm is defined as the electrical resistance between two points of a conductor
through which a steady current of one ampere (1A) flows when a constant
potential difference of one volt (1V) is maintained across it. {1Ω= 1
V A−1 }
8(b)(i) Resistance R = V/I

R6 = 6.0/(40 x 10-3)
=150 Ω
(ii) R8 = 8.0/(50 x 10-3)

= 160 Ω
R8 – R6 = 160 – 150
= 10 Ω
As I and V increases, rate of atomic vibration increases

Number of free electrons remains the same, hence resistance increases
8(c) (i) pd across resistor VR = I R

= (40 x 10−3)(200)
= 8.0 V
Show in Fig 8.1, straight line from (0,0) to (40 mA, 8.0 V)
(ii) Emf of battery ε = 6.0 + 8.0

= 14.0 V
8(d)(i) At R = (204 ± 2) Ω
Students knows that uncertainty is ± 0.2 0C
θ = (15.0 ± 0.2) 0C
(ii)1. Temp decreases ⇒ Rthermistor increases
Vbattery constant ⇒ current decreases/total R ↑ ⇒ ILamp decreases (dimmer)
(ii)2. Temp sensor with lamp as indicator (intensity of light calibrated vs temp), etc
Name: ……………………….…………………. HT group: …………...
CATHOLIC JUNIOR COLLEGE

JC2 PRELIMINARY EXAM 2010
PHYSICS
Higher 1
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
1 hour
Additional materials : Multiple Choice Answer Sheet

Write your name, IC Number and HT group on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided.
There are thirty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are
four possible answers A, B , C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate
Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 12 printed pages.
1
DATA:
acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s-2

Speed of light in free space c = 3.00 × 108 m s-1
Elementary charge e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
The Planck Constant h = 6.63 × 10-34 J s
Unified atomic mass constant u = 1.66 × 10-27 kg
Rest mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10-31 kg
Rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10-27 kg
FORMULAE:

a t2
2
v2 = u2 + 2 a s
Work done on/by a gas W = pΔV
Hydrostatic pressure p = ρgh
Resistors in series R = R1 + R2 + …
Resistors in parallel 1 1 1
+ +
R = R1 R2 …
2
1. The power loss P through a resistor is found by measuring the potential difference V across the
resistor and the current I through it. The equation is given by P = VI. The voltmeter has a 4%
uncertainty and the ammeter reading has a 3% uncertainty. What is the uncertainty in the power
calculated?
A 3% B 4% C 7% D 12 %
2. A student made a series of measurements of the diameter d, of a wire using four micrometer
screw gauges A, B, C and D. The table shows the measurements taken.
If the actual diameter of the wire was 1.49 mm, which micrometer screw gauge produced a set of
readings that could be described as accurate but not precise?
micrometer screw
Readings d/ mm
gauge
A 1.49 1.46 1.52 1.50
B 1.48 1.58 1.51 1.40
C 1.35 1.37 1.42 1.42
D 1.32 1.37 1.41 1.50
3. An Olympic athlete competes in a sprint race.
What is the best estimate of his mean kinetic energy during the race?
A 4 x 102 J B 4 x 103 J C 4 x 104 J D 4 x 105 J
4. A man stands on the edge of a cliff. He throws a stone upwards with a velocity of 19.6 m s-1 at
time t = 0. The stone reaches the top of the trajectory after 2.00 s and then falls towards the
bottom of the cliff. Air resistance is negligible.
Which row shows the correct velocity v and acceleration a of the stone at different times?
t /s v / m s-1 a / m s-2
A 2.00 0 0
B 1.00 9.81 9.81
C 5.00 -29.4 -9.81
D 3.00 9.81 -9.81
3
5. The sketch graph below describes the motion of a ball rebounding from a horizontal surface after
being released from a point above the surface.
The quantity represented on the y-axis is the ball’s

A Velocity C Acceleration
B Kinetic energy D Displacement
6. Two objects, X and Y, were dropped from rest from a tall tower on a wind-free day. In the graph
below are plotted their squared velocities as a function of their height above the ground.
From the information given in the graph and knowledge of the properties of bodies falling under
the influence of gravity, it is possible to say that the two objects
A experienced unequal viscous drag

B had different masses
C hit the ground at the same time
D were not dropped simultaneously
4
7. A proton (mass 1 u) travelling with velocity +0.100 c collides elastically head-on with a helium
nucleus (mass 4 u) travelling with velocity -0.050 c.
What are the velocities of each particle after the collision?

proton Helium nucleus
A +0.140 c +0.010 c
B -0.140 c +0.010 c
C +0.233 c -0.083 c
D -0.233 c +0.083 c
8. Which of the following pairs of forces is an action-reaction pair?
A Weight of a floating object in water and the force acting by water on it.
B The force a ladder leaning on a smooth wall exerts on the rough floor and the normal
reaction from the floor
C The force a ladder leaning on a smooth wall exerts on the wall and the normal reaction force
from the wall
D Weight of a parachutist and the pull of the parachute on him when he is moving with
terminal velocity
9. A 100 N weight is supported by two weightless wires A and B as shown below. What can you
conclude about the tensions in these wires?
θ
B
A
A the tensions are equal to 50 N each

B the tensions are equal but greater than 50 N each
C the tensions are equal but less than 50 N each
D the tensions are equal to 100 N each
5
10. The given diagram shows a column of dry air trapped by mercury in a narrow test tube.
Which graph best shows how the length l of the air column varies with the angle θ of the tube to
the vertical?
A C
B D
11. A right-angle rule hangs at rest from a peg P as shown below. It is made from a metal sheet of
uniform density. One arm is L cm long while the other is 2L cm long.
The angle θ at which it will hang is

A 8o B 14o C 42o D 76o
6
12. A spring fixed at one end, has a mass attached to the other end. The mass bounces up and down.
It is shown in the diagram at three positions X, Y and Z.
Which line gives the kinetic, gravitational potential and elastic potential energies?
Kinetic energy Gravitational potential energy Elastic potential energy
A zero at X maximum at X maximum at X

B maximum at Y zero at Z maximum at Y
C zero at Z zero at Z zero at X
D maximum at Y maximum at X maximum at Z
13. A space vehicle of mass m re-enters the Earth’s atmosphere at an angle θ to the horizontal.
Because of air resistance, the vehicle travels at a constant speed v.
The heat shield of the vehicle dissipates heat at a rate P, so that the mean temperature of the
vehicle remains constant.
Taking g as the relevant value of the acceleration of free fall, which expression is equal to P.
A mgv
B mgv sinθ
C 1
mv 2
2
D 1
mgv 2 sin 2 θ
2
14. A mechanical wave of frequency 300 Hz travels along a railway line at 6 km s-1. Two points on
the rail which are 250 cm apart are out of phase by
A 0 rad B π rad C π / 2 rad D π / 4 rad
15. A boy blows gently across the top of a piece of glass tubing the low end of which is closed by his
finger so that the tube gives its fundamental note of frequency, f. While blowing, he removes his
finger from the lower end. The note he then hears will have a frequency of approximately
A ¼f B ½f C 2f D 4f
7
16. A point source emits 50.0 W of sound. A small microphone of area 0.85 cm2 detects the sound
at 4.0 m from the source. What is the power detected by the microphone?
A 1.6 × 10-5 W B 2.1 × 10-5 W C 2.1 × 10-1 W D 2.5 × 10-1 W
17. When a two-slit arrangement was set up to produce a superposition pattern on a screen using a
monochromatic source of green light, the fringes were found to be too close together for accurate
observation. It would be possible to increase the separation of the fringes by
A replacing the light source with a monochromatic source of red light

B increasing the distance between the source and the slits
C decreasing the distance between the slits and the screen
D increasing the distance between the two slits
18. Two loudspeakers L1 and L2, driven by a common oscillator and amplifier, are set up as shown.
As the frequency of the oscillator increases from zero, the detector at D recorded a series of
maximum and minimum signals. At what frequency is the first maximum observed?
(Speed of sound = 330 m s-1)
40 m
L1
D
9m
L2
A 165 Hz B 330 Hz C 495 Hz D 660 Hz
19. Two wires P and Q, each of the same length and the same material, are connected in parallel to
a battery. The diameter of P is half that of Q.
What fraction of the total current passes through P?
A 0.20 B 0.25 C 0.33 D 0.50
8
20. The diagram shows three resistors of resistances 2 Ω, 20 Ω and 3 Ω connected in series. A
potential difference of 20 V is maintained across them. Point Q is earthed.
20 V
P Q R S
2Ω 20 Ω 3Ω
Which of the following gives the potentials at points P, Q, R and S?
Potential at
P Q R S
A 20 V 18.4 V 2.4 V 0V
B 1.6 V 0V 16 V 18.4 V
C 20 V 16 V -6V - 20 V
D 1.6 V 0V - 16 V - 18.4 V
21. A battery of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r delivers a current I through a variable resistance R.
E r
A
I
R
R is set at two different values and the corresponding currents I are measured using an ammeter
of negligible resistance.
R/Ω I/A
1.0 3.0
2.0 2.0
What is the value of e.m.f E?
A 3.0 V B 3.5 V C 4.0 V D 6.0 V
9
22. An electric heater can be represented as two resistors of resistances R1 and R2 and two
switches S1 and S2. The resistance R2 is greater than that of R1.
S1
R1
S2
R2
Which switches must be closed so that the heater produces the maximum possible power and
the minimum non-zero power?
maximum possible power minimum non-zero power

A S1 and S2 S2
B S1 and S2 S1
C S1 S2
D S2 S1
23. A bar magnet is to be placed in a non-uniform magnetic field as shown.
Which line of the table describes the subsequent motion of the magnet?
rotation movement
A anticlockwise to the left
B anticlockwise to the right
C clockwise to the left
D clockwise to the right
10
24. A straight wire PQ carrying a constant current I is placed at right angles to a uniform magnetic
field, as shown by the dotted line in the diagram.
The wire is then rotated through an angle θ about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the
diagram.
Which graph shows how the magnitude of the magnetic force F on the wire varies with θ in the
range 0o to 90o?
25. A positively-charged particle enters a uniform magnetic field.

Which diagram represents the path of the particle in the magnetic field?
A B C D
26. Monochromatic light is incident on a clean metal surface of work function φ. The Planck constant is h
and the speed of light is c.
What is the threshold wavelength for the emission of electrons from the metal surface?
A B C D
11
27. Which of the following statements about photoelectric emissions is correct?
A The velocity of the emitted electrons is directly proportional to the intensity of the incident
radiation.
B The number of electrons emitted per second does not depend on the intensity of the
incident radiation.
C For any given type of metal, there is a maximum wavelength of radiation above which no
emission of electrons occurs.
D No emission of electrons occurs at very low intensity of illumination.
28. The de Broglie wavelength of a rifle bullet of mass 0.02 kg which is moving at a speed of 300 m
s-1 is
A 7.3 x 10-36 m B 1.8 x 10-35 m C 1.1 x 10-34 m D 9.9 x 10-33 m
29. Which of the following statements is true?
A A beam of electrons directed at a vessel of cold gas can cause the formation of either an
absorption or emission line spectrum.
B A beam of white light directed at a vessel of cold gas can cause the formation of either an
absorption or emission line spectrum.
C A beam of electrons directed at a vessel of cold gas can only cause the formation of an
absorption line spectrum.
D A beam of electrons directed at a vessel of cold gas can only cause the formation of an
emission line spectrum.
30. A laser emits light of power P. The light consists of photons of frequency f.
The Planck constant is h and the speed of light is c.
How many of these photons are contained in a one metre length of the laser beam?
A P
c
B P
hf
C Pc
hf
D P
chf
End of Paper 1
12
Name: ……………………….…………………. HT group: …………...
CATHOLIC JUNIOR COLLEGE

JC2 PRELIMINARY EXAM 2010
PHYSICS
Higher 1
Paper 2 Structured Questions
2 hours
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional materials are required.
Write your name and HT group on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen on both sides of the paper.
Section A (40 marks)

Section B (40 marks)

Answer any two questions.
At the end of examination, fasten all your work securely together.

The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
Total marks for Section A and B is 80 marks.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE

SECTION A
1
2
3
4
SECTION B
5
6
7
1
DATA:

Speed of light in free space c = 3.00 × 108 m s-1
Elementary charge e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
The Planck Constant h = 6.63 × 10-34 J s
Unified atomic mass constant u = 1.66 × 10-27 kg
Rest mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10-31 kg
Rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10-27 kg
FORMULAE:
uniformly accelerated s = ut + 1
a t2
2
motion,
v2 = u2 + 2 a s
Work done on/by a gas W = pΔV
Hydrostatic pressure p = ρgh
Resistors in series R = R1 + R2 + …
Resistors in parallel 1 1 1
+ +
R = R1 R2 …
2
Section A
Answer all the questions in this section
1 An aeroplane is flying horizontally at a steady speed of 67 m s-1 and an object is

dropped off from the aeroplane.
(a) Assume that the air resistance is negligible.
(i) Show that the vertical component of the velocity of the object is
approximately 40 m s-1 when it has fallen 80 m.
[2]
(ii) Determine the magnitude and direction of the resultant velocity of the object
at this point.
Magnitude of velocity =…………………..m s-1
Direction of velocity =………………………………….. [3]
(b) In practice, air resistance acts on the object during the fall. The air resistance
may be assumed to be proportional to the square of the speed.
(i) State and explain how the magnitude of the horizontal and vertical
components of the velocity of the object vary with time.
Horizontal component of velocity:
……………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………. [1]
3
Vertical component of velocity:
……………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
(c) Sketch and label the path of the object in Fig. 1
(i) without air resistance,
(ii) with air resistance.

Horizontal distance from the point of drop off
Start of fall [2]
vertical
distance from
the point of
drop off
Fig. 1
4
2 A water-wheel has eight buckets equally spaced around its circumference as
illustrated in Fig. 2
Fig. 2
The distance between the centre of each bucket and the centre of the wheel is 1.6
m. When a bucket is at its highest point, the bucket is filled with a mass of 40 kg of
water. The wheel rotates and the bucket is emptied at its lowest point.
(a) (i) Define the moment of a force.
……………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………….. [1]
(ii) Write down the number of the bucket that provides the largest moment
about the axle of the wheel.
…………………………………………………………………………………….. [1]
(iii) Write down the numbers of those buckets containing water that cause a
moment about the axle.
……………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………….. [2]
(iv) Calculate, for the wheel in the position shown in Fig. 2, the total resultant
moment about the centre of the wheel of the water in the buckets.
Resultant moment = …………………….N m [2]
5
(b) The wheel makes six revolutions per minute.
Calculate
(i) The total change in potential energy of the water in the buckets in one
revolution of the wheel,
Change in potential energy =……………..J [2]
(ii) The average input power to the wheel.
Power =………………….W [2]
(c) Suggest why a larger number of small buckets is preferred to a smaller number
of large buckets containing the same total mass of water.
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
………………………………………………………………………………………….. [1]
6
3 (a) (i) Define linear momentum.
………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………….. [1]
(ii) Use your definition of momentum to define force.
………………………………………………………………………………………..
………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………….. [2]
(iii) Show that this definition leads to the equation F = ma
[2]
(b) An apple and a leaf fall from a tree at the same instant. Both apple and leaf start at the
same height above the ground but the apple hits the ground first.
Use Newton’s Laws of motion to explain why
(i) the leaf accelerates at first then reaches a terminal velocity,
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………… [3]
(ii) the apple hits the ground first.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………… [2]
7
4 A photomultiplier tube can be used to detect high-energy charged particles. Fig. 4
shows a diagram of a particular photomultiplier tube.
Fig. 4
The incoming charged particle strikes the scintillator material and produces a short burst
of visible light. When this light reaches the photocathode, it removes some of the
surface electrons due to the photoelectric effect. These electrons are then accelerated
towards the first positive dynode because of the 100 V potential difference between it
and the cathode. The kinetic energy of the electron is sufficient to liberate, on average,
3 ‘secondary’ electrons from the dynode. These electrons are then accelerated towards
the next dynode and the whole process is repeated. Eventually a tiny pulse of charge is
detected at the anode.
In one particular case, a proton of kinetic energy 0.70 MeV produces 550 photons of light
of wavelength 410 nm in the scintillator material. For a photomultiplier with 10 dynodes,
a single electron emitted from the photocathode produces a pulse of charge lasting
2.3×10-8s at the anode. The work function energy of the material of the photocathode is
3.5×10-19 J.
(a) Show that the energy of the high-speed proton is 1.1×10-13 J.
[1]
(b) Calculate the energy of a single photon of light of wavelength 410 nm.
Energy = ………………………….J [2]
8
(c) Determine the percentage of kinetic energy lost by the proton in the scintillator
material.
Percentage of energy lost =………………………% [1]
(d) Show that the maximum kinetic energy of an electron liberated from the
photocathode is about 1×10-19 J.
[2]
(e) Calculate the number of electrons arriving at the anode for each electron emitted
from the cathode.
Number =……………………….. [1]
(f) Calculate the average current from the anode due to a single electron leaving the
photocathode.
Current =………………………..A [2]
9
Section B
Answer two of the questions in this section
5 (a) Two transverse waves, P and Q, of equal frequency, have intensities I and 0.64I
respectively. Wave P has amplitude A. Waves P and Q interfere to form an
interference pattern.
(i) State two necessary conditions for the waves to produce an observable
interference pattern.
………………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
(ii) Determine, in terms of I, the maximum intensity of the interference pattern.
maximum intensity = …………………….. [3]
(b) Figure 5.1 shows two loudspeakers S1 and S2 placed in an open field on a still day.
Their separation is 3.81 m. D is a microphone placed in the same horizontal plane
as the loudspeakers, and at a distance of 10.0 m from S1. The lines S1S2 and S1D
are perpendicular to each other. When the speakers are switched on, sound of
frequency f = 1650 Hz is emitted in phase. Assume the microphone and
loudspeakers are point objects.
S2
3.81 m
10.0 m D
S1
Figure 5.1
10
(i) Given that the speed of sound in air is 330 m s-1, calculate the wavelength of
the sound emitted.
wavelength = …………………….. m [2]
(ii) Calculate the distance S2D.
S2D = …………………… m [1]
(iii) 1. Determine the phase difference between the sound waves reaching D
from S1 and S2.
Phase difference = ……………….. rad [1]
2. Hence explain whether a minimum of intensity or a maximum of intensity

would be detected by D.
……………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………………..
[2]
……………………………………………………………………………………………..
11
(iv) When the frequency of the sound was slowly increased to a value f1, the
microphone D detected three cycles of change in intensity. Calculate f1.
f1 = ………………………. Hz [3]
(c) In an experiment to investigate the properties of stationary waves, one end of a rubber
cord is attached to a vibrator, the frequency of which can be varied, and the other end
to a rigid support.
Figure 5.2
Figure 5.2, which is to scale 1:10 cm on both axes, shows the cord vibrating at one of
its harmonics.
(i) By making measurements on Figure 5.2,
1. determine the wavelength of the stationary wave, and
wavelength = …………….. cm [1]
2. its amplitude.
Amplitude = ………………. cm [1]
12
(ii) Describe briefly the motion of the cord at each of the points A, B and C
emphasizing any differences.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..
………………………………………………………………………………………………….. [3]
(iii) If the frequency of the vibrator is 400 Hz, calculate the wave speed.
Wave speed = ……………… m s-1 [1]
13
6 (a) (i) Define electric potential difference and state the SI unit in which it is
measured.
………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
(ii) Use your definition in (i) to show that P, the power dissipation in a resistor of
resistance R is given by
V2
P=
R
where V is the potential difference across the resistor.
[3]
14
(b) A set of coloured lamps are designed for use with a 240 V supply. The set up have
12 lamps connected as seen in Fig 6.1 below.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
240 V
Fig. 6.1
However, the lamps do not light up when the set is plugged in. Therefore, a
voltmeter is used to test the circuit. For each of the following observations, identify
the fault.
(i) The potential difference is zero across every lamp except EF, across which
the potential difference is 240 V.
………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………….. [1]
(ii) The potential difference between A and M is 240 V but the potential
difference is zero across every lamp.
………………………………………………………………………………………..
………………………………………………………………………………………… [1]
(c) (i) Some lamps are designed so that when the filament fails the resistance of the
lamp drops to zero. If this happens to one of the lamps in the above set up,
calculate the fractional increase in the power dissipated in each of the
remaining lamps, assuming that the resistance of these lamps does not
change.
Fractional increase = ……………………. [4]
15
(ii) What is likely to happen if failed lamps are not replaced?
………………………………………………………………………………………..
………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………… [2]
(d) A cell of e.m.f. 1.5 V and internal resistance 0.25 Ω is connected in series with a
resistor R, as shown in Fig. 6.2
Fig. 6.2
The resistor R is made of metal wire.
A current of 0.24 A passes through R for a time of 5.0 minutes.
Calculate
(i) The charge that passes through the cell,
Charge = ……………………..C [1]
(ii) The total energy transferred by the cell,
Energy = ……………………….J [2]

(iii) The energy transferred in the resistor R,
Energy = ……………………….J [2]

(iv) The resistance of R.
Resistance =…………………..Ω [2]

16
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a mass initially traveling at right angles to the Earth’s uniform
gravitational field.
Fig.7.1
(i) State the direction of the gravitational force experienced by the mass.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………… [1]
(ii) Describe the subsequent motion of the mass.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………… [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows an electron initially traveling parallel to a uniform electric field.
Fig. 7.2
(i) State the direction of the electric force experienced by the electron.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………… [1]
(ii) Describe the subsequent motion of the electron.
………………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………………….. [1]
17
(c) Fig. 7.3 shows a long molecule placed in a uniform electric field.
Fig.7.3
The ends of the molecule have equal but opposite charges. Describe the initial motion
of the molecule in the electric field.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. [2]
(d) (i) Define magnetic flux density.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………… [1]
(ii) Magnetic flux density is a vector quantity. Fig. 7.4 shows the magnetic flux
densities at point P due to two current-carrying conductors.
Fig.7.4
On Fig. 7.4 draw a vector diagram to determine the magnitude of the resultant
Magnetic flux density at point P.
Magnetic flux density =…………………….mT [4]

18
(e) Fig. 7.5 shows a flat rectangular coil placed in a uniform magnetic field.
Fig. 7.5
The frame has length a and width b. The magnetic field, of flux density B, is parallel to
the plane of the coil. The current in the coil is I. The current-carrying coil experiences a
torque T. Show how the torque is related to the cross-sectional area A of the coil.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………… [4]
19
(f) For a particular long straight current-carrying conductor, the magnetic flux density B at a
distance r from the conductor is given by the relation
1.3 × 10−6
B=
r
where the unit of B is tesla and the unit of r is metre.
(i) Determine the distance r from the conductor at which the magnitude of the
magnetic flux density is 160 μT.
r =…………………………..m [2]
(ii) Another long straight conductor carrying a current of 30 A is placed parallel to the
current-carrying conductor. The two conductors are separated by 12 mm.
Determine the magnitude of the force per unit length between the two conductors.
Force per unit length = ……………… N m-1 [3]
End of Paper 2
20
INNOVA JUNIOR COLLEGE
JC 2 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION 2
in preparation for General Certificate of Education Advanced Level
Higher 1
CANDIDATE
NAME
CLASS INDEX NUMBER
PHYSICS 8866/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice 17 September 2010
1 hour

Write your name, class and index number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are thirty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are
four possible answers A, B, C and D.
Answer Sheet.
This document consists of 14 printed pages
Innova Junior College [Turn over

© IJC 2010 8866/Prelim1 [Turn over
2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 x 108 m s-1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 x 10-19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 x 10-34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 x 10-27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 x 10-31 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 x 10-27 kg
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + ½at2
v2 = u2+ 2as
© IJC 2010 8866/Prelim 2 [Turn over

3
1 Which pair contains one vector and one scalar quantity?
A displacement and acceleration

B force and kinetic energy
C momentum and velocity
D power and speed
2 A student makes measurements from which she calculates the speed of sound as
327.66 m s-1. She estimates that her result is accurate to ± 3 %.
Which of the following gives her result expressed to the appropriate number of
significant figures?
A 327.7 m s-1 B 328 m s-1 C 330 m s-1 D 300 m s-1
3 Four students each made a series of measurements of the acceleration of free fall g.
The table shows the results obtained.
Which student obtained a set of results that could be described as precise but not
accurate?
student results, g / m s-2

A 9.81 9.79 9.84 9.83
B 9.81 10.12 9.89 8.94
C 9.45 9.21 8.99 8.76
D 8.45 8.46 8.50 8.41
4 An object has an initial velocity u. It is subjected to a constant force F for t seconds,

causing a constant acceleration a. The force is not in the same direction as the initial
velocity.
A vector diagram is drawn to find the final velocity v.
What does vector X in the diagram represent?
A F B Ft C at D u + at

4
5 A boy throws a ball vertically upwards. It rises to a maximum height, where it is

momentarily at rest, and falls back to his hands.
Which of the following gives the acceleration of the ball at various stages in its motion?
Take vertically upwards as positive. Neglect air resistance.
rising at maximum height falling

-2
A + 9.81 m s 0 - 9.81 m s-2
B - 9.81 m s-2 0 + 9.81 m s-2
C - 9.81 m s-2 0 - 9.81 m s-2
D - 9.81 m s-2 - 9.81 m s-2 - 9.81 m s-2
6 When a car driver sees a hazard ahead, she applies the brakes as soon as she can
and brings the car to rest. The graph shows how the speed v of the car varies with
time t after the hazard is seen.
Which graph represents the variation with time t of the distance s travelled by the car
after the hazard has been seen?

5
7 Which statement about Newton’s laws of motion is correct?
A The first law follows after the second law.

B The third law follows after the second law.
C Conservation of energy is a consequence of the third law.
D Conservation of energy is a consequence of the first law.
8 A tennis ball of mass 100 g is struck by a tennis racket. The velocity of the ball is
changed as shown.
What is the magnitude of the change in momentum of the ball?
A 1.0 kg m s-1 B 5.0 kg m s-1 C 1000 kg m s-1 D 5000 kg m s-1
9 A stationary body explodes into two components of masses m and 2m.
The components gain kinetic energy X and Y respectively.
What is the value of the ratio X ?

Y
A 0.25
B 0.50
C 2.0
D 4.0

6
10 A car with front-wheel drive accelerates in the direction shown.
Which diagram best shows the direction of the total force exerted by the road on the
front wheels?
11 A hinged door is held closed in the horizontal position by a cable.
Three forces act on the door. The forces are the weight W of the door, the tension T in
the cable and the force H at the hinge. The diagram is not drawn to scale.
Which list gives the three forces in increasing order of magnitude?
A W, H, T B W, T, H C H, T, W D T, H, W
12 Two springs P and Q both obey Hooke’s Law. They have spring constants 2k and k
respectively.
The springs are stretched, separately by the same force. The elastic potential energies
stored in spring P and Q are WP and WQ respectively.
How is WP related to WQ?
A WP = ¼ WQ B WP = ½ WQ C WP = 2 WQ D WP = 4 WQ

7
13 A constant force of 9.0 kN, parallel to a rough inclined plane, moves a body of weight
20 kN through a distance of 40 m along the plane at constant speed. The body gains
12 m in height, as shown.
What is the work done by friction?
A 120 kJ B 240 kJ C 360 kJ D 600 kJ
14 A cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o) is used to determine the frequency of a sound wave.

The time-base of the c.r.o is set at 0.25 ms per cm and the trace obtained is shown in
the diagram.
What is the frequency of this sound wave?
A 0.50 Hz
B 1.0 Hz
C 500 Hz
D 1000 Hz

8
15 A displacement-time graph for a transverse wave is shown in the diagram.
The phase difference between X and Y can be expressed as nπ.
What is the value of n?
A 1.0 B 1.5 C 2.0 D 3.0
16 A light meter measures the intensity I of the light falling on it. Theory suggests that this
varies with the inverse of the square of the distance d.
Which graph of the results support this theory?

9
17 A stationary wave has a series of nodes. The distance between the first and the sixth
node is 30.0 cm.
What is the wavelength of the sound wave?
A 5.0 cm B 6.0 cm C 10.0 cm D 12.0 cm
18 Monochromatic light incident on an adjustable single slit produces on a screen a

distribution of intensity represented by the diagram below.
What is observed on the screen when the width of the slit is reduced?
A The central peak decreases in intensity and its width increases.

B The central peak increases in intensity and its width decreases.
C The central peak decreases in intensity and its width remains.
D The central peak increases in intensity and its width remains.
19 In an interference experiment, two slits are illuminated with white light.
What is seen on the screen?
A The central fringe is black with black and white fringes on each side.
B The central fringe is black with coloured continuous spectrum on each side.
C The central fringe is white with black and white fringes on each side.
D The central fringe is white with coloured continuous spectrum on each side.

10
20 The current in the circuit is 4.8 A.
What is the rate of flow and the direction of flow of electrons through the resistor R?
rate of flow direction of flow

A 3.0 × 10 s
19 -1
X to Y
B 6.0 × 1018 s-1 X to Y
C 3.0 × 1019 s-1 Y to X
D 6.0 × 1018 s-1 Y to X
21 The resistivity of aluminum is 2.0 times that of silver. An aluminium wire of length L
and diameter d has a resistance R.
What is the diameter of the silver wire, also of length L and resistance R?
A 0.05 d B 0.71 d C 1.4 d D 2.0 d
22 The current I flowing through a component varies with the potential difference V
across it as shown.
Which graph best represents how the resistance R varies with V?
A B C D

11
23 When four identical lamps P, Q, R and S are connected as shown in diagram 1, they
have normal brightness.
The four lamps and the battery are then connected as shown in diagram 2.
Which statement is correct?
A The lamps do not light up.

B The lamps are less bright than normal.
C The lamps have normal brightness.
D The lamps are brighter than normal.
24 In the circuit, the battery has an e.m.f. of 12 V and an internal resistance of 3.0 Ω. The
ammeter has negligible resistance.
The switch is closed.
What is the reading on the ammeter?
A 0.50 A B 1.0 A C 1.3 A D 2.0 A

12
25 A long straight wire XY lies in the same plane as a square loop of wire PQRS which is
free to move. The sides PS and QR are initially parallel to XY. The wire and loop carry
steady currents as shown in the diagram.
What will be the effect of the loop?
A It will move towards the long wire.

B It will move away from the long wire.
C It will rotate about an axis parallel to XY.
D It will be unaffected.
26 An electron of velocity v is moving along the axis of a solenoid carrying current, I.
v axis of solenoid
electron
Which of the following is a correct statement about the magnetic force acting on the
electron?
A The force acts perpendicularly to the direction of motion.

B The force acts in the same direction of motion.
C The force acts in the opposite direction of motion.
D No force acts.

13
27 In a photoelectric emission experiment on a certain metal surface, two quantities,

when plotted as a graph of y against x, give a straight line passing through the origin.
Which of the following correctly identifies x and y with the photoelectric quantities?
x y
A photocurrent threshold frequency
B frequency of incident light maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons
C light intensity photocurrent
D light intensity maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons
28 In a photoelectric experiment, electrons are ejected from metals X and Y by light of

frequency f. The potential difference V required to stop the electrons is measured for
various frequencies.
If Y has a greater work function than X, which graph illustrates the expected results?
A B
C D

14
29 The diagram shows the energy levels for an atom, drawn to scale. The electron
transitions give rise to the emission of a spectrum of lines of λ1, λ2, λ3, λ4 and λ5.
What can be deduced from this diagram?
A λ1 > λ2
B λ3 = λ4 + λ5
C λ4 is the shortest of the five wavelengths.
D The transition corresponding to wavelength λ3 represents the ionisation of the
atom.
30 Which of the following about line spectrums is true?
A A beam of electrons directed at a vessel of cold gas could cause the formation of
either an absorption or emission line spectrum.
B A beam of white light directed at a vessel of cold gas could cause the formation of
only an absorption line spectrum.
C A beam of electrons directed at a vessel of cold gas could only cause the
formation of an absorption line spectrum.
D A beam of electrons directed at a vessel of cold gas could only cause the
formation of an emission line spectrum.
END OF PAPER

INNOVA JUNIOR COLLEGE
JC 2 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION 2
in preparation for General Certificate of Education Advanced Level
Higher 1
CANDIDATE
NAME
CLASS INDEX NUMBER
PHYSICS 8866/02
Structured Questions 17 September 2010
2 hours
Candidates answer on the Question Paper
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST For Examiner’s Use
Write your name, class and index number on all the work you Section A
hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen on both sides of the paper. 1
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough 6
working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction 2
7
fluid.
3
8
For Section A
Answer all questions. 4
6
For Section B
Answer any two questions. 5
6
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely 6

7
together.
The number of marks is given in the brackets [ ] at the end of Section B
each question or part question.
7
20
8
20
9
20
Total
80
Penalty
This document consists of 23 printed pages and 1 blank page.

Innova Junior College [Turn over
2
For
Data Examiner’s
Use
Formulae
v2 = u2+ 2as

3
Section A For
Examiner’s
Use
Answer all the questions in this section.
1 (a) Complete Fig. 1.1 to show each quantity and its base units. [2]
quantity base units

speed m s-1
density kg m-3
…………………… kg m s-1
light intensity ……………………
Fig. 1.1
(b) In the classroom, a student wishes to determine the mass of a plastic semi-circular
protractor.
Fig. 1.2
(i) Give a reasoned estimate of the mass of the semi-circular protractor and express
your answer in an SI unit.
mass = ………………………… unit ……………. [2]
(ii) State an instrument which is most appropriate for the measurement of the
thickness of the protractor x, as indicated in Fig. 1.2.
instrument : ………………………… [1]
(iii) For the measurement of x, suggest a way to reduce random errors.
…..…………………………………………………………………………..……………….
……………………………………………………………………………..…..…….….. [1]

4
2 ‘Clay pigeon shooting’ is a sport whereby the shooter aims and hits the clay disc For
Examiner’s
projected by a launcher. A certain clay disc is launched from the horizontal ground with a Use
o
velocity of 20 m s-1 at an angle of 30 to the horizontal.
(a) Calculate, for this disc, the initial values of
(i) the vertical component of the velocity, and
vertical component = ………………………… m s-1 [1]
(ii) the horizontal component of the velocity.
horizontal component = ………………………… m s-1 [1]
(b) Assuming that air resistance can be neglected, determine
(i) the maximum height of the disc, and
maximum height = ………………………… m [2]
(ii) the horizontal distance between the point from which the disc is launched and
where it lands on the ground.
horizontal distance = ………………………… m [2]
(c) If air resistance is not neglected, state how the maximum height and the horizontal
distance will be affected.
…..………………………………………………………………………………………………
..……………………………………..……………………………………………………… [1]

5
3 (a) Use energy considerations to distinguish between electromotive force (e.m.f.) and For
Examiner’s
potential difference (p.d.). Use
…..………………………………………………………………………………………………
…..………………………………………………………………………………………………
…..………………………………………………………………………………………………
..……………………………………..……………………………………………………… [2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows the relation between the direct current I in a diode and the potential
difference V across it. When V < 1.8 V, the current is negligible.
I / mA
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V/V
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2 shows the above diode connected in series to a resistor of resistance 5.0 Ω
in a circuit where the battery has an e.m.f. E and with negligible internal resistance.
The current indicated on the ammeter is 400 mA.
5.0 Ω
Fig. 3.2

6
(i) Show that the potential difference across the resistor is 2.0 V [1] For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Hence, calculate the e.m.f. E of the supply.
E = ………………………… V [2]
(iii) Calculate the resistance of the diode in this case.
resistance = ………………………… Ω [1]
(iv) Using the graph in Fig. 3.1, explain if the diode obeys Ohm’s law.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………..……………………………………………………… [2]

7
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a battery of e.m.f. 24 V with an internal resistance of 0.70 Ω. For
Examiner’s
Use
24 V
0.70 Ω
5.0 Ω 5.0 Ω
12 Ω
Fig. 4.1
(a) Calculate the current drawn from the battery.
current = ………………………… A [2]
(b) Calculate the power in each of the 5.0 Ω resistor.
power = ………………………… W [2]
(c) Calculate the terminal potential difference.
terminal potential difference = ………………………… V [2]

8
5 (a) Define For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) magnetic flux density,
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
...………………………………..………………………………………………………. [1]
(ii) the tesla
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
...………………………………..………………………………………………………. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an electric motor which is made up of a rectangular coil of wire of 150
turns. The coil is 0.20 m long and 0.12 m wide. The coil has a current of 0.32 A
flowing through it and its plane is parallel to a field of magnetic flux density 0.36 T.
magnetic field
0.12 m
Y
0.20 m
0.32A
X
Fig. 5.1
(i) Draw arrows on Fig. 5.1 to represent the directions of the magnetic forces acting
on the coil. Label them F. [1]
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic force acting on one side of the coil.
force = ………………………… N [2]

9
(iii) Calculate the torque which is exerted on the coil. For
Examiner’s
Use
torque = ………………………… N m [1]

10
6 Multi-bladed low-speed wind turbines (windmills) similar to the one shown in Fig. 6.1 For
Examiner’s
have been used since 1870, particularly for pumping water on farms. Use
Fig. 6.1
The turbine blades cover almost the whole surface of the wheel and a tail vane behind
the windmill keeps the wheel facing the wind. The diameters of the wheel of windmills of
this type vary from 2 m to a practical maximum of about 12 m. Because of this size
limitation, they are not suited to large power outputs. They will start freely with wind
speeds as low as 2 m s-1 and, at these low speeds, can produce large torques.

11
Fig. 6.2 shows how P, the output power of these windmills, varies with the overall For
Examiner’s
diameter of the wheel for different wind speeds, v. Use
v = 10 m s-1 v = 9.0 m s-1
v = 8.0 m s-1
Power P / W
v = 7.0 m s-1 v = 6.0 m s-1
v = 5.0 m s-1
v = 4.0 m s-1
v = 3.0 m s-1
v = 2.0 m s-1
Fig. 6.1
2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
diameter / m
Fig. 6.2

12
(a) Use the data in Fig. 6.2 to show how, for a particular multi-bladed low-speed windmill For
Examiner’s
with a wheel of diameter 6.0 m, the power output P varies with the wind speed v. Use
Enter your values in the table in Fig. 6.3.
v / m s-1 P/W lg (v / m s-1) lg (P / W)
Fig. 6.3
[3]
(b) Use the data in Fig. 6.3, plot a graph of lg (P / W) against lg (v / m s-1).
[1]

13
(c) The relationship between P and v is of the form P = k v n, where n and k are For
Examiner’s
constants. Find the value of n and k. Show your working. Use
n = …………………………
k = ………………………… [3]

14
Section B For
Examiner’s
Use
Answer two of the questions from this section.
7 (a) (i) State Newton’s first law of motion and show it leads to the concept of force.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
.………………………………..……..…………………………………………………. [2]
(ii) With the aid of a diagram, describe a situation in which an object has an
acceleration in the opposite direction to its velocity. Include labelled arrows in the
diagram to illustrate the velocity v and acceleration a.
…....……………………………………………………………………………………….
…....……………………………………………………………………………………….
…....……………………………………………………………………………………….
……....………………………………………………………………………………… [2]
(b) (i) Explain what is meant by the linear momentum of a body.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
.………………………………..……..…………………………………………………. [1]
(ii) State the relationship between the linear momentum p of a body of mass m and
its kinetic energy E.
..………………………………………………………………………………………… [1]

15
(c) A ship of mass 1.2 × 107 kg is moving backwards with a velocity of 0.50 m s-1 towards For
Examiner’s
a dockside. In order to stop the ship, the engines are ordered full ahead. Use
(i) Calculate the initial kinetic energy of the ship.
kinetic energy = ………………………… J [1]
(ii) Assuming that viscous effects are negligible, calculate the magnitude of the
constant retarding force which must be exerted on the ship if it is to stop in a
distance of 15 m.
retarding force = ………………………… N [3]
(iii) Calculate the time taken by the ship to stop under these conditions.
time = ………………………… s [2]
(iv) Explain qualitatively how your answer in (iii) would be affected by viscous forces.
…......……..…………………………………………………………………………………
…......……..…………………………………………………………………………………
…......……..…………………………………………………………………………………
……..……..…………………………………………………………………………………
…......……..…………………………………………………………………………………
...……..………………………………………………………………………………..... [3]

16
(v) Calculate the change in momentum of the ship as it comes to a complete halt at For
Examiner’s
the dock. Use
change in momentum = ………………………… N s [2]
(vi) Using your answer in (v) and with the aid of a diagram, explain how the law of
conservation of momentum is applied in this example.
……..……..…………………………………………………………………………………
……..……..…………………………………………………………………………………
……..……..…………………………………………………………………………………
……..……..…………………………………………………………………………………
……..……..…………………………………………………………………………………
...……..……………..…………………………………………………………………... [3]

17
8 (a) (i) What do you understand by the term interference? Explain your answer by For
Examiner’s
reference to the fringe pattern when a narrow beam of monochromatic light has Use
passed through a double slit.
..……...……..………………………………………………………………………………
..……...……..………………………………………………………………………………
..……...……..………………………………………………………………………………
….....……..……………………………………………………………………………... [2]
(ii) State three conditions necessary for the two light wavetrains to produce a well-
defined interference pattern.
1. ……...……..……………………………………………………………………..………
……..……………………………………………………………………………............
2. ……...……..……………………………………………………………………..………
….…..……………………………………………………………………………............
3. ……...……..……………………………………………………………………..………
.........……………………………………………………………………………........ [3]
(b) A student sets up the apparatus shown in Fig. 8.1 to demonstrate a two slit
interference pattern on the screen. The set-up was modelled after Young’s double slit
experiment. The slits S1 and S2 are of the same width.
single double screen

slit slit
S1
laser So d
beam S2
Fig. 8.1

18
(i) Explain why the single slit So is not necessary in this particular set-up. For
Examiner’s
Use
………………………………………………………………………………………………
.…...……………………….……………………………………………………………. [1]
(ii) Explain how the result of this experiment provided evidence that light must have
wave properties.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
.…...……………………….……………………………………………………………. [2]
(iii) The laser beam has a wavelength of 630 nm. The separation d is 1.0 mm and the
distance D is 2.5 m. Calculate the separation of the fringes on the screen.
separation = ………………………… m [2]
(iv) Describe and explain what change would be observed on the screen if both the
slits S1 and S2 are made narrower by half while maintaining the same separation
d.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
....……………………….………………………………………………………………. [3]

19
(v) Describe and explain what change would be observed on the screen if both the For
Examiner’s
slits S1 and S2 are covered with pieces of light polariser and the polariser in front Use
o o
of S1 is rotated slowly from 0 to 90 .
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………….……………………………………………………………. [4]
(c) The notion that light is waves was brought to question when certain experimental
results based on the photoelectric effect cannot be explained using the wave model.
(i) Explain two ways in which the results from the photoelectric effect shows that
light has particle properties instead.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
...………………………….……………………………………………………………. [2]
(ii) The results from the Young’s double slit experiment and the photoelectric effect
have led to the nature of light. State the idea.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
....………………………….……………………………………………………………. [1]

20
9 (a) (i) Electromagnetic waves have a wave nature as well as a particulate nature. This For
Examiner’s
is known as wave-particle duality. Describe a situation in which particles can be Use
shown to have a wave nature.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………….……………………………………………………………. [2]
−28
(ii) Calculate the wavelength of a particle of mass 1.82 x 10 kg when travelling with
a speed which equals to 10% of the speed of light.
wavelength = ………………………… m [2]
(iii) Fig 9.1 illustrates a phenomenon known as the Compton effect, whereby an
incident X-ray photon is scattered by an electron at rest. The wavelength of the
scattered photon λ’ is found to be longer than the wavelength λ of the incident
photon.
electron after
collision
incident
photon (λ)
θ
electron at φ
rest
Scattered
photon (λ’)
Fig. 9.1
Using de-Broglie’s relation, suggest how this phenomenon demonstrates the

particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………….……………………………………………………………. [2]

21
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows an experimental setup to investigate the photoelectric effect. For
Examiner’s
Ultraviolet (UV) light of wavelength 237 nm is incident on an emitter of area 2.0 cm2 Use
and a current reading of 2.00 nA is registered.
I
A
collector +
UV light Variable
V d.c supply
_
emitter
Fig. 9.2
(i) Given that every 1 in 5 photons causes a photoelectron to be emitted from the
emitter, show that the rate of photons incident on the emitter is 6.25 × 1010 s-1.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the energy of each photon incident on the emitter.
photon energy = ………………………… J [1]
(iii) Calculate the intensity of the incident radiation.
intensity = ………………………… W m-2 [3]

22
(iv) The battery connections in Fig. 9.2. are reversed so that the emitter is made For
Examiner’s
positive with respect to the collector. Use
1. Given that the work function of emitter is 4.7 eV, calculate the stopping
potential.
stopping potential = ………………………… V [2]
2. Explain why the stopping potential in (b)(iv)1. remains the same when the
intensity of the UV light is increased.
……………………………………………………………..……………………………
……………………………………………………………..……………………………
……………………………………………………………..……………………………
……………………………………………………………..……………………………
..….……………………………………………..………………………………………
.………..……….…………………………..……………………….………………. [3]
(c) Fig. 9.3 represents the energy levels for an atom. The atom at ground state is
bombarded with an electron of energy 17 eV.
n=4 -2eV
n=3 -5 eV
n=2 -7 eV
n=1 -20 eV
Fig. 9.3
(i) State all possible photon energies when the atom returns to its ground state.
…...………………..……….……………………………………………………………. [2]

23
(ii) On Fig. 9.4, sketch the appearance of the spectrum which corresponds to the For
Examiner’s
frequencies of the emitted photons. Use
[1]
Increasing frequency
Fig. 9.4
END OF PAPER

Innova Junior College
2010 Prelim 2 H1 Physics
Paper I Solutions
Qn Ans Qn Ans Qn Ans

1 B 11 A 21 B
2 C 12 B 22 B
3 D 13 A 23 C
4 C 14 C 24 B
5 D 15 D 25 A
6 C 16 D 26 D
7 A 17 D 27 C
8 B 18 A 28 A
9 C 19 D 29 A
10 B 20 C 30 D
1. A displacement (vector) and acceleration (vector)

B force (vector) and kinetic energy (scalar)
C momentum (vector) and velocity (vector)
D power (scalar) and speed (scalar)
2.
ΔV = 0.03×327.66
ΔV = 9.8298
ΔV = 10m s-1 (to 1 s.f.)
∴V = 330 ± 10m s-1
3.
student results, g / m s-2 <g> range of g values
A 9.81 9.79 9.84 9.83 9.8175, accurate 0.05, precise
B 9.81 10.12 9.89 8.94 9.6900, accurate 1.18, not precise
C 9.45 9.21 8.99 8.76 9.1025, not accurate 0.69, not precise
D 8.45 8.46 8.50 8.41 8.4550, not accurate 0.09, precise
4.
-u
The vector on side X is the sum of vector : v + (-u)

From v = u + at,
v – u = at
1
5. Since air resistance is neglected, the ball undergoes free fall after it leaves the hand and
before it falls back on the hand. Under free-falling, the acceleration is due to gravity and
acting downwards (negative by convention) all the time, even when the ball is
momentarily at rest at the maximum height.
6.
Deceasing velocity to 0 m s-1

means gradient of s-t graph
Constant velocity
decreases to zero.
means gradient of s-t
graph is constant.
7. From Newton’s second law, net force is proportional to the rate of change of momentum.
For a case where there is no net force acting on an object, the object will maintain its
momentum (i.e. either stay at rest or continue its motion with a constant speed along a
straight line) , which is Newton’s first law.
8. Δ p = pf – pi
Sign convention: Take rightwards as positive.

Δ p = m vf – m vi
Δ p = [0.100 (–30)] – [0.100 (20)]
Δ p = – 5.0 kg m s-1 (to the left)
⏐Δ p⏐ = 5.0 kg m s-1
9.
From Conservation of Momentum,
Initial momentum of system = Final momentum of system
0 = px + p y
py = – p x
p2
Use KE = to establish the ratio,
2m
2
px 2 px
X 2(m ) 2(m )
= 2
= 2
= 2.0
Y py px
2(2m ) 2(2m )
2
10. Total force is the sum of the normal force and friction.
Normal force by road
Friction by road
11.
Ty
Tx
Hx
Hy
Considering the forces in the x-direction,

Tx = Hx
Considering the forces in the y-direction,

Ty = Hy + Wy
Since Tx = Hx and Ty > Hy,

hence T > H (Only Option A and C)
Since Ty > W, and W has no x-component,

Hence T > W
(Leaving option A as the answer)
12. By Hooke’s Law, F = k x Work done on spring:

W=½Fx
For spring P, Since F is constant,
F = (2k) xP W∝ x
F
xP =
2k WP xP
=
WQ xQ
For spring Q,
F = (k) xQ F
F WP 2k 1
XQ = = =
WQ F 2
k
k
WP = ½ WQ
3
13.
work done by applied force = work done to overcome friction + gain in GPE
(9.0 × 103) (40) = work done to overcome friction + (20 × 103) (12)
work done to overcome friction = 120 kJ
14.
period = time base × number of squares
period = (0.25 × 10-3) (8)
period = 2.0 × 10-3 s
1 1
f = = = 500 Hz
T 2.0×10-3
15.
Δφ Δt
=
2π T
Δφ 1.5T
=
2π T
Δφ = 3 π
∴n = 3
1
16. Since I ∝ ,
d2
1
I=k ,
d2
1
For a graph of I against , a straight line passing through the origin is obtained.
d2
17. 2.5 λ = 30.0 cm
λ = 12.0 cm
18.
Slit width decrease, more diffraction, width of central maxima increase.

When the slit width is reduced, less light is allowed to pass through, hence the overall
intensity decreases.
19. The zeroth order fringes of the various wavelengths overlap to give a central bright fringe.
Other than this, the various wavelengths of light are diffracted by different diffraction
angles (red, having the largest wavelength, will be diffracted the most), to form coloured
fringes on each side.
20. Q = I t
Ne e = I t
Ne I
=
t e
Ne
= 3.0 × 1019 s-1
t
The electrons flow from the negative to the positive terminal of the battery. Hence Y to X.
4
21.
ρL
R=
R
ρL
R= 2
⎛d ⎞
π⎜ ⎟
⎝2⎠
Since the wires have the same resistance and length,

ρ alumimium ρ silver
2
= 2
⎛ d alumimium ⎞ ⎛ d silver ⎞
π⎜ ⎟ π⎜ ⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠
ρ silver d silver 2
=
ρ alumimium d alu min ium 2
1 d silver 2
=
2 d2
d silver = 0.71 d
V V
22. R is the ratio of . The graph show that the ratio of is initially constant. Subsequently,
I I
the ratio increases with V. Hence Option B.
23. The potential difference across each lamp in diagram 2 is the same as that in diagram 1.
Hence power dissipated in each lamp is the same. Each lamp will light up with normal
brightness.
24. The circuit can be redrawn in the following way.
Let the total external resistance be R.

1 1 1
= +
R 6 6
R = 3.0 Ω
E = I (R+r)
12 = I (3.0 + 3.0)
I = 2.0 A
Since I1 + I2 = 2.0 A
And I1 = I2
I1 = 1.0 A
5
25. XY carrying a current upwards, produces a magnetic field (into the page) in the region
where PQRS is. Segment PS, carrying a current upwards experiences a magnetic force
directed towards XY while segment QR, carrying a current downwards will experience a
magnetic force away from XY. However, the strength of the magnetic field decreases
with distance from XY, hence PS being nearer to XY will experience a larger force
compared to QR. Hence, the coil experiences a net force towards XY and it will move in
that direction.
The magnetic force acting on PQ upwards and the magnetic force acting on SR is
downwards. These 2 forces are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction, hence they
cancel.
26. The magnetic field is directed along the axis of the solenoid (by Right Hand Grip Rule).
The electron does not have a component of the velocity that is perpendicular to the
magnetic field. Hence no magnetic force acts.
27. As light intensity increases, the number of photons arriving at the metal surface per unit
time increases. An increase in the number of photons per unit time by a certain
proportion will lead to an increase in the number of photoelectrons per unit time (hence
photocurrent) in the same proportion.
28. From photoelectric effect equation:
h f = φ + e VS
h φ
VS = f-
e e
Since Y has a greater work function, the graph of Y should have a y-intercept which
is more negative than the y-intercept for the graph of X.
h
Since is a constant, both graphs have the same gradient.
e
Hence, option A.
29. From E = hc , energy of photon 1 is smaller than energy of photon 2, hence λ1 > λ2.
λ
30. Option A: only emission spectrum is formed
Option B: both absorption and emission spectrums could be observed depending on the
direction of viewing. (Refer to 2008 H1 P2 Q4)
Option C: only emission spectrum is formed
6
Innova Junior College
2010 Prelim 2 H1 Physics
Paper 2 Solutions
1 (a)
kg m s-1 = [mass] × [velocity] = [momentum] or [impulse] [B1]
P E mas
I= = =
A At At
[m][a][s] (kg) (m s-2 ) (m)
[I]= = = kg s-3 [B1]
[A][t] (m2 )(s)
(b)
(i)
Estimate the density of plastic to be 2 times that of water = 2 g cm-3
Mass of protractor = (Volume) (Density)

Mass of protractor = ½ π r 2 x ρ
Mass of protractor = ½ π (5.0)2 (0.1) (2)
Mass of protractor = 7.9 g
[M1] for logical reasons

[A1] for acceptable range of 5 to 50 g
(ii) Micrometer Screw Gauge [B1]
(iii) Repeat the measurement of x at different parts of the protractor and taking
average. [B1]
2 (a) (i) u y = u sin θ = (20) sin 30 o = 10.0 m s-1 [A1]

(ii) u x = u cos θ = (20) cos 30 o = 17.3 m s-1 [A1]
(b) (i) Taking into consideration, the vertical components of the motion
v 2y = u 2y + 2 gh
0 = (10.0) 2 + 2(−9.81)h [M1]
h = 5.10 m [A1]
(ii) The time taken to reach maximum height

v y = u y + gt
0 = 10.0 + (−9.81)t
t = 1.02 s [C1]
The horizontal distance (or the range)

= (u x )(time of flight )
= (17.3)(1.02×2)
= 35.3 m [A1]
(c) The maximum height and the horizontal distance will both be reduced. [B1]
1
3
(a) EMF refers to the change in energy from other forms to electrical by the source per
unit charge driven round a complete circuit.
Potential difference between two points is defined as the change in energy from
electrical to other forms per unit charge between the two points.
Correct statements with regards to energy conversion. [B1]

Both statements must include ‘per unit charge’. [B1]
(b) (i) The p.d. across the resistor = IR = (0.400) (5.0) [M1]
= 2.0 V [A0]
(ii) From Fig.3.1, when the current is 400 mA, the p.d. across the diode is 4.5 V.
The emf E = sum of the p.d. = 2.0 + 4.5 = 6.5 V [A1]
V 4.50
(iii) Resistance of diode = R = = = 11.3 Ω [A1]
I 0.400
(iv) The graph in Fig. 3.2 is not a straight line passing through the origin. [M1]
Thus, the current is not directly proportional to the potential difference. [A1]
(Note: No marks for stating Ohm’s law but making no reference to the graph.)
4
1 1 1 2
(a) = + =
Rnet 5.0 5.0 5.0
The net resistance of the resistors in parallel = 5.0 / 2 = 2.5 Ω
The combined resistance in the circuit = 0.70 + 2.5 + 12 = 15.2 Ω [M1]
The current drawn from battery = E / Combined resistance

= 24 / 15.2
= 1.58 A [A1]
(b) The power in each of the 5.0 Ω resistor

2
⎛ 1.58 ⎞
P= I R=⎜
2
⎟ (5.0) [M1]
⎝ 2 ⎠
= 3.12 W [A1]
(c) The terminal potential difference = Current × External resistance
V = (1.58)(2.5 + 12) [M1]

V = 22.9 V [A1]
Or V = E - Ir
V = 24 – (1.58)(0.70)
V = 22.9 V
2
5
(a) (i) Magnetic flux density is the magnetic force acting on a straight wire per unit length
per unit current flowing through it, when the wire is placed perpendicular to the
magnetic field. [B1]
(ii) It is the amount of magnetic flux density of a uniform magnetic field when a magnetic
force per unit length per unit current of 1 newton per metre per ampere acts on a
straight wire placed perpendicular to the magnetic field. [B1]
(b) (i)
Magnetic field
F 0.12 m
Y
0.20 m
0.32A F
Correct direction for forces acting on each side of the coil showing a couple [B1]
(ii) Magnitude of magnetic force on one side of the coil

F = NBIL sinθ
= (150)(0.36)(0.32)(0.20) sin 90o [M1]
= 3.46 N [A1]
(iii) Torque of a couple

= (Magnitude of one force)×(perpendicular distance between forces)
= (3.46)(0.12)
= 0.415 N m [A1]
3
6
(a)
v / m s-1 P/W lg ( v / m s-1) lg (P / W)
2.0 50 0.30 1.70
3.0 150 0.48 2.18
4.0 350 0.60 2.54
5.0 675 0.70 2.83
6.0 1150 0.78 3.06
7.0 1825 0.85 3.26
8.0 2750 0.90 3.44
9.0 3950 0.95 3.60
[B1] for 8 sets of readings of v and P values.

[B2] for calculation of lg v and lg P values. Allow 1 mistake in calculation. Deduct 1 mark
for each subsequent mistake. Note that s.f. is not the priority here.
(b)
lg (P / W)
x
3.5 x
0.91, 3.45
x
x
3.0
x
x
2.5
2.0 0.38, 1.90
1.5
1.0
0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00
-1
lg (v / m s )
[B1 for graph]
4
(c)
Linearise the equation P = k vn by taking lg on both sides,

lg P = lg (kvn)
lg P = lg k + n lg v [B1]
3.45 -1.90
Gradient =
0.91- 0.38
n = 2.93 (to 3 s.f) [A1] for n = 2.95 ± 0.05
Sub (0.38, 1.90) and gradient = 2.93,

1.90 = (2.93) (0.38) + y-intercept
y-intercept = 0.7866
lg k = 0.7866
k = 6.12 [A1]
7
(a) (i) Newton’s First Law of Motion states that every body continues in its state of rest
or uniform motion in a straight line unless a net external force acts on it to change
that state. [B1]
Hence, if we observe an object initially in a state at rest but which suddenly

moves, or an object moving at uniform speed in a straight line, but which
suddenly accelerates or changes its velocity [B1], we say that there must be a net
external force acting on it.
(ii)
v
(Diagram with 2 arrows- B1)
An object that is projected vertically upwards.[B1]
(b) (i) Linear momentum of a body is the product of its mass and its linear
velocity. [B1]
p2
(ii) E= [B1]
2m
(c) (i)
1 2 1
Initial KE = mu = (1.2 × 107 )(0.5)2
2 2
= 1.5 × 106 J [A1]
5
(ii)
Using v 2 = u 2 + 2as
0=(0.5)2 + 2a(15)
-(0.5)2
a= [C1]
2(15)
-(0.5)2
Required force=ma = (1.2 × 107 )[ ] [M1]
2(15)
= -1.0 × 105 N [A1]
(iii)
Using v = u + at ,
−(0.50)2
0 = 0.50 + [ ]t [M1]
2 × 15
t = 60 s [A1]
(iv)
Viscous force FD ∝ −v where v is the instantaneous velocity [B1]
The viscous force will provide a greater retardation force [B1], and the time
taken to stop the ship will be shorter [B1].
(Remarks: Viscous force will be greatest initially as the initial speed is
greatest, and it will reduce to zero when the final speed is zero)
(v)
Δp =m(v - u ) = 1.2 × 107 (0 − 0.50) [M1]
Δp = - 6.0 × 10 N s
6
[A1]
Fws
Fsw
Fws = force exerted by water on the ship
Fsw = force exerted by ship on the water
[B1] for diagram.
(vi) By considering the ship and the water as an isolated system and with no
external forces acting on the ship and the water [B1], the momentum lost by
the ship is equal to the momentum gained by the water [B1].
6
8(a)(i) Interference is the phenomenon that occurs when two or more waves overlap to
produce an effect that is equal to the combined effects of the component waves in
accordance with the principle of superposition. [B1]
In regions where the waves combined in phase, constructive interference occurs.

Here, bright fringes are observed.
In regions where the waves combined completely out of phase, destructive
interference occurs. Here, dark fringes are observed. [B1]
(ii) (1) The component waves must overlap or superposed. [B1]

(must be mentioned)
(2) The component waves must be coherent (ie have a constant phase difference
between them).
(3) The amplitudes of the component waves must be nearly the same.
(4) The component light waves must be unpolarised or if not, must share the same
plane of polarization.
Any other two of the above (2)-(4) [B2]
(b)(i) The single slit So is not necessary because the light source used is a laser which is
already coherent by its own nature. [B1]
(ii) The observation that there are bright and dark fringes on the screen is an indication
that interference has taken place. [B1]
Bright fringes are where constructive interference takes place while dark fringes are
where destructive interference takes place. The summation of the two combined
light rays is a direct consequence of the principle of superposition which applies to
waves. Thus, light has wave properties. [B1]
λD (630 ×10−9 )(2.5)

(iii) Separation of fringes x = = [M1]
d (1.0 ×10−3 )
= 1.58×10-3 m
= 1.58 mm [A1]
(iv) Since the separation d of the slits is maintained, the separation x of the fringes
remains unchanged. [B1]
When the slits are made narrower by half, the amplitude of the lights emerging from
the slits will be reduced by half. [B1]
Since the intensity is directly proportional to the square of the amplitude, when the
amplitude is halved, the intensity of the bright fridges will be reduced to a quarter.
[B1]
7
(v) The light rays emerging from the two polarisers will be plane polarized.
o
At 0 , where the planes of polarizations are parallel, the interference pattern is very
clear and distinct. [B1]
o
As the angle is increased towards 90 , the interference fringes become
progressively less distinct. [B1]
o
At 90 , when the two light waves have their planes of polarisation perpendicular to
each other, the interference pattern would disappear and only a uniform patch of
illumination is seen on the screen. [B1]
o o
When the angle increases from 0 to 90 , the interference pattern gradually
becomes less contrasting because the amplitude of one wave that has plane
parallel to the other is decreasing. At right angle, the two waves do not share
amplitudes in the same direction of polarization, thus interference do not occur.
[B1]
intensity
θ=0
o
θ = 90o
0o 〈θ〈 90o
(c) (i)
- When light ray is incident on a metal surface, photoelectrons are emitted only
when the frequency is above a minimum threshold frequency. Below this
frequency, no photoelectrons were emitted even when the intensity of
illumination is increased.
- Above the threshold frequency, the maximum kinetic energy of the
photoelectrons is dependent on the frequency rather than on the intensity of
the illumination.
- There was no time lag between the absorption of light and the emission of
photoelectrons when the intensity of illumination on the surface is varied.
2 × [B1] for any 2 of the above points.
(ii) Young’s double slit experiment showed us the light has wave properties while the
photoelectric effect showed us that light has particle properties. Thus, light has a
dual nature. Light is both a wave and a particle. [B1]
8
9
(a) (i) A beam of electrons passes through the graphite ‘diffraction grating’ [B1].
An interference pattern of circular concentric rings is seen on the screen [B1].
(ii)
h
λ=
mv
6.63 × 10−34
= [M1]
(1.82 × 10−28 ) × (0.10 × 3.0 × 108 )
=1.21× 10-13 m [A1]
(iii) As a result of collision, the momentum of the electron increases and the
momentum of the photon decreases as the momentum of the scattered photon
h h
is less than the momentum of the incident photon
λ' λ
(since λ’ is longer than λ). [B1]
From the principle of conservation of linear momentum [B1], the decrease in

the momentum of the incident photon displays the particulate nature of
electromagnetic radiation.
2.00 × 10−9
(b) (i) Rate of electrons produced = = 1.25 × 1010 [M1]
1.6 × 10−19
Rate of incident photons = 1.25 × 1010 × 5 [M1]
=6.25 × 1010 s−1 [A0]
(ii)
hc 6.63 × 10−34 × 3.0 × 108
E= =
λ 237 × 10−9
= 8.39 × 10−19 J [A1]
(iii) power = 8.39 × 10−19 × 6.25 × 1010 = 5.24 × 10−8 W [M1]

power 5.24 × 10−8
= [M1]
Intensity = area 2.0 × 10−4
= 2.62 × 10−4 W m−2 [A1]
(iv) 1.
9
hf = φ + eVs
Vs =
−19
(
hf − φ 8.39 × 10 − 4.7 1.6 × 10
=
−19
) [M1]
e 1.6 × 10 −19
= 0.544 V [A1]
2. Increasing intensity does not affect the photon energy and the photon
energy remains the same as the frequency of UV light is constant. [B1].
The radiation is incident on the same emitter surface (work function is also
constant)[B1].
The maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectron does not change [B1].
Hence the stopping potential does not change.
(c) (i) 2 eV, 13 eV & 15 eV [Deduct B1 for each incorrect answer]
(ii)
3 distinct lines drawn with 2 lines closely spaced on the right of the spectrum [B1]
10
Class Adm. No.
Candidate Name: ________________________________
Preliminary Examinations II
Pre-university 2
H1 PHYSICS 8866/01
Friday 24 Sep 2010 1 hour
OMR forms are required.
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not turn over this page until you are told to do so.
Write your full name, class and admission number in the spaces at the top of this page and
on any separate answer paper used.
Section A
Answer all 30 MCQ questions.
Shade your answers on the separate Optical Mark Reader (OMR) Form provided.
This document consists of 14 printed pages.

[Turn Over
2
Data
8 -1
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 x 10 m s
-19
elementary charge, e = 1.60 x 10 C
the Planck constant h = 6.63 x 10-34 Js
Unified atomic mass constant u = 1.66 x 10-27 kg
-31
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 x 10 kg
-27
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 x 10 kg
-2
acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s
Formulae
2
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + ½ at
2 2
v = u + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = p∆V
Electric potential V = Q / 4πεor
resistors in series, R = R1 + R2 + ....
resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + ....
3
1 When a beam of light is incident on a surface, it delivers energy to the surface. The intensity
of the beam is defined as the energy delivered per unit area per unit time.
What is the unit of intensity, expressed in SI base units?
A kg m2 s-3 B kg m2 s3 C kg s-2 D kg s-3
2 Shown below are four target boards from a shooting competition. Which of the following
indicates a small random error but a large systematic error?
3 The figure below shows three force vectors. Which of the vectors A, B, C, D would be most
likely to represent their resultant?
A B C D
[Turn Over
4
4 The velocity-time graph below depicts the motion of an object travelling in a straight line.
Which of the following statements is a correct interpretation of the graph?
A During the first 20 s of the motion, the object accelerates and travels a distance of
200m.
B The acceleration of the object increases during the first 20 s to become a maximum
when the velocity is 10 ms-1.
C The acceleration of the object when t = 5 s is equal to the acceleration when t = 35 s.
D The object decelerates during the final 20 s of its motion, the most rapid deceleration
occurring at t = 40 s.
5 The graph below shows how the distance s, travelled by a body from its starting point varies
with the time t.
The shape of the curve indicates that

1. the acceleration is increasing at X.
2. the speed is increasing at Z.
3. the body is at rest at Y.
Which of the following shows the correct answers?
A 1, 2, 3 B 1, 2 only C 2, 3 only D 3 only

5
6 From the top of a cliff overlooking a lake, John throws two stones. The stones have identical
initial speeds vO. Stone 1 is thrown downwards at an angle  below the horizontal, while
stone 2 is thrown upward at the same angle above the horizontal (see figure below).
Neglecting the effect of air resistance, which of the following is true?
A stone 1 strikes the water with a greater velocity than stone 2.

B stone 2 strikes the water with a greater velocity than stone 1.
C both stones strike the water with the same speed but at a different angle above the
water surface.
D both stones strike the water with the same velocity.
7 An object of mass 20 kg moves along a straight line on a smooth horizontal surface. A force
F acts on the object in its direction of motion. A graph of F against t is shown below.
What is the velocity of the object at t = 6 s if its velocity at t = 4 s is 4.0 m s-1 ?

A 3.0 m s-1 B 3.3 m s-1 C 4.7 m s-1 D 5.0 m s-1
8 An object is projected vertically upwards. Neglecting air resistance, which one of the
following statements is correct?
A according to the principle of conservation of energy, the total energy of the object is
constant throughout the motion.
B according to the principle of conservation of momentum, the momentum of the object
is constant throughout the motion.
C the object travels equal distances during equal periods of time during the ascent and
descent.
D the gravitational potential energy of the object increases uniformly with time during
the ascent.
[Turn Over
6
9 The diagram shows an object of weight 30 N suspended from a rod, attached to a wall. The
rod is kept in equilibrium by a wire attached at point Z of the rod.
The force exerted by the rod at point Z is F, and the tension in the wire is 60 N. Which
diagram represents the three forces acting at point Z?
10 The extension-force of a spring of spring constant k, is shown in the figure below. The work
done in extending the spring from x1 to x2 is given by
At which point must a vertical force of 6 N act to keep the bar in equilibrium?
A
1
F1  F2 x2  x1 
2
1 1
B F2 x2  F1 x1
2 2
C
1
F1  F2 x2  x1 
2
D
1
F1  F2 x2  x1 
2
7
11 The diagram below shows two bodies X and Y connected by a light cord passing over a
light, free-running pulley. X starts from rest and moves on a smooth plane inclined at 30 to
the horizontal.
What will be the total kinetic energy of the system when X has travelled 3.0 m along the
plane?
A 20 J B 59 J C 88 J D 206 J
12 A constant force is applied to a body which is initially stationary but free to move in the
direction of the force. Assuming that the effects of friction are negligible, which of the
following graphs best represents the variation of P, the power supplied, with time t?
A C
B D
13 In an attempt to find the frequency of a wave with a CRO, the timebase was set to 5 ms per
division and a trace of the waveform is as shown.
What is the frequency?
A 16.7 Hz B 33.3 Hz C 50.0 Hz D 100 Hz
[Turn Over
8
14 A loudspeaker emits a continuous sound of frequency 400 Hz. The graph in the figure below
shows the displacements of the air particles, along a straight line x, from their undisturbed
positions at one instant. Using the sign convention that displacement of the air particles to
the right is positive, at which point, A, B, C, D is the instantaneous pressure at its peak value?
15 The figure below shows a transverse wave on a rope. The wave is travelling from left to right.
At the instant shown, the points P and Q on the rope have maximum and zero displacement
respectively.
Which of the following describes the direction and magnitude of the acceleration of the
points P and Q at this instant?
A P – maximum down; Q - zero

B P – zero; Q – maximum down
C P – zero; Q – maximum up
D P – maximum up; Q - zero
16 When a stationary wave pattern is set up in a pipe open at both ends, which of the following
statements is correct?
A The frequency of the sound wave emitted is not equal to the frequency of the
stationary wave in the pipe.
B Nodes are found at the open ends.
C The wavelength of the stationary wave at the fundamental frequency is twice the
length of the pipe.
D Two nodes can be detected along the pipe at the fundamental frequency.
9
17 The figure shows two identical loudspeakers driven in phase from a common audio-
frequency source.
When a student moves along a line such as XV, he notices that there are regions in which
the sound heard is alternately loud and quiet. Regions in which the sound is loud may be
moved closer together by
A decreasing the distance d.

B increasing the distance L.
C increasing the frequency of the audio-frequency source.
D increasing the power output from the audio-frequency source.
18 A and B are two coherent sound sources which are out of phase. Point X shows permanent
zero displacement.
Calculate the sound wave with the minimum wavelength that can satisfy this condition.
A 0.75 m B 1.5 m C 2.0 m D 3.0 m
19 A wire carries a current of 2.0 A for 1.0 hour. How many electrons pass a point in this time?
-15
A 1.2 x 10
3
B 7.2 x 10
19
C 1.3 x 10
22
D 4.5 x 10
20 In the circuit below, all the resistors have the same value. A high resistance voltmeter is
connected between two points in the circuit. Between which two points of connection would
the meter read zero?
A Q and U
B P and T
C Q and W
D S and U
[Turn Over
10
21 The diagram shows the relation between the direct current I in a certain conductor and the
potential difference V across it. When V < 1.0 V, the current is negligible.
Which statement about the conductor is correct?
A It obeys Ohm's law and when V > 1.0 V, resistance = 20.0 .

B It obeys Ohm's law and when V > 1.0 V, resistance = 40.0 .
C It does not obey Ohm's law and when V > 1.0 V, resistance = 20.0 .
D It does not obey Ohm's law and when V > 1.0 V, resistance = 40.0 .
22 The diagram shows a circuit in which a 24 V d.c. supply is connected to 5 resistors.

What is the current flowing through the 4  resistor?
A 0A B 3A C 4A D 6A
23 The figure below shows four identical lamps, J, K, L and M, which are all lit. Lamp K is now
removed from the circuit.
Which one of the following statements is true?

A J, L and M are equally bright.
B J is brighter than before, but not as bright as L and M.
C J is dimmer than before, but not as bright as L and M.
D J is dimmer than before, but brighter than L and M.
11
24 A coil, mounted on an axle, has its plane parallel to the flux lines of a uniform magnetic field
B as shown.
When a current I is switched on, and before the coil is allowed to move,
A there are no forces due to B on the sides SP and QR.

B there are no forces due to B on the sides PQ and RS.
C sides SP and QR tend to attract each other.
D sides PQ and RS tend to attract each other.
25 A plotting compass is placed next to a vertical wire PQ. When there is no current in the wire
the compass points North as shown in the diagram.
Which diagram shows a possible direction for the compass to point when a current passes
from Q to P?
A B C D
[Turn Over
12
26 The diagram below shows a cross-sectional view of four long straight current-carrying wires.
The wires are parallel to each other and are perpendicular to the plan of the page, passing
through the points W, X, V, Z at the corners of a square. O is the intersection of the
diagonals of the square.
If the magnetic flux density at the point O is zero, which of the following statements must be
true?
I The currents in all four wires must be in the same direction.
II The currents in all four wires must be of the same magnitude.
III The current in Y must be in the same direction as that in W and the current in X must
be in the same direction as that in Z.
IV The current in Y must be in the opposite direction as that in W and the current in X
must be in the opposite direction as that in Z.
A I and II
B II and III
C III only
D II and IV
27 Which of the following set-up will not emit any photoelectrons?

Intensity / W ms-2 Work function of Wavelength of
metal / eV incoming radiation /m
A 1.0 2.0 3.0 X 10-7
B 0.5 3.0 3.0 X 10-7
C 0.5 2.0 6.0 X 10-7
D 1.0 3.0 6.0 X 10-7
13
28 A beam of monochromatic light incident on a metal surface causes the emission of
photoelectrons. The length of time that the surface is illuminated by this beam is varied, but
the intensity of the beam is kept constant.
Which graph best represents the relationship between the total number of photoelectrons
emitted and the length of time of illumination?
29 Given that the de Broglie wavelength of the tennis ball served with a speed of 72 km h-1 is
5.53 x 10-34 m, what is the best estimate of its kinetic energy?
A 1.2 J
B 2.4 J
C 12 J
D 24 J
[Turn Over
14
30 The figure shows some energy levels of an atom. The transition E3 to E1 corresponds to the
emission of visible light. A transition corresponding to the emission of infrared radiation could
be
END OF PAPER
Class Adm. No.
Candidate Name: ________________________________
Preliminary Examinations 2010

Pre-university 2
PHYSICS 8866/02
Higher 1
Friday 17 Sep 2010 2 hours
Paper 2 Structured questions


Write your name, class and admission number on all the work you hand in.
Sections A For examiner’s use

Answer all questions. Section A
Sections B
1 /6
2 /9
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely 3 /7
together. 4 /6
5 /12
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each
question or part question. Section B
6 /20
7 /20
8 /20
Total /80

[Turn over
2
Data
speed of light in free space c = 3.00 x 108 m s-1
elementary charge e = 1.60 x 1019 C
the Planck constant h = 6.63 x 1034 J s
unified atomic mass constant u = 1.66 x 1027 kg
rest mass of electron me = 9.11 X 1031 kg
rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 X 1027 kg
acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s2
Formulae
1 2
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + at
2
v2 = u2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas W = p∆V
hydrostatic pressure p = gh
resistors in series, R = R1 + R2 + ...
resistors in parallel 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + ...

3
Section A For
Examinar’s
Answer all the questions in this section Use
1 (a) Define acceleration.
…………………………………………………………………………………………...………
………………………………………………………………………………………...………[1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the variation of velocity with time for an object accelerating uniformly.
Fig. 1.1
The initial velocity of the object is u. After a time t, the velocity of the object is v. Show
that the displacement s of the object is given by
1
s  (u  v)t
2
[2]
[Turn over
4
(c) The graph shown in Fig. 1.2 shows the variation with time t of the velocity of a tennis For
Examinar’s
ball from the moment it is hit vertically upwards. Assume that air resistance is Use
negligible.
Fig. 1.2
(i) Use Fig. 1.2 to determine the maximum vertical height attained by the tennis
ball.
height = ……………………….. m [2]
(ii) On Fig 1.2, sketch the graph assuming that air resistance is not neglected.
[1]
5
2 (a) Define the moment of a force. For

Examinar’s
Use
…………………………………………………………………………………..….……………
……………………………………………………………………………………...…………[1]
(b) To increase the extension of a stiff spring for a given load, a student set up the
system shown in Fig. 2.1. The weight of the metal bar was 5.0 N and the tension the
student achieved in the spring was 37 N. The spring constant k of the spring is
550 N m-1.
Fig. 2.1
(i) Apply the principle of moments to calculate the mass of the load that the
student used.
mass = ………….. kg [2]
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the force exerted on the metal bar at the pivot.
magnitude of the force = ………………………. N [2]
(iii) On Fig. 2.1, draw and label the forces acting on the metal bar by the
spring (Fs) and pivot (Fp). [2]
[Turn over
6
(iv) Calculate the energy stored in the spring. For

Examinar’s
Use
energy stored = ………………………. J [2]
3 As shown in Fig. 3.1, a dry cell has an e.m.f. E and internal resistance r and is
connected to an external circuit. There is a current I in the circuit when the potential
difference across the terminals of the cell is V.
Fig. 3.1
(a) State expressions, in terms of E, V, r and I where appropriate, for
(i) the total power supplied by the cell.
……………………………………………………………………….…………...…[1]
(ii) the power dissipated in the cell.
……………………………………………………………………….…………...…[1]
(iii) the power dissipated in the external circuit.
…………………………………………………………………………….……...…[1]
(b) Use your answers to (a) to derive a relationship between V, E, I and r.
………………………………………………………………………………….……………[1]
7
(c) The graph in Fig. 3.2 shows the variation of V with I for the dry cell connected to a variable For
Examinar’s
resistor (rheostat), a voltmeter, and an ammeter. Use
Fig. 3.2
(i) Use the graph to determine the e.m.f. E of the cell.
e.m.f. E = ……………….. V [1]
(ii) Use the graph to determine the internal resistance r of the cell.
[Turn over
8
internal resistance r = …………………..  [2]

4 (a) State two differences between a progressive and a stationary wave. For
Examinar’s
Use
………………………………………………………………………………….………………
…………………………………………………………………………………….……………
…………………………………………………………………………………….……………
……………………………………………………………………………………….………[2]
(b) In order to investigate stationary waves on a stretched wire, a student sets up the
apparatus as illustrated in Fig. 4.1. One end of the horizontal wire is attached to a
vibrator while the other end is passed over a pulley. The wire is kept in tension by
means of a weight. Five light pieces of paper are placed along the wire randomly.
When the vibrator is operated at a frequency of 75 Hz, a stationary wave is created

along the stretched wire. The light pieces of paper shift along the stretched wire and
finally come to a rest at the nodes as shown in Fig. 4.1.
Fig. 4.1
(i) State what is meant by a node?
……………………………………………………………………….…………………
………………………………………………………………………….……………[1]
(ii) Calculate the wavelength of the vibration produced in the wire.
wavelength = ……………………. m [1]
(iii) Use your answer in (b)(ii) to calculate the speed of the wave on the wire.
9
speed = ………………………. m s-1 [2]

5 Two prominent commercial airplane manufacturers are Boeing and Airbus. Singapore For
Examinar’s
International Airlines has at least 18 Airbus and 76 Boeing airplanes in full flight Use
operations. The general specifications and flight information of a typical small size
Airbus is given below:
Mass of airplane, including crew and equipment 45 000 kg

Maximum capacity of fuel tanks (including reserve fuel) 25 000 kg
Maximum number of passengers 200
Average mass of a passenger with baggage 100 kg
Average use of fuel per kilometre 5.0 kg
Safety reserve of fuel at the end of journey 3000 kg
Take-off speed 75 m s-1
Length of runway used Changi Airport 1500 m
Many factors are taken into consideration to ensure safety in air travel. Some factors
include maximum mass of load carried by the airplane, length of runway, airport
design as well as fuel capacity. It is a requirement that every commercial airplane
maintain a certain amount of reserve fuel at the end of each journey as a safety
measure.
(a) Calculate the total mass of the airplane before take-off assuming that it is carrying the
maximum number of passengers and that its fuel tanks are filled to full capacity.
mass = ………………….. kg [1]
(b) (i) The range of an airplane refers to the maximum distance it can fly without
utilizing the reserve fuel. Calculate the range for the airplane from the
information given.
range = ……………………… km [1]
[Turn over
10
(ii) What is the minimum further distance the airplane can fly if the airport it is For
Examinar’s
scheduled to land is closed due to poor weather conditions? Use
minimum further distance the airplane can fly = ……………………… km [2]
(c) (i) Calculate the acceleration of the airplane before leaving the ground if it uses
the full length of the runway for take-off.
acceleration = ……………………… m s-2 [2]
(ii) Calculate the force required to provide this acceleration.
force = ……………………… N [1]

11
(d) There is always a safety buffer distance for emergency braking at the end of the For
Examinar’s
runway if the pilot decides to abort take-off. Supposing that just before leaving the Use
ground, the pilot discovers that there is something wrong with the airplane and he
decides to abort the take-off. Calculate
(i) the braking force needed to stop the airplane given that the deceleration of the
airplane is 2.8 m s-2.
braking force = ……………………… N [2]
(ii) the time taken to bring the airplane to a stop.
time taken = ……………………… s [2]
(e) Discuss one disadvantage of using a short runway for take-off.
……………………………………………………………………………….…………………
……………………………………………………………………………….…………………
….………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………….……………
………………………………………………………………………………………….……[1]
[Turn over
12
Section B For
Examinar’s
Use
Answer TWO questions from this section.
6 (a) State Newton's laws of motion.
……….……………………………………………………………………….…………………
……….……………………………………………………………………….…………………
……….……………………………………………………………………….…………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………...…[3]
(b) A school is celebrating her 200th Anniversary. To raise funds, the school's most well-
loved teachers, Mr. Wong and Mdm Chen are volunteered to perform an unusually
dangerous stunt. Mdm Chen, weighing 45.0 kg, jumps out of a hovering helicopter
reluctantly without any parachute and falls down vertically. Mr. Wong, weighing
75.0 kg, jumps out soon after. His task is to rescue Mdm Chen and ensure that they
will both parachute to safety.
Mdm Chen attains a terminal velocity of 30 m s-1 soon after leaving the hovering
helicopter. Mr.Wong also attains terminal velocity and continues to fall vertically
towards Mdm Chen. When Mr. Wong passes Mdm Chen, she 'catches on' to Mr.
Wong's safety harness and together, they continue to fall.
It may be assumed that the viscous drag force Fv experienced by a falling person is
proportional to v2, where v is the speed of the person. Upthrust due to air may be
ignored.
(i) Draw a free body diagram to show the forces acting on a person falling at
terminal velocity.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the terminal velocity that Mr. Wong would attain assuming his
horizontal velocity is negligible.
terminal velocity = …………………… m s-1 [3]

13
(iii) Determine the velocity of Mr. Wong and Mdm Chen immediately after she For
Examinar’s
'catches on' and the energy loss in the process. Use
velocity = …………………. m s-1
energy loss = ………………… J [4]
(c) Mr. Wong then opens the parachute. At a height of 1500 m above the ground, they
descend with a constant velocity of 10 m s-1 .They approach the ground at an angle of
82o from the horizontal as a result of wind condition. Upon landing, they execute a
'break-fall' procedure so that they bend their knees rather than stand upright. The
duration of the impact with the ground lasted 1.6 s.
(i) Determine the work done in overcoming the viscous drag for the last
1500 m of the descend.
work done = …………………. J [2]
(ii) What is the magnitude of the impulsive force experienced by the teachers
upon landing assuming that this force is constant over the whole duration of
the impact?
force = …………………. N [2]
[Turn over
14
(iii) What is the purpose of executing the 'break-fall' procedure? For

Examinar’s
Use
………………………………………………………………….………………………
……………………………………………………………………………….…………
……………………………………………………………………………….…………
……………………………………………………………………….…………………
………………………………………………………………………….……………[2]
(iv) If Mr. Wong had jumped without the parachute instead, explain whether it
would have been possible for Mdm Chen to save him.
………………………………………….………………………………………………
…………………….……………………………………………………………………
…………………………………….……………………………………………………
…………………………….……………………………………………………………
………………………………………….……………………………………………[2]
15
7 (a) (i) Define magnetic flux density. For

Examinar’s
Use
………………………………………………………….………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………….………[1]
(ii) Define the tesla.
………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………[1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 (a) shows the cross-section of a motor and Fig. 7.2 (b) shows its front view. A
current of 2.0 A is carried by the square coil of 30 turns. PQ has length 40 cm and OR
has length 50 cm. It is placed between a pair of strong magnet producing uniform
magnetic field of 0.60 T.
Fig. 7.2 (a) Fig. 7.2 (b)
(i) On Fig. 7.2 (b), indicate the direction of magnetic forces acting on the section
of wires PQ & SR. [1]
(ii) Find the magnitude of the force acting on the section of wires along PQ.
force = …………………………… N [2]
[Turn over
16
(iii) Find the magnitude of the torque of the couple on the coil when it is in the For
Examinar’s
position shown. Use
torque = …………………………… N m [2]
(c) (i) Distinguish between systematic error and random error.
……………………………………………………………………………………...….
……………………………………………………………………………………...….
……………………………………………………………………………………...….
……………………………………………………………………………………...….
…………………………………….…………………………………………………[1]
17
(ii) Suggest one source of systematic error and one source of random error while For
Examinar’s
using one such setup as a galvanometer as shown in Fig. 7.3. Use
Fig. 7.3
Systematic: ……..…………………………………...………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………...….
……………………………………………………………………………………...….
Random: ………..……………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………...….
………………………………………………………………………………..…… [2]
(iii) Suggest and explain two ways to improve the system if the needle was found
to deflect too little for all currents I.
………………………………………………………………………………….....……
………………………………………………………………………………….....……
………………………………………………………………………………….....……
………………………………………………………………………………….....……
………………………………………………………………………………….....……
………………………………………………………………………………….....……
………………………………………………………………………………….....……
…………………………………...………………………………………….………[4]
[Turn over
18
(d) A student uses a current balance setup shown in Fig. 7.4 to find the magnetic flux For
Examinar’s
density of a U-shaped magnet. He uses a steel rod to balance the setup. Use
N S
Steel Rod
Steel Rod
Fig. 7.4
The following results were obtained:
Diameter of steel rod (50  1)  104m

Length of steel rod (15.0  0.1) cm
Density of steel rod (7800  100) kg m3
Distance DQ (2.0  0.1) cm
Distance CQ (10.0  0.1) cm
Distance l (5.0  0.1) cm
Ammeter reading (2.10  0.05) A
(i) Calculate the weight of the steel rod.
weight = …………………………… N [2]
(ii) Hence, calculate, with its uncertainty, the value of the magnetic flux density of
the U-shaped magnet.
19
magnetic flux density = …………...…± ……..………… T [4]

8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a setup used to demonstrate the photoelectric effect. For
Examinar’s
Use
Fig. 8.1
(i) Describe what will happen to the galvanometer reading when the radiation
frequency is gradually increased from the infrared region to the ultraviolet
region.
…………………………………………………………………………….……………
…………………………………………………………………………….……………
…………………………………...………………………………….………………[2]
(ii) State and explain one application of the photoelectric effect.
…………………………………………………………………………….……………
…………………………………………………………………………….……………
…………………………………...………………………………………….………[2]
(iii) State and explain one application of the photoelectric effect.
(1) .…………………………………………………………………………………….
.…………………………………………………………………………………….
(2) .…………………………………………………………………………………….
.…………………………………………………………………………………….
(3) .…………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………….…[3]
[Turn over
20
(b) This question involves the Young’s Double Slit experiment. For
Examinar’s
Use
(i) Show how the principle of superposition of waves can be used to explain the
formation of two-source interference fringes.
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………...………………………...…………………………[2]
(ii) Two-source interference fringes using light can only be obtained if light from the two
sources is coherent. Explain
(1) the meaning of the term coherent.
.………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………….………[1]
(2) why, in practice, interference fringes can be seen only if light from a single source
is passed through a single slit first before the double slit.
.………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………….………[1]
(iii) Two narrow and parallel slits 0.2 mm apart are illuminated by a monochromatic
light source. It is found that the interference pattern on a screen 0.95 m away
has the first order bright fringe located at 3 mm from the central bright fringe.
(1) What is the wavelength of the light?
Wavelength = ………………………. m [2]
(2) State the distance of the second-order dark fringe from the central
bright fringe?
…………………………………………………………………...……….…...…[1]
21
(c) This question involves the Electron Diffraction Experiment. For

Examinar’s
Use
(i) Sketch the layout of the electron diffraction experiment so that the diffraction
pattern may be experimentally observed.
[2]
(ii) Given that the mass of an electron is 9.1 x 10-31 kg, calculate the de Broglie
wavelength of an electron whose kinetic energy is 3.00 MeV.
(1 MeV = 1.6 x 10-13 J)
[3]
(iii) A practical device that relies on the wave characteristics of electrons is the
electron microscope. A 3.00 MeV transmission electron microscope is used for
viewing flat, thin samples. In many aspects, it is similar to an optical
microscope, but the electron microscope has a much greater resolving power
than optical microscopes. Suggest a reason for this greater resolving power.
…………………………………………………………………………………..………
……………………………………………..……………………………………………
…………………………………...………………….……………….…….…………[1]
*** END OF PAPER ***
[Turn over
22
BLANK PAGE
Mark Scheme for PU2 H1 Promo 2 Exam 2010
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D B C D C D C A B A
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C B D D A C C A D A
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
D B D B D B D B C D
Suggested Solutions:
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24 B
Direction of current and magnetic field are parallel to each other, hence there is
no force acting.
25
26 B
Current-carrying conductors with current in opposite directions will create zero
magnetic field at the mid-point between the two conductors. For III, there will be a
neutral point at O. The currents need to be of the same magnitude as the distance
from the conductors to point O is the same.
27
28
29
30
Millennia Institute
Physics 8866
PRELIMINARY 2 EXAMINATION 2010
PU 2 H1
Mark Scheme
PAPER 1:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D B C D C D C A B D
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C B D D A D C A D A
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
D B D C D C D B C D
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
PAPER 2 - Section A
1 (a) Rate of change of velocity. B1
1 (b) s = area under the velocity-time graph B1
( a  b) vu B1
s = area of trapezium = h or s  ut  ( )t
2 2
(u  v)
s t
2
1 (c i) height = area under graph = ½ × 25 × 2.5 M1
=12.5 = 13 m A1
1 (c ii) Shape of graph & time taken A1

is shorter
2 (a) The moment of a force about a point is the product of the force and the perpendicular B1
of its line of action from the point.
2 (b i) Taking moments about the pivot,

Total CW moments = Total CCW moments
(5.0)(0.45) + M(9.81)(0,85) = 37(0.15) M1
M = 0.396 kg A1
2 (b ii) In the vertical direction, Fy = 0

F + 37 - 5.0 - (0.396)(9.81) = 0 M1
F = -28.1N C1
Magnitude = -28.1 N
2 (b iii) A2
Fs
Fp
2 (b iv) Energy stored = ½ Fe M1
= ½ F(F/k) = ½ (37)(37/550) = 1.24 J A1
3 (a i) EI A1
2
3 (a ii) Ir A1
3 (a iii) VI A1
3 (b) Any one of the following: A1

2
EI = I r + VI;
V = E – Ir
E = V + Ir;
3 (c i) E = V when I = 0; so E = 1.5 V; B1
3 (c ii) resistance r = gradient M1

Gradient = (1.3 – 0.8 ) / (0.58 – 0.16 ) = 1.20  C1
3 (a) Difference: Standing wave has nodes / Energy of a standing wave is localized / All B2
points within adjacent nodes oscillate in phase.
4 (b i) A point with zero displacement (at all times) B1
4 (b ii) 2 = 0.64 A1
 = 0.32 m
4 (b iii) v = f M1
-1
= 75 x 0.32 = 24 m s C1
5 (a) M = 45000 + 25000 + 200(100) = 90 000 kg A1
5 (b i) Range = (25 000 – 3000) / 5.0 = 4400 km A1
5 (b ii) Fuel available = 3000 kg C1

C1
Max Distance it can fly = 3000/5.0 = 600 km
5 (c i) M1
v 2  u 2  2as  75 2  0 2  2(a)(1500) C1
a = 1.88 m s-2
5 (c ii) F = ma = (90 000)(1.88) = 170 000 N C1
5 (d i) Braking force = 90 000 x 2.8 M1

C1
= 250 000 N
5 d ii v = u + at  0 = 75 + (-2.8)t M1
C1
t = 27 s
5 (e) Any ONE: B1

1. A larger acceleration is required to bring the aircraft to take-off speed if it is
carrying maximum no. of passengers (Greater force acts on passengers or
Higher fuel consumption).
2. In order to maintain the normal acceleration, the total mass of the plane
must be reduced
 fewer passengers (hence, profitability reduces), OR
 carry less fuel which leads to a shorter range (however, the plane
cannot change the requirements for safety reserve fuel)
Section B
6a Newton's First Law: B3

A body will remain in its state of rest or motion in constant velocity provided no net
force acts on it.
Newton's Second Law:

Rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the resultant force
acting on the body and acts in the direction of the resultant force.
Newton's Third Law:

If a body A exerts a force on body B, body B will exert a force which is equal in
magnitude but opposite in direction on body A.
6 bi A2
2
6 bii Fv = kv
At terminal velocity,
2
Fv = mg  kv = mg
2
 kvw = mwg ---(1)
2
 kvc = mcg ---(2)
M1
(1) / (2)
2 2
vw mw vw 75.0
 2
  2
  vw = 38.7 m s
-1
C2
vc mc 30.0 45.0
6 b iii By the principle of conservation of momentum,
mwuw +mcuc = (mw +mc)v
(75.0)(38.7) + (45.0)(30.0) = (75.0 + 45.0)v M1
-1
v = 35.4 m s C1
Energy loss
2 2 2
= ½ mwuw + ½ mcuc – ½ (mw +mc) v
2 2 2
= ½ (75.0)(38.7 ) + ½ (45.0)(30.0 ) – ½ (75.0 + 45.0)(35.4 ) M1
= 1224 J = 1.22 kJ C1
6ci During the last 1500 m, the kinetic energy is a constant. Therefore, the loss in
gravitational potential energy must be accounted for as the work done to overcome air
resistance (work done by atmospheric drag).
Energy loss
=mgh =(75.0+45.0)(9.81)(1500) M1
= 1765800 J = 1.77 MJ C1
6 c ii Force = Rate of change of momentum

(v f  vi ) (0  10)
= m = (75.0  45.0) M1
t 1.6 C1
= 750 N
6 c iii The 'break-fall' procedure increases the time of impact. B1
This reduces the impulsive force for a given momentum change. Hence, the possibility B1
of injury may be minimized.
2
6 c iv Since Fv experienced by a free-falling person is proportional to v , the man who is B1
heavier will attain a greater terminal velocity than the woman.
Thus, if he were to jump first, it will be impossible for the woman to catch up with him. B1
7ai The magnetic flux density is the force experienced by a conductor of unit length, places B1
perpendicular to the magnetic field and carrying unit current.
7 a ii The tesla is equivalent to a force of 1 N experienced by a conductor 1 m long, placed B1

perpendicular to the magnetic field and carrying a current of 1 A.
7bi A1
7 b ii) F = NBILsin = 30 x 0.6 x 2 x 0.4 M1

F = 14.4 N, C1
7 b iii)
M1
C1
 = F(dsin) = 14.4(0.5sin20 )
o
 = 2.46 Nm
7ci Systematic errors are either all positive or negative whereas random error can be B1
either.
7c ii) Systematic: Spring is readjusted after calibration, Magnet lose strength, zero error B2
Random: parallax error incurred in reading
7c iii) Any TWO: B4
1. add a iron core within the rectangular coil between the pivots.
The iron core will intensify the magnetic field that the rectangular coil experiences and
so the magnetic force generated will be higher for the same current.
2. change the spring to one that is less stiff

The reduced stiffness will mean greater deflection before the same countering moment
is generated.
3. Change the magnet to a stronger type.

Intensified magnetic field will generate greater force for the same current thus more
deflection.
7 d i) Weight = Vg = (7800)  ( (25104)20.15)9.81 M1

= 0.225 N C1
7 d ii) W  0.02 = 0.1 (B2.100.05)

B = 0.429 T M1
(  r2 L) (g) ( DQ )= CQ(BIl) A1
B = (  r2 L) (g) ( DQ )
(I l) (CQ)
B  r L DQ I l CQ
 2     
B  r L DQ I l CQ M1
B 100 1 0.1 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1
 2     
0.429 7800 50 15 2 2.1 5 10
B = 0.07 T C1
B = (0.43  0.07) T
8 a i) When the frequency is increased,

There will be a point where the galvanometer reading increases suddenly B1
After that, the galvanometer deflection remains constant throughout even if f increases. B1
(ii) By changing the metal used, we can control the type of frequency that the B2
photoelectric meter.
For example, by using a metal that has a work function of Infrared radiation, we can
create a Night Vision
Goggles
{{ Any infra-red given by human bodies or any hot object will trigger photoelectric
radiation. When observed, the humans or object will appear brighter on the Night
Vision Goggles }}
(iii) any 3 of the following 4 statements: B3

 For a given metal, electrons are only emitted above a certain threshold frequency
of the EM radiation, irrespective of its intensity.
 The maximum KE of the emitted electrons depends only on the frequency of the
EM radiation.
 The number of photoelectrons emitted per second depends only on Intensity of
the EM radiation, for a single frequency.
 * Low intensity EM radiation (above the threshold frequency) results in immediate
emission of electrons.
(b i) When 2 waves are in phase, constructive interference results in a maximum or bright fringes B2
When 2 waves are out of phase, destructive interference results in a minimum or dark fringe
(b) (ii) 1 Constant Phase difference and same frequency B1
(b) (ii) 2. So that they can be made coherent B1
(b) (iii) 1. Use of equation /a = x/d to give = 630 nm M1

A1
(b) (iii) 2. State 4.5 mm A1
(c) (i) Diagram to include Electron-gun, Crystal target, and screen B1

Correct layout of the apparatus listed above B1
(c) (ii) Since KE = ½mv2

Calculate the momentum p = mv M1
Since = h / p A1
= 7.09 x 10-13 m C1
(c) (iii) The deBroglie wavelength of the electron is much more shorter than that of light. B1
MERIDIAN JUNIOR COLLEGE
Preliminary Examination
Higher 1
______________________________________________________________________________
H1 Physics 8866/1
Paper 1 24 September 2010
1 Hour
______________________________________________________________________________
INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATES
Class Reg Number
Candidate Name _____________________________
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Multiple Choice Questions
There are 30 Multiple Choice Questions in this section. Answer all questions. For each question,
there are four possible answers labelled A, B, C and D.
Optical Mark Sheet (OMS).
Read very carefully the instructions on the Optical Mark Sheet (OMS).
Write your name and class in the spaces provided on the Optical Mark Sheet
Shade your Index Number column using the following format:

1) first 2 digits is your index number in class (eg 5th student is shaded as “05”);
2) ignore the last row of alphabets;
______________________________________________________________________________
Preliminary Examination Meridian Junior College 24th September 2010
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
DATA AND FORMULAE
Data
elementary charge e = 1.60 x 10-19 C
the Planck constant h = 6.63 x 10-34 J s
unified atomic mass constant u = 1.66 x 10-27 kg
rest mass of electron me = 9.11 x 10-31 kg
rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 x 10-27 kg
acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s-2
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion 1

s = ut + at2
2
v2 = u2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas W = p ΔV
hydrostatic pressure p = ρgh
resistors in series R = R1 + R2 + …
resistors in parallel 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + …
2
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
1 The length of a rectangle is given as L ± ℓ and its width as W ± w.

What is the uncertainty in its area?
A l+ w
B Ll + W w
C Lw + W l
l w
D +
L W
2 For which quantity is the magnitude a reasonable estimate?
A frequency of a radio wave 500 μHz

B mass of an atom 500 pg
C the acceleration due to free fall 981 mm s-2
D wavelength of green light 500 nm
3 A student takes multiple readings of potential difference across a resistor in a circuit.

The readings are 2.016 V, 2.018 V, 2.017 V and 2.016V. He took the average of these
but does not take into account the zero error on the voltmeter.
The average measurement of the potential difference is
A precise and accurate

B precise but not accurate
C accurate but not precise
D not accurate and not precise
4 A 10 kg mass box is pushed up an inclined plane of 40° above horizontal with a net
acceleration of 12.5 m s-2 with an initial speed of 1.60 m s-1.
Determine the change in vertical height of the box during the first interval of 1.25 s.
A 11.8 m B 9.01 m C 7.56 m D 6.31 m
5 A housewife released a bag of rubbish weighing 54 N from rest into a refuse chute from
her unit in a HDB flat. The rubbish passes through two speed detectors at different
locations and the readings shown in the detectors are 14.7 m s-1 and 49.1 m s-1
respectively.
Neglecting the effect of air resistance, the distance between the two speed detectors is
A 20.3 m B 31.9 m C 71.7 m D 112 m
3
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
6 A ball is thrown upwards at an angle to the horizontal with an initial speed. Assuming
that air resistance is not negligible, which of the following statement is incorrect?
A The time taken for the flight up to the highest point is longer than the time taken
for the flight down.
B The maximum height reached by the ball is smaller than that with negligible air
resistance.
C Horizontal range of the ball is shorter than that with negligible air resistance.
D The path of the ball is asymmetrical about the highest point.
7 A car of weight Wc is driven across a uniform bridge of length l and weight Wb. The
bridge is supported by two ropes having tensions T1 and T2 when the car is a distance x
from the rope on the left as shown in the figure below.
T1 T2
x
Wc Wb
Which of the following expressions for the tensions T1 and T2 is correct?
Tension T1 Tension T2
A Wb W c x Wb x
+ + Wc (1 − )
2 l 2 l
B Wb Wc l Wb l
+ + Wc (1 − )
2 x 2 x
C Wb Wc Wb Wc
+ +
2 2 2 2
D Wb x Wb Wc x
+ Wc (1 − ) +
2 l 2 l
4
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
8 Three identical stationary discs P, Q, and R are placed in a line on a horizontal, flat,
frictionless surface. Disc P is projected straight towards disc Q.
P Q R
If all consequent collisions are perfectly elastic, predict the final motion of the three
discs.
P Q R
A moving left moving left moving right
B moving left stationary moving right
C stationary stationary moving right
D moving right moving right moving right
9 The graph shows how the extension of a spring varies with the force used to stretch it.
extension / cm
force / kN
What is the elastic potential energy stored in the spring when the extension is 4.0 cm?
A 60 J B 120 J C 600 J D 1200 J
10 A pendulum bob hangs from the ceiling in a carriage in a train and is just above a
certain mark on the floor when the train is at rest. When the train is moving with
constant velocity forward, the bob
A oscillates about the mark because of the unbalanced force due to the motion of
the train.
B remains over the mark because the motion of the train produces no additional
force on the bob.
C is behind the mark so that the pendulum thread is along the resultant of the
forces due to the motion of the train and gravity.
D is in front of the mark in a position in which the horizontal force exerted by the
train on the bob is larger than the horizontal component of the tension in the
thread.
5
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
11 An object falls vertically at its terminal velocity through air and then strikes soft ground
in which it becomes embedded. Its deceleration during impact is constant. If P
represents the point of impact, which one of the following graphs best represents the
variation of the resultant force R on the stone with distance s?
A R B R
0 s 0 s
P P
C D
R R
s 0 s
0 P P
12 A sphere of mass 3.00 kg rests on a frictionless slope inclined at 30o above horizontal.
The spring constant is 500 N m-1. Determine the compression of the spring.
Wall
30˚
A 51.0 mm B 34.3 mm C 29.4 mm D 7.67 mm
6
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
13 Tarzan, whose mass is 80.0 kg, needs to swing across a river filled with crocodiles in
order to save Jane of mass 45.0 kg, at the middle of the river as shown in the diagram
below. He has to swing from a branch, which is assumed to be fixed in position, on a
vine of length 30.0 m, and initially making angle of 50.0o with the vertical.
50o 30.0 m
Tarzan swings towards Jane and grabs hold of her. Assuming that this is a completely
inelastic collision, determine their common speed just after the collision.
A 19.5 m s-1
B 15.6 m s-1
C 12.4 m s-1
D 9.28 m s-1
14 A small metal sphere of mass m is moving through a viscous liquid of height h.

When it reaches a constant downward velocity v, which of the following describes the
changes with time of the kinetic energy and gravitational potential energy of the sphere?
Kinetic Energy Gravitational Potential Energy

2
A constant and equal to ½mv decreases at a rate mgv
2
B constant and equal to ½mv decreases at a rate mgh
C increases at a rate ½mv2 decreases at a rate (½mv2 – mgv)
D increases at a rate mgv decreases at a rate (mgv – ½mv2)
15 A single traveling light wave in vacuum is able to
A carry momentum
B create interference patterns
C create a standing wave
D propagate at any velocity
7
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
16 The diagram below illustrates an experimental arrangement that produces interference

fringes with a double slit.
X
S1
* O
S2
monochromatic
source
thin glass plate

Y
When slit S2 was covered with a very thin plate of glass as shown,
A the fringe pattern moved towards Y.

B the fringe pattern moved towards X.
C the separation of the fringes increased.
D the separation of the fringes decreased.
17 In a two-slit interference experiment, one slit transmits twice the amplitude of the other
slit. If the maximum intensity of the interference pattern is Io, the minimum intensity in
the pattern would be
A zero B Io/2 C Io/4 D Io/9
18 A microwave source S is placed in front of a detector D, and a metal reflecting screen R

is placed beyond D such that its plane is perpendicular to the line joining S to D.
As the detector is moved slowly away from the source, it registers a series of maxima
and minima.
S D R
It is observed that the detector moved through a distance of 5.6 cm between the first
and fifth minimum. What is the frequency of the microwaves in GHz?
A 5.4 B 10.7 C 13.4 D 27.5
8
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
19 When double–slit interference pattern is investigated using light of wavelength 600 nm,
the spacing between the bright fringes is 1.44 mm. If the screen is 1.2 m away from the
slits, how far apart are the slits?
A 0.050 mm B 0.25 mm C 0.50 mm D 2.5 mm
20 A row of 30 decorative lights, connected in series, is connected to a mains transformer.

When the supply is switched on, the lights do not work. The owner uses a voltmeter to
test the circuit. When the voltmeter is connected across the fifth bulb in the row, a
reading of zero is obtained.
Which of the following scenarios described is not possible?
A Only the filament of the fifth bulb has broken.

B The fuse in the mains transformer has blown.
C The filament of at least one of the other bulbs has broken.
D There is a break in the wire from the supply to the transformer.
21 In the circuit diagram below, D is an ideal diode. The voltage supply has negligible
internal resistance and the voltmeter reads 12 V.
2.0 Ω
V
Voltage
supply 2.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
If the connections to the terminals of the voltage supply are reversed, the voltmeter
reading would be
A 6.0 V B 8.0 V C 9.0 V D 18 V
9
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
22 The circuit shown in Fig. 1 may be used to determine the internal resistance of a
battery. An oscilloscope is connected across the battery as shown. Fig. 2 represents the
screen of the oscilloscope.
●
●
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
The time base of the oscilloscope is switched off throughout the experiment.
Initially the switches S1 and S2 are both open. Under these conditions, the spot on the
oscilloscope screen is at A.
Switch S1 is now closed, with S2 remaining open. The spot moves to B.

Switch S1 is kept closed and S2 is also closed. The spot moves to C.
The vertical sensitivity of the oscilloscope is 0.50 V per division.
Calculate the internal resistance of the battery.
A 0.24 Ω B 2.3 Ω C 14.0 Ω D 16.4 Ω
23 The diagram shows a network of three resistors. Two of these marked R, are identical.
The other one has a resistance of 5.0 Ω.
●Y
R
5.0 Ω
X● ●
R ●
●
The resistance between Y and Z is found to be 2.5 Ω. Z
Determine the resistance between X and Y.
A 0.53 Ω B 1.9 Ω C 2.5 Ω D 4.8 Ω
10
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
24 The diagram shows three resistors of resistance 4 Ω, 10 Ω and 6 Ω connected in series.

A potential difference of 10 V is maintained across them, with point X being earthed.
Which graph represents the change in potential along the resistor network?
A B
C D
11
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
25 A beam of electrons is directed into a region of uniform magnetic field as shown in the
figure below.
In which direction should an electric field be applied so that the electrons pass through
the region undeflected?
A Downwards
B Upwards
C Into the page
D Out of the page
26 In the diagram below, P is a horizontal circular coil of wire carrying a steady current I1 .
A conducting rod, which is free to move, is supported by 2 fixed horizontal parallel rails
TQ and SR which are perpendicular to the length of the conducting rod and carry a
constant current I 2 as shown in the diagram below.
P
Q R
I2
I2
I2
T S
I1
The conducting rod will
A move towards TS with a constant speed.

B move towards TS with increasing speed.
C move towards QR with increasing speed.
D be lifted off the horizontal parallel rails momentarily.
12
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
27 The wire WX is free to move vertically while the wire YZ is fixed in position. Suppose
that both wires carry equal currents of 100 A in opposite directions and that the mass
per unit length for each wire is 20 g m-1. Calculate the final height which the wire WX is
above wire YZ. (You may assume that the magnetic field, B at a distance r from a wire
μo I
carrying current I to be B = and you may take μo = 4π x 10-7 H m-1)
2π r
W X
I = 100 A
Y Z
I = 100 A
A zero, wires WX and YZ are attracted to each other.

B 0.102 cm
C 1.02 cm
D 10.2 cm
28 A sodium vapor lamp is placed at the centre of a large hollow metal sphere that absorbs
all the light reaching it. The lamp operates a voltage of 200 V when the current flowing
through it is 1.5 A. Assume that the emission is entirely at a wavelength of 590 nm.
At what rate are the photons absorbed by the sphere?
A 4.0 × 1020 s-1 B 5.9 × 1020 s-1 C 7.0 × 1020 s-1 D 8.9 × 1020 s-1
13
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
29 In a photoelectric effect experiment, the relationship between the photoelectric current

and potential difference applied between the emitter and the collector using 2 different
intensities of electromagnetic radiation I1 and I2, where I1 > I2. The photoelectric current
increases with potential difference until a maximum value because
I/A
^ I1
I2.
>
V/V
A The incident electromagnetic radiation has caused all the free electrons from the
metal to be released.
B The collector has been made sufficiently positive to attract all the emitted
photoelectrons
C The photoelectrons are emitted with a maximum kinetic energy that depends on the
incident wavelength and work function of the metal
V
D The circuit resistance rises proportionally with V such that the ratio is a constant
R
due to the effects of heating.
14
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
30 The graph below shows the variation of stopping potential, Vs, against wavelength,λ, for
a photoelectric effect experiment.
Determine the work function of the metal used in the experiment.
Vs/V
λ/nm
A 1.9 eV B 2.4 eV C 3.8 eV D 6.2 eV
END OF PAPER 1
15
MERIDIAN JUNIOR COLLEGE
Higher 1
______________________________________________________________________________
H1 Physics 8866/2
Paper 2 15 September 2010

2 Hours
______________________________________________________________________________
INSTRUCTION TO CANDIDATES
Class Reg Number
Candidate Name _____________________________
Section A
Examiner’s Use
Section A
Section B
Q1 /4
Answer any two questions. Circle the two questions you
Q2 /8
attempt in the box on the right.
Q3 /6
Note: only the first two questions will be marked if all three
are attempted. Q4 / 10
You are advised to spend about one hour on each section. Q5 / 12

Write your answers on this question booklet in the blanks
provided. Section B
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES Q6 / 20
Q7 / 20
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of
each question or part question. Marks will be deducted if Q8 / 20
units are not stated where necessary or if answers are not
quoted to the appropriate number of significant figures. Deductions
Total / 80
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
All working for numerical answers must be shown. You are reminded of the need for good
English and clear presentation of your answers.
______________________________________________________________________________
2
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
DATA AND FORMULAE
Data
elementary charge e = 1.60 x 10-19 C
the Planck constant h = 6.63 x 10-34 J s
unified atomic mass constant u = 1.66 x 10-27 kg
rest mass of electron me = 9.11 x 10-31 kg
rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 x 10-27 kg
acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s-2
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion 1

s = ut + at2
2
v2 = u2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas W = p ΔV
resistors in series R = R1 + R2 + …
resistors in parallel 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + …
3
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section A
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided.
1 Distinguish in detail, between a progressive wave and a stationary wave by

completing Table 1.1. [4]
Progressive waves Stationary waves
Amplitude of The amplitude of vibration is the

vibration same at all points
Wavelength Equals to twice the distance

between a pair of adjacent
nodes or antinodes
Phase Every particle within one

wavelength varies in phase from
each other
Energy No net transfer of energy
Table 1.1
4
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
2 (a) A charged body falls vertically in a vacuum near the Earth’s surface. The
variation with time t of its vertical speed v is shown in Fig 2.1 below.
v / m s-1
0 t/s
Fig 2.1
An electric field induces a horizontal force on the body that causes the body to
accelerate horizontally at 2.25 m s-2. Calculate the displacement of the body after
falling 0.50 s.
displacement = ................................m
angle = ........................... [4]
5
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
(b) The variation with time of the velocity of another object moving in a straight line
is shown in Fig 2.2.
v / m s-1
0 t1 t2
t/s
Fig 2.2
(i) Sketch on Fig 2.2, a graph of the variation with time of the
acceleration of the same object within the same time frame. [2]
(ii) Explain your sketch in (b)(i) between time t1 and t2.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………….……………………………………………… [2]
6
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
3 (a) A thin layer of copper is deposited uniformly on the surface of an iron wire of
radius 0.60 mm and length 3.0 m shown in Fig 3.1.
iron wire
thin layer of copper
Fig 3.1
Determine the effective resistance between the ends of the copper-plated wire,
given that the thickness of the copper is 1.78 x 10-5 m.
[Resistivity of iron = 8.90 x 10-8 Ω m; resistivity of copper = 1.60 x 10-8 Ω m]
effective resistance = …………………. Ω [3]
7
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
(b) Fig 3.2 shows a system in which an unmodulated audio frequency signal is
transmitted from the transmitter to the receiver through a cable. The cable
consists of two strands of insulated copper wire.
copper wire insulation

I
transmitter receiver
12.5 mW
I
Fig 3.2
The power output of the transmitter is 12.5 mW and the corresponding current in
each wire is 2.5 mA. Power is lost to the surroundings due to the rise in
temperature produced by this current. For transmitted signal to be detected, the
power input to the receiver must be at least 1.5 mW.
The resistance per unit length of the copper wire used in the cable is 0.27 Ω m-1.
Calculate the maximum distance between the transmitter and receiver at which
the transmission can be detected successfully.
maximum distance = ……………………m [3]
8
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
4 (a) Define magnetic flux density and state its S.I unit.
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
(b) Fig 4.1 shows the position of a wire in the radial magnetic field of an electric
motor while the magnetic flux density is 0.20 T.
Fig 4.1
The wire, which is of length 0.060 m, carries a current of 4.5 A out of the plane of
the paper.
(i) Sketch the combined magnetic field due to the current in the wire
and the motor’s magnet in the diagram below. [3]
9
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
(ii) Calculate the force acting on the wire and sketch the direction of this force
in Fig 4.1.
Force = …………………….. N [3]
(iii) Describe the energy changes experienced by the wire.
......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................. [1]
(iv) If the wire is now replaced with a charged particle, explain whether there
will be a magnetic force acting on the charged particle.
......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................. [1]
5 Table 5.1 shows how the resistance of a thermistor varies with temperature.
θ / oC 0 30 60 90 120
T/K 273 303 333 363 393
R/Ω 16300 5000 1320 457 159
lg(R / Ω)
Table 5.1
(a) Deduce the relation between temperature θ / oC and T / K [1]
(b) Complete Table 5.1, leave your answers in 3 significant figures. [1]
(c) Plot a graph of lg(R / Ω) against T / K. [3]
10
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
lg(R / Ω)
T/K
11
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
(d) Suggest a reason for plotting resistance of a thermistor on a logarithmic scale.
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………...…….… [1]
(e) With reference to the graph you have plotted in (c), explain why this thermistor is
called a negative temperature coefficient (NTC) thermistor.
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………...…….… [1]
(f) One of these thermistors is connected in a circuit, in series with a 15 Ω fixed

resistor and a variable resistor as shown in Fig 5.2. Point X is connected to a
device called a transistor. When the potential at X rises above 0.70 V, the
transistor gets activated and operates a relay which switches on a lamp.
○ + 12 V
thermistor
X● to transistor
15 Ω
○ 0V
Fig 5.2
With the aid of the graph you have plotted in (c), determine the resistance of the
variable resistor if the lamp lights up when the temperature reaches 323 K.
Resistance of variable resistor = ……………….. Ω [3]
12
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
(g) State and explain the purpose of the 15 Ω fixed resistor in the circuit.
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………...….…… [2]
13
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section B
6 (a) (i) State Newton’s 1st law of motion and show it leads to the concept of force.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
(ii) Express the unit of force in terms of S.I. base units.
S.I. base units of force is ….....…………… [1]
(b) Michael drove his car of mass 1200 kg to a maximum speed of 150 km h-1.
During a driving test, it was found that the average retarding force due to air
resistance and friction from the ground is 1200 N when the car was accelerating
uniformly.
(i) Calculate the forward driving force when the car accelerated uniformly
from rest to its maximum speed in 11.0 s under driving test conditions.
forward driving force= ……………… N [3]
14
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
(ii) Hence, find the maximum power delivered by the engine.
maximum power = ……………… W [2]
(c) Michael wishes to find out how his car will fare during a car crash.
He visited a laboratory where several cars like his own were used in controlled
car crash testing.
The magnitude F of the force required to crush the barrels is shown below as a
function of the distance x the automobile had moved into the cushion.
y F / kN
170
x 130
90
x/ m
0.0 1.5 4.0
In a particular crash test, the car was travelling at 100 km h-1 before it struck a
crash cushion in which the car was brought to rest by successively crushing
steel barrels.
15
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
(i) Neglecting friction, using the Work Energy Theorem, determine the
distance the car would move into the cushion of steel barrels before
coming to rest.
distance = ……………… m [4]
(ii) State and explain in terms of energy considerations, whether the actual
distance travelled by his car would be longer or shorter than the value in
(c)(i).
………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………... [2]
16
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
(d) In another car crash laboratory test, a crash test dummy of mass 75 kg is belted
into the driver’s seat of the car and the car is travelling at 39.6 km h-1 before it
struck head-on to a solid wall and come to rest in 0.10 s.
(i) Determine the impulse experienced by the dummy in the crash.
impulse = …………….…… kg m s-1 [2]
(ii) In the crash, the dummy is brought to rest by the seat belt from a speed of
39.6 km h-1, in a time of 0.14 s.
Show that the average force on the dummy is about eight times its weight.
[2]
(e) The seat belt does not stop the head of the dummy from moving forward.
Without an airbag, the head could strike the steering wheel.
An airbag is installed such that it will begin to deflate by the time the head strikes
it.
Suggest a reason why it is safer for the airbags to be deflating when the head
strikes them.
………………………………………………………………………………..…………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………..….
………………………………………………………………………………………..…….
………………………………………………………………………………….…… [2]
17
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
7 (a)
Barrier
Plane
Waves
Fig 7.1
Fig 7.1 shows what can be observed when plane waves pass through slits in a
barrier. The waves undergo diffraction at the two slits and interfere to form the
patterns observed.
(i) Explain what is meant by diffraction.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………. [1]
(ii) The pattern produced by the waves is in accordance to the Principle of

Superposition. State the Principle of Superposition.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………..……….
………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
(iii) On Fig 7.1, draw one line joining the points to show the line of
destructive interference (nodal lines). [1]
(b) When a player blows into a flute as shown in Fig 7.2a, the air within the flute
18
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
vibrates. The flute produces sound in a column of air like a tube with both ends
open.
Fig 7.2a: Flute
Fig 7.2b shows the fundamental frequency of the standing wave formed in the
tube of a given length.
Fig 7.2b : Fundamental frequency at given length
(i) The black dots below the tube in Fig 7.2b correspond to equilibrium
positions of the air molecules. Sketch on Fig 7.2b the displacement
vector of these air molecules when a fundamental frequency is
produced in the tube. [2]
(ii) On Fig 7.2b, label the regions of maximum pressure, H and regions
of minimum pressure, L. [1]
(iii) A standing wave corresponding to the fundamental frequency of 262 Hz is

obtained when the length of the tube is 0.655 m. For the same length of
air column, determine the frequencies of the next two overtones.
2nd overtone = …………………. Hz
3rd overtone = …..……………… Hz [2]
(iv) Using information from (b)(iii) and assuming no end correction, determine
19
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
the length of the air column for another resonant fundamental frequency of
294 Hz.
length of air column = ……………….m [3]
(v) The flutist can change the musical note by covering or uncovering the
holes of the flute to change the length of the air column. Suggest another
way in which the flutist varies the pitch (frequency).
………………………………………………………………………………..…….
………………………………………………………………………………. [1]
(c) A transmitter T on Earth emits radio wave of wavelength 2.0 x 103 m. The radio
20
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
waves from transmitter T travel to the receiver R located 2500 km away, by two
paths as shown in Fig 7.3. (not to scale)
ionosphere
Transmitter T Receiver R
2500 km
Fig 7.3
For the first path, the wave travels directly from T to R. For the second path, it
travels up to the ionosphere and is reflected down to R. Assume that this
reflection takes place at a point midway between receiver and transmitter and
there is no change in phase of the radio wave upon reflection at the ionosphere.
(i) When the ionosphere is in position shown in Fig 7.3, at a distance h

above the signal, the signal detected at R is a maximum. Explain in terms
of the paths taken by the wave, how the maximum is caused in this
situation.
…………………………………………………………………………….………..
…………………………………………………………………………….………..
………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
(ii) Determine that the minimum height h of the ionosphere that will produce a
21
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
maximum signal at R.
(Assume that the curvature of Earth is negligible.)
[3]
(iii) At night when the atmosphere cools down, the ionosphere moves down
towards Earth. The same signal is emitted at T and the signal received at
receiver R fades every 20 minutes.
Determine the speed at which the ionosphere is descending towards the

Earth.
speed = …………………m s-1 [2]
8 (a) A sheet of potassium foil is at a distance of 3.5 m from an isotropic light source
22
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
that emits 1.5 W of power. The work function, Φ, of potassium is 2.2 eV.
Assume for the time being that wave theory of light applied and that the energy
was transferred to the target foil in a smooth and continuous manner.
Assume also that the foil totally absorbs all the energy reaching it and that the to-
be-ejected electron collects energy from a circular area of radius 5.0 x 10-11 m of
the foil, the approximate size of an atom of the foil.
(i) Calculate the intensity of light at a distance of 3.5 m from the isotropic light
source.
intensity = ……………… W m-2 [2]
(ii) Calculate the power received by the circular patch of foil of radius
5.0 x 10-11 m.
P = ………………. W [2]
(iii) Hence determine how long it would take for enough energy to accumulate
on the circular patch of foil in order to liberate an electron.
time taken = …….…………. s [2]
(iv) Hence, with reference to what is actually observed in the photoelectric
23
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
experiment, explain how the answer to (a)(iii) above conflicts with wave
theory of light and how the quantum theory of light addresses the problem
of Time Delay.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………. [3]
(v) Besides the problem of Time Delay, describe another observation from the
photoelectric experiment that conflicts with the wave theory of light but can
be successfully explained by the quantum theory of light.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
(b) Fig 8.1 shows a high voltage supply set up to produce energetic electrons to
bombard the cool sodium gas in the discharge tube, giving rise to a line
spectrum through a prism. Fig 8.2 shows some energy levels of sodium.
Assume that each bombarding electron has a kinetic energy of 3.70 eV.
n=5 -1.42 eV
n=4 -1.56 eV
High n=3 -1.98 eV

voltage
Detector
supply
n=2 -3.07 eV
Collimator slit
Sodium gas prism
n=1 -5.17 eV
Fig 8.1 Fig 8.2
(i) Explain what gives rise to these spectral lines.
24
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………. [1]
(ii) Explain why only six spectral lines can be detected, identifying the
transitions responsible for them.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
(iii) Sketch and label the relative positions of the spectral lines for only the
transitions which terminates at n = 1 in Fig 8.3 below. The line due to the
transition from level n = 2 to n = 1 has been drawn for you.
n=2
to
n=1
Fig 8.3
[1]
(iv) Determine the range of kinetic energy of the recoiling electrons after they
have excited the sodium atoms?
Range : ______ eV ≤ KE ≤ ______ eV [3]
25
[Turn Over
JC2 H1 Physics 2010
_________________________________________________________________________________
(v) Fig 8.4 shows another cool gas X placed between the discharge tube and
the collimator slit. Its energy levels are shown in Fig 8.5.
Cool gas X
n=4 -0.48 eV
High n=3 -0.90 eV
voltage
Detector n=2 -1.49 eV
supply
Collimator slit n=1 -3.00 eV

Sodium gas prism
Fig 8.4 Fig 8.5
Determine the number of emission spectral lines that will be detected.

Explain your answer.
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………...
………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
END OF PAPER 2
26
[Turn Over
MJC H1 Physics Preliminary Examinations 2010
Paper 1 Suggested Solutions: (30 marks)
1 C 11 A 21 C
2 D 12 C 22 B
3 B 13 D 23 B
4 C 14 A 24 D
5 D 15 A 25 A
6 A 16 A 26 B
7 D 17 D 27 C
8 C 18 B 28 D
9 C 19 C 29 B
10 B 20 A 30 B
MCQ 1: (C)
A = LW
ΔA l w
= +
A L W
⎛l w⎞
ΔA = ⎜ + ⎟A
⎝ L W ⎠
ΔA = L w + W l
MCQ 2: (D)
Frequency of radio wave ranges from 3 Hz to 300 GHz
Question: 500 μHz = 500 x 10-6 Hz---- too small
Mass of lightest atom; Hydrogen-1 is 1.007825u; ~ 1.66 x 10-27 kg

Mass of heaviest stable atom; Lead-208 is 207.9766521u ~ 3.45 x 10-25 kg
Question: 500 pg = 500 x 10-12 g = 5 x 10-10 kg (too heavy)
Acceleration due to free fall 981 mm s-2 (too small--- should be 9810 mm s-2)
MCQ 3: (B)
Since the readings are very close to each other. The readings are precise.
Since zero error has not been taken into account, there is lack of accuracy in the readings.
MCQ 4: (C)
v=u+at
v = 1.60 + 12.5(1.25)
v = 17.225 m s-1
v2=u2+2as
17.225 = 1.62 + 2(12.5)s
2
s= 11.766 m
vertical height = 11.766 sin(40)= 7.56 m
1 JC2 H1 Physics Prelim Exam 2010 Solutions

MCQ 5: (D)
v2=u2+2as
49.12 = 14.72 + 2(9.81)s
s= 111.86 m; 112m
MCQ 6: (A)
The time taken for the flight up to the highest point should be shorter than the time taken for
the flight down.
MCQ 7: (D)
To find T1, take pivot at rightmost end of bridge
⎛l⎞
Wb ⎜ ⎟ + Wc (l − x) = T1 (l )
⎝2⎠
⎛l⎞
Wb ⎜ ⎟ + Wc (l − x)
T1 = ⎝2⎠
l
W x
= b + Wc (1 − )
2 l
To find T2, take pivot at leftmost end of bridge

⎛l⎞
Wb ⎜ ⎟ + Wc ( x) = T2 (l )
⎝2⎠
⎛l⎞
Wb ⎜ ⎟ + Wc ( x)
T2 = ⎝ ⎠
2
l
Wb x
= + Wc ( )
2 l
MCQ 8: (C)
As linear momentum is conserved, there is total transfer of momentum during collision as all
3 discs are identical.
MCQ 9: (C)
Elastic potential energy = area under the force – extension graph
= 0.50 x 0.04 x 30000
= 600 J
MCQ 10: (B)

As the train is moving with constant velocity, the pendulum bob will also possess the same
constant velocity as the train. The bob will therefore not experience any resultant force
acting on it, hence it will remain over the mark.

MCQ 11: (A)
For s less than point P, the object is falling with terminal velocity, hence it will not experience
any resultant force, R = 0.
After the point P, the object’s deceleration during impact is constant, since the vertical axis is
the resultant force, using Fnet=ma, constant a implies constant resultant force, R.
MCQ 12: (C)

By Hooke’s Law, the component of the sphere’s weight down the incline causes the spring to
compress by a value e.
mg sinθ = ke
(3.00)(9.81)sin300
e=
500
≈ 0.0294 m
= 29.4 mm
MCQ 13: (D)

By the principle of conservation of energy,
PEi + KEi = PEf + KEf
1
mgh + 0 = 0 + mv 2
2
1
80.0(9.81)(30.0 − 30.0 cos 50o ) = (80.0)v 2
2
v = 14.5 m s-1
By the principle of conservation of momentum,

mT uT + mJ uJ = (mT + mJ )v
80.0(14.5) + 0 = (80.0 + 45.0)v
v = 9.28 ms-1
MCQ 14: (A)

The kinetic energy is ½mv2 and remains constant as it reaches constant velocity,
Rate of change of GPE = mgh / t = mg(h/t) = mgv
MCQ 15: (A)

For option B and C, we require two progressive waves to create interference pattern and
standing wave.
Light wave only travels at the speed of light, not at any velocity.
A wave can also behave as a particle. As such, it can carry a momentum.

MCQ 16: (A)
The velocity of the wave passing through S2 and the thin glass plate will have a lower
velocity.
Hence, distance between S2 and screen is longer than distance between S1 and screen.
The central maximum (for which path difference is zero) will shift downwards. Fringe pattern
shifts downwards
MCQ 17: (D)

I α A2
For maximum intensity, Io α (3A)2
For minimum intensity, I α (A)2
I/Io = (A/3A)2
I = Io/9
MCQ 18: (B)

2λ = 0.056
v = fλ
(3.0 x 108) = f(0.056/2)
f = 10.7 GHz
MCQ 19: (C)

Δx = λD/a
(1.44 x 10-3) = (600 x 10-9)(1.2)/a
a = 0.50 mm
MCQ 20: (A)

Only A is the conclusion we can draw from the information given.
If the filament of the fifth bulb has broken, the voltmeter will register the voltage across the
transformer and not a zero reading.
We cannot conclude that C is correct. B and D are possible but further testing need to be
done.

MCQ 21: (C)
2.0 Ω
X
D
V
Y 2.0 Ω
Z 2.0 Ω
Before voltage supply is reversed, diode is forward-bias.

Total current in circuit = V / RX = 12 / 2 = 6.0 A
Since diode is ideal, hence current across resistor Y or Z = 6.0 / 2 = 3.0 A
Potential difference across resistor Y or Z = I (R) = 3.0 x 2 = 6.0 V
Hence, potential difference across voltage supply = 12 + 6.0 = 18 V
After voltage supply is reversed, diode is reverse-bias, no current will flow through the
diode.
Effective resistance = 2.0 + 2.0 = 4.0 Ω
Total current in circuit = V / R = 18 / 4.0 = 4.5 A
Hence, voltmeter reading = Iacross X (R) = 4.5 x 2 = 9.0 V
MCQ 22: (B)

p.d across the 14 Ω resistor = 3 x 0.5 = 1.5 V
I = V / R = 1.5 / 14 = 0.11 A (or 0.107 A)
ε = 3.5 x 0.5 = 1.75 V
Using ε = V +Ir
1.75 = 1.5 + 0.107r
r = 2.3 Ω
or use ε = I(R+r) with I = 0.107, r = 2.4 Ω

MCQ 23: (B)
The equivalent networks are:
5.0 Ω R
Y Z X Y
and
R R R 5.0 Ω
−1 −1
⎛1 1 ⎞ ⎛1 1 ⎞
RYZ = ⎜ + ⎟ R XY = ⎜ + ⎟
⎝ 5 2R ⎠ ⎝ R R + 5.0 ⎠
−1
1 2R + 5 ⎛ 1 1 ⎞
= =⎜ + ⎟
2.5 5(2R ) ⎝ 2.5 7.5 ⎠
R = 2.5 Ω = 1.88 Ω
MCQ 24: (D)

4
p.d. across 4 Ω= (10) = 2 V
4 + 10 + 6
10
p.d. across 10 Ω= (10) = 5 V
20
6
p.d. across 6 Ω= (10) = 3 V
20
Hence, the potential value at P is 2.0 V, Q is 0 V (earthed), R is -5 V and S is -8 V.
MCQ 25: (A)

Using LHR, the magnetic force acting on the electrons is directed downwards.
Hence for electrons to pass through un-deflected, the electric force must be directed
upwards,
Since electrons are negatively charged, they will experience an electric force opposite to the
direction of the E-Field lines.
Thus the E-Field must be directed downwards.
MCQ 26: (B)

B field within coil P will be directed upwards.
Using LHR, force on wire will be directed towards TS.
Hence rod will move towards QR with constant acceleration i.e. uniformly increasing speed.

MCQ 27: (C)
μo I
FB = ×I ×L
2π d
μ I 2L
= o
2π d
FB μoI 2
=
L 2π d
FB mg
Since the wire is suspended, =
L L
μo I 2 ⎛ m ⎞
= g
2π d ⎜⎝ L ⎟⎠
4π × 10−7 × 100.02
= (0.020)(9.81)
2π d
2 × 10−7 × 100.02
d=
0.020 × 9.81
= 0.0102 m
= 1.02 cm
MCQ 28: (D)

.
MCQ 29: (B)
MCQ 30: (B)

hf = (hc/λ) = Φ + KEmax
Therefore Φ = (hc/λ) - KEmax
= (hc/515 × 10-9) –e(0)
= 3.9 x 10-19 J = 2.4 eV
Paper 2 Suggested Solutions: (80 marks)

1
Progressive waves Stationary waves
Amplitude of The amplitude of vibration Amplitude of vibration [B1]
vibration is the same at all points varies with position
Varies from zero at the
nodes (permanently at
rest) to a maximum at
the antinodes.
Wavelength Distance between Equals to twice the [B1]

adjacent particles which distance between a pair of
have the same phase adjacent nodes or
antinodes
Phase No 2 particles within one All particles between

wavelength are in phase consecutive nodes have [B1]
the same phase.
Particles in adjacent
segments of the length
λ/2 have a phase
difference of π rad.
Energy Energy translation in the No net transfer of energy

direction of travel of the [B1]
wave and is transported
at a speed given by the
product of its frequency
and wavelength.
2 (a) Sx = ut + ½ at2

Sx = ½ (2.25) 0.502 [M1]
Sx = 0.281 m
Sy= ut + ½ at2
Sy= 0.5 x 9.81 x 0.502 [M1]
Sy= 1.23 m
Net displacement = sqrt( Sx2+ Sy2) = 1.26 m [A1]

[A1]
Angle with respect to horizontal = 77.1 degree below horizontal
(b) (i) Graph must be negative before any mark is awarded.
Graph: 1 mark for identifying that acceleration is zero at start and end
of graph
Graph: 1 mark for identifying that acceleration is constant at middle

part of graph
(ii) The acceleration between time t1 and t2 is negative value because the [B1]
negative slope of v-t graph.
The acceleration between time t1 and t2 is a constant maximum [B1]

negative value since it corresponds to the steepest gradient of the v-t
graph.

3 (a) (i) ρ iron l
Riron =
Airon
8.90 x 10 -8 (3.0)
=
π (0.60 x 10-3 )2
= 0.236 Ω [M1]
ρ copper l
Rcopper =
Acopper
1.60 x 10 -8 (3.0)
=
2π (0.60 x 10 -3 )(1.78 x 10 -5 )
= 0.715 Ω
[M1]
or
ρ copper l
Rcopper =
Acopper
1.60 x 10 -8 (3.0)
=
π (0.60 x 10 +1.78 x 10 -5 )2 − π (0.60 x 10-3 )2
-3
= 0.705 Ω
When copper is deposited on the surface of the wire, it acts as a

parallel shunt to the iron wire.
1 1 1
= +
Reff Riron Rcopper
−1
⎡ 1 1 ⎤
Reff = ⎢ + ⎥
⎣ 0.236 0.715 ⎦
= 0.178 Ω [A1]
(b) Method 1
Power loss per metre of cable (consist of 2 wires)
= I2R x 2
= (2.5 x 10-3)2 x 0.27 x 2 [M1]
= 3.38 x 10-6 W
Power loss in cable = 12.5 – 1.5 = 11.0 mW [M1]
Maximum distance = 11.0 x 10-3 / 3.38 x 10-6

= 3.25 x 103 m [A1]
Method 2
Power loss in cable = 12.5 – 1.5 = 11.0 mW [M1]
Resistance of one wire = P / I2

= 5.5 x 10-3 / (2.5 x 10-3)2
=880 Ω [M1]
Maximum distance = Rwire / Rper m = 880 / 0.27 = 3.26 x 103 m [A1]

Method 3
Power loss in cable = 12.5 – 1.5 = 11.0 mW
Power loss in cable = 11 x 10-3 = I2Reff’

Reff’ = (11 x 10-3) / (5 x 10-3)2
= 440 Ω
Reff per m of both wires = (1/0.27 + 1/0.27)-1 = 0.35 Ω
Maximum distance = Reff’ / Reff per m = 440 / 0.35 = 3.26 x 103 m
4 (a) Magnetic flux density is defined as the force acting per unit length of a [B1]
conductor, carrying unit current, placed at right angles to the magnetic
field.
S.I unit : Tesla [B1]
(b) (i)
[B1] Field lines pointing upwards and slightly to the right

[B1] Show the field created by wire in correct direction
[B1] Appropriate spacing between field lines
(ii) [M1]

[A1]
F
[B1]
Note:
F must be perpendicular
to field line and touching
the wire
(iii) Electrical energy was being converted to kinetic energy of the wire. [B1]
(iv) If the charged particle is stationary or moves in the direction of the [B1]
magnetic field , there will not have any magnetic force acting on it.
OR
If the charged particle is moving with a component of its velocity

perpendicular to the magnetic field direction, a magnetic force will
act on it.
5 (a) T / K = θ / oC + 273 [A1]
(b)
T/K 273 303 333 363 393
R/Ω 16300 5000 1320 457 159
lg(R / Ω) 4.21 3.70 3.12 2.66 2.20 [A1]
*all answers must be correct to obtain the mark.
(c) see graph below
[B1] – both axis is maximized

[B1] – all points plotted correctly
[B1] – appropriate best fit line drawn
(d) The logarithmic scale is able to represent very widely varying numbers on a [B1]
very compressed scale.
OR
The changes in values of R are very much larger than the changes in
values of T.
(e) This thermistor is called a negative temperature coefficient (NTC)

thermistor as the lg(R / Ω) against T / K graph gives a negative gradient, [B1]
where as temperature increases, resistance decreases.

(f) From the graph, at 323 K, lg(R / Ω) = 3.34
hence R = 103.34 = 2188 Ω [M1]
Using potential divider rule,

⎛ Rthermistor ⎞
⎜ ⎟ E = Vthermistor
⎝ Rthermistor + Rvariable resistor + Rconstant resistor
⎠
⎛ 2188 ⎞ [M1]
⎜ ⎟ 12 = 12 − 0.7
⎝ 2188 + Rvariable resistor + 15 ⎠
26256
= 11.3
2203 + Rvariable resistor
Rvariable resistor = 121 Ω [A1]
*answers may vary depending on value read off from graph.
(g) The 15 Ω resistor is included to prevent a large surge of current through the [B1]
circuit when the temperature is high and the resistance of the thermistor is [B1]
low.

6 (a) (i) First Law - An object will remain at rest or move along a straight line
with constant speed, unless it is acted upon by a resultant (or net)
external force. [B1]
This implies that an object resist change of its state of rest or motion. A
force is needed to change the state of the body. [B1]
(ii) F = ma (N2L simplified)

units of F = units of m x units of a
= kg m s-2 [B1]
(b) (i) 150 km h-1 = 150 x 1000 / 3600 = 41.67 m s-1
v = u + at
41.666 = 0 + a (11)
a = 3.7879 m s-2 [M1]
F = ma
= 1200 x 3.7879
= 4545.45 N [M1]
Fd - f = ma
Fd = 4545.45 + 1200
= 5745.45 N
= 5740 N [A1]
(ii) Pmax = Fd vmax

= 5745.45 x 41.67 [M1]
= 239.393 kW
= 239 kW (to 3 sf) [A1]
(c) (i) Solving strategy:

1 – Find initial KE, E1
2 – Equate Loss in KE = WD in crushing barrels
3 – Find Area under graph to WD in crushing barrels
4 – Showing Area UP TO 1.5 m: 135 kJ < E1
4.0 m: 460 kJ < E1
5 - Finally showing Area UP TO 4.02 m : 464 kJ = E1
Loss in KE:
1 1
m ( u 2 − v 2 ) = (1200 ) ( 27.82 − 0 )
ΔK = 2 2 [B1]
= 463704 J
For x ≤ 1.5 m
W = Fx = (90000)(1.5) = 135000 J
For x ≤ 4.0 m
Wtot = (90000)(1.5) + (130000)(4.0 − 1.5) = 460000 J [C1]
As this is less than the loss in KE, x0 > 4.0 m,

where x0 is the greatest distance the car moved into the cushion of barrels

before coming to rest.
By the Work Energy Theorem,

Loss in KE = work done against the force provided by the cushion of steel
barrels
463704 = 460000 + 170000(x0 − 4.0) [M1]
x0 = 4.02m [A1]
(ii) The actual distance would be shorter than 4.02 m [A1]
The presence of friction / other dissipative forces would result in less than
its original KE to be dissipated by the barrels.
The car’s kinetic energy would be converted into heat, sound and work
involved in deforming the car body. [M1]
(d) (i) change in momentum = mΔv

= 75 x (39.6 x 1000/3600 – 0) [M1]
= 825 kg m s-1 [A1]
(ii) average force = change in momentum / time taken

= 825 / 0.14
= 5890 N [B1]
weight of dummy = 75 x 9.81 = 735.75 N
8 x 735.75 = 5886 N ≈ 5890 N (shown) [B1]
(e) Deflating means the head will move a longer distance/ take a longer time
before coming to a stop [B1]
This reduces the amount of force that the head will experience. [B1]

7 (a) (i) Diffraction is the bending or spreading out of waves when they travel
through a small opening or when they pass round a small obstacle. [A1]
(ii) Principle of Superposition states that when two waves of the same kind
meet at a point in space, the resultant displacement at that point is the
vector sum of the displacements that the two waves would separately
produce separately at that point. [A2]
(iii)
Barrier
Plane
Waves

(b)
L L
H
(i) [B1] maximum displacement at antinodes and zero displacement at node.
[B1] opposite directions for air molecules in each quadrant
(ii) [B1] H at node. L at antinode.
(iii) For open tube;

second harmonic = 2 f1 = 524 Hz. [B1]
Third harmonic = 3 f1= 786 Hz [B1]
(iv) λ
L=
2
v
L=
2f
v
0.655 = ----- [M1]
2(262)
v = 343.22 ms-1
v will be the same. Let L’ be the new length.
λ'
L' =
2
v
L' =
2f'
343.22
= [M1]
2(294)
= 0.584 m [A1]
(v) By varying the pressure at which the flutist blows into the flute. [B1]

(c) (i) A maximum is obtained as the path difference between the reflected
wave (reflected at R) and the direct wave is equivalent to n λ . [B1]
When the waves meet, they superpose constructively and resultant wave
amplitude is the vector addition of the individual wave amplitude. [B1]
(ii) Minimum path difference = 1 λ = = 2 000 m
(Distance of path taken by reflected beam) – (2500 × 103) = 1 λ

(Distance of path taken by reflected beam) – (2500× 103) = 2 000 m [M1]
Distance of path taken by reflected beam =2 502 000 m
Using Pythagoras Theorem,

2 2
⎛ 2502000 ⎞ ⎛ 2500000 ⎞
⎟ =⎜ ⎟ +h
2
⎜ [M1]
⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠
h = 45 km [A1]
(iii)
Signal fades/becomes a minimum when the ionosphere has moved a
distance = ½ λ = 1000 m
Distance moved by ionosphere in 20 min = 1000 m
Speed at which it descends = 1000 /(20 x 60) [M1]

= 0.833 m s-1 [A1]

8 (a) (i)
[M1]
-3 -3 -2
=9.74418×10 = 9.74 × 10 W m [A1]
(ii) P = IA = (9.74418 × 10-3) [ π × (5.0 × 10-11)2] [M1]

= 7.65306 × 10-23 = 7.65 × 10-23 W [A1]
(iii) [M1]
=4600 s (2 s.f) or 4610 s (3 s.f.) (= 1.3 hrs) [A1]
(iv) Photoelectrons are observed to be emitted practically immediately [B1]

during the actual photoelectric experiment.
Classical wave theory predicts that light incident on the metal needs [B1]
some time to accumulate enough energy to eject photoelectrons,
requiring longer for low intensity light (e.g. 1.3 hours according to
ans (iii))
The quantum theory of light hypothesizes that light is delivered in [B1]

discrete bundles of energy called photons, with each photon energy
given by E = hf, instead of continuously. As long as hf exceeds the
work function Φ of the material it will emit photoelectrons.
(v) Students can discuss either point with supporting explanation

EITHER
The existence of a threshold frequency, below which no photoelectrons are
emitted
• For a given metal, no photoelectrons are emitted if the frequency of the [B1]
incident light is lower than the threshold frequency for that metal, [B1]
• regardless of the intensity of the incident radiation is or for how long it
falls on the surface.
• (mention of “threshold freq, award 1st [B1])
• (elaboration of what happens or does not happen beyond or before
that, award 2nd [B1])
OR
Independence of maximum KE on the intensity of illumination.
• Photoelectrons emitted from a metal have a range of velocities from [B1]
zero up to a maximum vmax. (describing in terms of a range of KE’s
also acceptable)
2
• The maximum kinetic energy 21 mv max was found to depend linearly on [B1]
the frequency of the radiation and is independent of its intensity.
(b) (i) The downward transitions/de-excitations of the electrons from

higher/excited energy states to lower energy releases a photon,

giving rise to the spectral lines. [B1]
(answers like “Transitions between energy levels” not accepted as it does

not distinguish between absorption or emission)
(ii) The highest energy level the 3.70 eV bombarding electrons can
excite the sodium to is n = 4; E= -1.56 eV. The maximum number of
downward transitions from the n=4 state is 4C2 = 6. [B1]
The transitions are 4 → 3; 4 → 2; 4 → 1; 3 → 2; 3 → 1; 2 → 1) [B1]
(answers like “there are only 6 possible transitions not accepted)
(iii)
n=2 3 to 1 4 to 1
to n = 1 [B1]
(looking for correct ordering/sequence of the lines)
(iv) 3.70 –[(-3.07) – (-5.17)] = 1.60 (for the 1 → 2 transition) [M1]

3.70 – [(-1.56) – (-5.17)] = 0.09 (for the 1 → 4 transition) [M1]
0.09 eV ≤ KE ≤ 1.60 eV [A1]
(v) 4 spectral lines will be observed. [B1]
The photons of energy 1.51 eV (from n = 1 to n = 2) and 2.10 eV [B1]

(from n = 1 to n = 3) will be absorbed. Only photons of energy
corresponding exactly to the difference between the ground state
and an excited state will be absorbed. While they are re-emitted, the
intensity in the forward direction would be very weak.

NANYANG JUNIOR COLLEGE
JC 2 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION
Higher 1
PHYSICS 8866/01
1 hour

Write your name, class and tutor’s name on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless this has been
done for you.
There are thirty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record you choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
[Turn over
2
DATA AND FORMULAE
Data
8 –1
speed of light in free space c = 3.00 x 10 m s
–19
elementary charge e = 1.60 x 10 C
–34
the Planck constant h = 6.63 x 10 Js
–27
unified atomic mass constant u = 1.66 x 10 kg
–31
rest mass of electron me = 9.11 x 10 kg
–27
rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 x 10 kg
–2
acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion s = ut + ½ at2
v2 = u2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas W = pΔV

resistors in series R = R1 + R2 + ....
resistors in parallel 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + ....
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10

3
1 In which of the pairs of quantities listed have the same basic units?
A Impulse and force

B Momentum and rate of change of displacement
C Energy and moment of a force
D Electromotive force and magnetic force
2. In a mass-spring experiment to determine the spring constant k, the equation used is

m
T = 2π
k
where the period, T is found to be (2.8 ± 0.1) s when the mass, m is (50 ± 1) g. The value of k
and its uncertainty is
A (0.25 ± 0.01) N m−1 B (0.25 ± 0.02) N m−1
C (250 ± 20) N m−1 D (252 ± 20) N m−1
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the graphs of velocity v against time t for two cars A and B traveling along a
straight level road in the same direction.
v / m s-1
26
24 A
22
Fig 3.1
20
18
16
14 B
12
10
6
0 2 4 6 8 10
t/s
At time t = 0, both cars are side by side. Find the time at which car A overtakes car B.
A 1.2 s B 2.3 s C 2.8 s D 4.0 s
[Turn over
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10
4
4 A basketball player throws a ball with an initial velocity of 12.0 m s-1 at an angle of 25.0o to the
vertical. Assuming that air resistance is negligible and the horizontal distance the ball travels to
the hoop is 10.6 m, determine the speed at which the ball enters the hoop.
Hoop
12.0 m s-1
25.0o
10.6 m
A 4.49 m s-1 B 9.63 m s-1 C 10.9 m s-1 D 11.8 m s-1
5 Which of the following statements relating to Newton’s third law is not correct?
A The two forces must be opposite in direction.

B The two forces are acting on a body in equilibrium.
C The two forces must be of the same type.
D The two forces must have the same magnitude.
6 A body of mass 5.0 kg, moving at 5.0 m s-1, is acted on by a force in the opposite direction
which varies with time as shown. What is the magnitude of the momentum of the body at time
t = 6.0 s?
force / N
10
0 2 4 6 8 time / s
A 25 N s B 45 N s C 50 N s D 75 N s
7 Two spheres, one of mass 3m and another of mass m, are traveling with speed v and moving
towards each other. The spheres have a head-on elastic collision.
v v
3m m
A The spheres stick together after impact and have a resultant speed of 0.5mv.
B The kinetic energy of mass m after impact is 2mv2.
C The sum of their momenta after impact is 4mv.
D Mass 3m has more kinetic energy than mass m after impact.
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10

5
8 A wire that obeys Hooke’s Law is of length x1 when it is in equilibrium under a tension T1. Its
length becomes x2 when the tension is increased to T2. What is the extra energy stored in the
wire as a result of this process?
1 1 1 1
A (T2 + T1 )( x2 − x1 ) B (T2 + T1 )( x2 + x1 ) C (T2 + T1 )( x2 − x1 ) D (T2 + T1 )( x2 + x1 )
4 4 2 2
9 The diagram below shows a ladder resting on a rough floor and against a rough wall. Which
arrow shows a possible direction of the force exerted on the ladder by the wall?
D
A
B
Ladder
Rough wall C
Rough floor
10 An electron is projected horizontally into the vertical electric field in the space between two
horizontal charged plates. A magnetic field is pointing into the plane of the paper between the
charged plates. The electron passes through undeflected.
electric
+ field
× × × × ×
× × × × ×
electron
path × × × × × magnetic
field
–
Which row correctly identifies the direction of the forces acting on the electron?
Electromagnetic
Electric Force Gravitational Force
Force
A upwards downwards downwards
B upwards downwards upwards
C upwards upwards downwards
D downwards upwards downwards
[Turn over
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10
6
11 A stone of mass M is fired from a catapult at an initial speed v at an angle θ to the horizontal at
a point where the acceleration of free fall is g. The speed of the stone when it has risen to a
height y above the point of release depends only on
A M, θ, v and g. B θ, v, g and y. C M, v, g and y D v, g and y.
12
4.0 kg
10.0 kg
30°
The frictional force between the 4.0 kg mass and the plane of the slope is 4.0 N. If the distance
moved by the 10.0 kg mass is 2.0 m, the kinetic energy gained by the system is
A 118 J B 149 J C 157 J D 165 J
13 The graph below shows how an applied force varies with displacement.
force / N
50
displacement / m
0 50 70
−20
What is the net work done by the force?
A 1050 J B 1250 J C 2450 J D 4900 J
14 A plane wave of amplitude A is incident on a surface of area S placed so that it is perpendicular

to the direction of travel of the wave. The energy per unit time intercepted by the surface is E.
The amplitude of the wave is increased to 2A and the area of the surface is reduced to S/2.
How much energy per unit time is intercepted by this smaller surface?
A 4E B E C 2E D E/2
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10

7
15 The graph below shows the variation of displacement y with time t for particles P and Q in a
progressive wave with wavelength λ.
particle P particle Q
What is the distance of particle Q from particle P?
A λ/2 B 3λ/4 C λ/4 D 3λ/8
16 The given diagram show the relative position of two generators, S1 and S2, that produce water
waves of wavelength 4.0 m. When operated by itself, each produces waves which have an
amplitude A at point P. If the generators are operating anti-phase, what is the amplitude of the
oscillation at P?
S1 S2
2.0 m
8.0 m
A 0 B A C 2A D 4A
17 When coherent monochromatic light falls on a double slits, interference pattern is observed on a
screen some distance from the slits.
Which of the following will increase the separation of the fringe pattern?
A decreasing the distance between the screen and the slits

B increasing the distance between the slits
C using monochromatic light of lower frequency
D immense the whole set up in water
[Turn over
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10
8
18 A stationary sound wave has a series of nodes. The distance between the first and fifth node is
20.0 cm.
What is the wavelength of the sound wave?
A 4.0 cm
B 5.0 cm
C 10.0 cm
D 13.3 cm
19
The graph above shows the I-V characteristic curve of the diode in the circuit. If the resistance
of the rheostat is lowered, how will the resistance of the diode change?
A remains constant at infinite resistance.

B remains constant at zero.
C increases.
D decreases.
20 The diagram below shows a simplified model of an atom in which two electrons move around
the nucleus in a circular orbit. The electrons complete one full orbit in 1.0 × 10-15 s.
electron
nucleus
electron
What is the current caused by the motion of the electrons in the orbit?
A 1.6 × 10-34 A
B 3.2 × 10-34 A
C 1.6 × 10-4 A
D 3.2 × 10-4 A
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10

9
21 A cell of e.m.f E and internal resistance r is connected to a resistor of resistance R as shown in

the diagram. A voltmeter of infinite resistance is connected in parallel with the resistor.
E
r
When the value of R is 2.0 Ω, the voltmeter reading is 3.0 V. When R is 4.0 Ω, the voltmeter
reading is 4.0 V. The internal resistance of the cell is
A 0.5 Ω B 1.0 Ω C 2.0 Ω D 4.0 Ω
22 Determine the effective resistance between terminals A and B.
10.0 Ω 10.0 Ω
10.0 Ω
A
10.0 Ω 10.0 Ω
A 5.0 Ω B 6.3 Ω C 20 Ω D 35 Ω
23 Determine the value of the potential at point X in the circuit below.
12.0 Ω
3.0 V
6.0 Ω
3.2 Ω
3.2 Ω
A 0.92 V B 2.4 V C 2.8 V D 3.0 V
[Turn over
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10
10
24 A lighting circuit consists two lamps connected to a constant ideal d.c. source. Resistance of
lamp X is twice that of lamp Y. The variable resistors RX and RY control the relative intensities
of the lamps.
RY
X X
RX
Y X
If power output of lamp X is thrice that of lamp Y, the ratio of the currents in RX to that in RY
should be
3 3
A 1:3 B 1: C :1 D 3:1
2 2
25 A small rectangular coil carrying constant current is placed at one end of a horizontal solenoid.
The initial position of the coil plane is vertical, with its shorter axis of symmetry coinciding with
the axis of the solenoid.
Shorter axis of
coil along axis
coil of solenoid solenoid
When a steady current is passed through the solenoid,
A the coil is pulled into the solenoid

B the coil is pushed out of the solenoid
C the coil experiences a torque about a horizontal axis
D the coil experiences a torque about a vertical axis
26 A long vertical wire carries a current of 5.0 A in a magnetic field of flux density 1.0 x 10-3 T. The
magnetic field is at an angle of 30o below the horizontal. What is the force per unit length acting
on the wire?
A 2.2 x 10-3 N m-1 B 2.5 x 10-3 N m-1 C 3.8 x 10-3 N m-1 D 4.3 x 10-3 N m-1
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10

11
27 The magnetic flux density B at the centre of a flat circular coil of radius r consisting of N turns
carrying a current I is given by the equation
μ0 I N
B=
2r
Two such coils, X and Y, each with 100 turns, are arranged as shown in the diagram.
X has radius 0.050 m and carries a current of 3.0 A, Y has a radius 0.10 m and carries
a current of 6.0 A in the opposite direction to X.
What is the magnitude of the total magnetic flux density at the centre of the coils?
A zero B 1500 μo C 3000 μo D 4500 μo
28 An electron of mass m traveling with speed u collides with an atom and its speed is reduced to
v. The speed of the atom is unaltered, but one of its electrons is excited to a higher energy level
and then returns to its original state, emitting a photon of radiation. If h is the Planck constant,
the frequency of the radiation is
m(u 2 − v 2 ) m(v 2 − u 2 ) m(u 2 + v 2 ) mv 2

A B C D
2h 2h 2h 2h
29 Which of the following are explained by wave-like ideas?
1. Using an electron beam in an electron microscope to form images of very small objects.
2 Using γ-radiation to knock electrons out of atoms.
3 Deflecting an electron beam by using a magnetic field.
A 1 only B 1 and 3 only C 2 and 3 only D 1, 2 and 3.
30 A monochromatic beam of red light falls on one electrode of a photo-cell and electrons are
emitted. The light beam is then replaced by a blue beam delivering the same energy per unit
time to the cell. Which one of the following quantities decreases as a result of this change?
A The maximum kinetic energy of the electrons emitted.

B The number of photons striking the metal per unit time.
C The energy of each photon striking the electrode.
D The work function of the metal.
--------- End of Paper ---------
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10

12
Answers
1 C 11 D 21 C
2 B 12 B 22 B
3 B 13 A 23 B
4 C 14 C 24 C
5 B 15 D 25 D
6 A 16 C 26 D
7 B 17 C 27 A
8 C 18 C 28 A
9 D 19 A 29 A
10 A 20 D 30 B
NYJC 2010 8866/01/PRELIM/10

Higher 1
CANDIDATE
NAME
TUTOR’S
CLASS
NAME
PHYSICS 8866/02
Paper 2 Structured questions 15 September 2010
2 hours
No Additional Materials are required

Write your name and class on all the work you hand in.
Section A
Section B
For Examiner’s Use
Section A
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part 1
question.
2
Section B
Total
[Turn over
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
DATA AND FORMULAE
Data
8 –1
–19
–34
–27
–31
–27
–2
Formulae

v2 = u2 + 2as
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section A
1 A 450 g football is kicked off the top of a building as shown in Fig. 1 below.
Building
30 m
24 m Ground
Fig. 1
The football leaves the building at an angle θ and takes 3.0 s to hit the ground.
Determine, for the football as it is kicked off the building,
(a) the horizontal component of the velocity of the football,
horizontal component of the velocity = m s-1 [1]
(b) the angle θ.
angle θ = [3]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10 [Turn over

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Find the speed at which the football lands on the ground.
speed = [1]
The football lands on the ground and does not rebound.
(d) Calculate the magnitude of the average force acting on the football as it lands if the
football stops in 0.12 s.
average force = N [2]
2 (a) State the conditions necessary for a body to be in equilibrium.
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a 1000 N uniform thin rod being towed and moving at constant
horizontal velocity.
. T
Fig. 2.1
30o
A
floor
(i) Draw and label the 2 other forces on Fig 2.1 and show that the forces acting on
the block meet at a point. Mark that point P. [2]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10
5 For
Examiner’s
(ii) Given that T = 1500 N, show that θ = 40o. Use
[2]
(iii) In practice, wheels are installed at point A to reduce wear and tear at A, where
the block is in contact with the floor. Given that that θ is fixed, explain how the
motion of the rod will change.
[1]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a light dependent resistor (LDR), a 200 Ω resistor and a light bulb of
resistance 1.0 kΩ when operated normally connected to form a potential divider. The
resistance of the LDR is 1000 Ω and 100 Ω in the dark and in bright light conditions
respectively.
power
Q supply
200 Ω
R
S
Fig. 3.1
The light bulb requires a potential difference of 12 V to operate normally and it is designed to
be turned on when the room is in the dark.
(a) Calculate the effective resistance between P and Q when the LDR is placed in a dark
room and the bulb is operating normally.
effective resistance = Ω [1]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Calculate the potential at P when the room is in the dark.
potential at P = V [2]
(c) Calculate the power dissipated by the bulb when operated normally
power dissipated = W [1]
(d) Sketch the Ι-V characteristic graph of a filament bulb and thermistor below. [2]
Ι Ι
V V
Filament bulb Thermistor
(e) A student decides to connect a semi-conductor diode between S and R such that the
bulb will not light up. Draw the semiconductor on Fig. 3.1. [1]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) Define the term tesla.
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a piece of wire carrying a current of 2.0 A placed perpendicularly to a
uniform magnetic field.
Region of uniform
B magnetic field
2.0 A 2.0 cm
300
10 cm
Fig. 4.1
The uniform magnetic field is of dimensions 10 cm by 2.0 cm and its magnetic flux
density is 0.10 mT. The magnetic field is into the page.
(i) Calculate the length of the wire in the magnetic field
length of wire = m [1]
(ii) Hence calculate the electromagnetic force exerted on the wire.
force on wire = N [3]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows a negatively charged particle of velocity v entering a region of uniform
magnetic field.
Region of uniform
magnetic field
Fig. 4.2
The electromagnetic force acting on the particle is into the page.
Draw the direction of the magnetic field on Fig. 4.2. [1]
5 In the design of structure, such as buildings, towers or bridges, an engineer may use a
cantilever beam to allow for overhanging structure without external bracing. A cantilever is a
beam supported only on one end.
The engineer will make calculations to ensure that the cantilever beam is strong enough to
withstand any forces applied on it and ensure that there is not too much vertical deflection.
An appropriate beam can then be chosen based on the maximum allowable load to be
applied.
Fig. 5.1 illustrates a cantilever of length L loaded with a point load P at its end. A vertical
deflection y of the free end of the cantilever will result from the loading.
Fig. 5.1
A student was asked to investigate the behaviour of such an arrangement and found out
from a book that the expression relating the vertical deflection of a loader cantilever. This
was given as Equation 1:
4PL3
y= (Equation 1)
kbh3
where k is a constant
b = breath of cantilever
h = height of cantilever
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) The student first used two steel cantilevers to investigate the relationship between y, P
and L. He first kept L constant and varied P and obtained the results as shown in Fig.
5.2:
P (N) 10 20 40 50 70 90
y (mm) for Cantilever A 1.9 3.9 7.8 9.9 13.8 17.7
y (mm) for Cantilever B 10.8 16.0 26.9 34.8 46.2 57.9
Fig. 5.2
By plotting this result on a graph, he was able to deduce a relationship between y and
P for both cantilevers. This appeared to be of the same form for each, although there
seemed to be some form of systematic error in the results for B. The graph showing
the relationship between y and P for Cantilever A has been sketched on Fig. 5.3.
(i) On Fig. 5.3, draw a best fit line through the plots to show the relationship
between y and P for Cantilever B. [1]
Graph of Deflection y (mm) against Point Load P (N)
70
60
50
40
y / mm
30
20
Cantilever A
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
P/N
Fig. 5.3

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) From Fig. 5.3, describe the relationship between y and P for Cantilever A and
discuss whether the data in Fig. 5.2 for Cantilever A support Equation 1.
[2]
(iii) Suggest a reason why the student thinks the measurements for Cantilever B
were subjected to systematic error.
[2]
(iv) From the graphs plotted, estimate the amount of this error.
error = mm [1]
(b) The student continued his investigation by keeping P constant and varying L, obtaining
the results for Cantilever A as shown in Fig. 5.4.
L (m) 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
y (mm) 1.6 5.3 12.5 24.6 42.4 67.2 99.9
Fig. 5.4
These results did not suggest direct proportionality between y and L. The student
proceeded to sketch a graph showing the variation of lg y against lg L as shown in Fig.
5.5.
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
Graph of lg (y/mm) against lg (L/m)
2.5
2.0
1.5
lg (y/mm)
1.0
0.5
0.0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
lg (L/m)
Fig. 5.5
(i) Determine the gradient of the graph. Show your working.
gradient = [1]
(ii) Hence discuss whether the data in Fig. 5.4 support Equation 1.
[2]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) After researching further into the subject, the student found out that the constant k in
Equation 1 is known as the Young’s Modulus which is a property of the material which
the cantilever is made from.
(i) Use Equation 1 to show that the S.I. unit of k is Pa. [2]
(ii) A steel cantilever has width 0.12 m, height of 0.040 m and length of 2.0 m as
shown in Fig. 5.6. If a point load of 1.0 kN is applied at the end, a vertical
deflection of 2.0 cm was measured at the end. Calculate the Young’s Modulus of
steel.
2.0 m
Point
Load
0.040 m
Fig. 5.6
0.12 m
Young’s Modulus of steel = Pa [1]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section B
Answer two questions from this section.
6 A sports car of mass 1500 kg is speeding along a straight road at 110 km h-1. A lorry
suddenly appears in front of the car. In the time interval between the lorry being spotted and
the brakes on the car coming into operation, the car moves forward a distance of 10.6 m.
With the brakes applied, the front wheels of the car leave skid marks on the road that are
4.2 m long, as illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
110 km h-1 Skid mark

lorry
10.6 m 4.2 m
Fig. 6.1
It is estimated that, during the skid, the magnitude of the deceleration of the car is 0.85 g,
where g is the acceleration of free fall.
(a) Determine
(i) the speed v of the car before just before it collide with the stationary lorry.
speed v = m s-1 [2]
(ii) the time interval between the lorry appearing and the collision taking place.
time interval = s [2]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the side view of the

passenger of mass 65 kg in the front seat. Normal
The forces acting on him at the instant reaction
when the brake is applied is also shown. force.
C.G. x
Frictional force
Weight of passenger
Fig. 6.2
(i) With reference to the forces acting on him, explain why the driver will lean
forward during this instant.
[2]
(ii) State the net force acting on the passenger.
net force = N [1]
(c) Given that the sport car make a completely inelastic collision with the stationary lorry
of mass 2500 kg.
(i) Explain what is meant by a completely inelastic collision.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the velocity of the car right after collision, stating any assumption made.
velocity = m s-1 [3]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) The airbag in the sport car is deployed almost immediately after the collision.
Explain how the airbag help to minimize the injuries to the front seat passenger.
[2]
(d) After the accident, the sports car of mass 1500

kg had to be towed by a 2000 kg lorry up a slope
at a constant speed of 5.0 m s-1 as shown in Fig. 5.0 ms-1
6.3. The power P delivered by the lorry is 55 kW.
10o
Fig. 6.3
(i) By considering the sports car and the lorry as a whole system, find the rate of
increase of the gravitational potential energy of the system.
rate of increase of GPE = J s-1 [2]
(ii) Using the principle of conservation of energy, show that the total resistive force,
fR acting on the whole system (sports car + lorry) is approximately 5000 N.
[2]
(iii) Hence determine the driving force, F acting on the lorry, explaining your answer.
driving force = N [2]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 The diagram below shows visible light waves spreading through a single slit a before
spreading at slits b and c.
S1
S2 Y
screen Image
θ seen
on screen
(a) State the name of this experiment.
[1]
(b) With reference to the waves spreading from the slits b and c, explain why interference
occurs only where waves from both sources overlap.
[2]
(c) Explain what diffraction is, and describe the part played by diffraction in this experiment.
[2]
(d) Label one part of the screen view where destructive interference has occurred with the
letter D.
[1]
(e) Explain in detail why constructive interference occurs at N.
[2]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(f) State a condition necessary for observable interference, and explain how this
experiment ensures that the condition is met.
[2]
(g) The monochromatic light used in this experiment has a wavelength 589 nm. The
distance between S1 and S2 is 0.200 m while the distance between S2 and the screen is
2.5 m. The distance between slits b and c is 0.80 mm.
Calculate the distance between two consecutive bright lines on the screen.
distance = m [2]
(h) If a piece of plastic is placed in front of slit b, the light waves from b will be caused to
slow down, without any change in frequency. Some of the wave energy will be
absorbed by the plastic as well.
(i) State how the wavelength of the wave from b will change.
[1]
(ii) State how the amplitude of the wave from b will change.
[1]
(iii) Based on your answer in (h)(i), predict whether there will be more or fewer
waveforms in the plastic piece as compared to the number of waveforms in an
equal thickness of air.
[1]

18 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iv) Using your answers in (h)(ii) and (iii), explain how the image on the screen will
change, in terms of position, separation and contrast, when a piece of plastic is
placed in front of slit b.
[5]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

19 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Electromagnetic radiation is incident normally on the surface of a metal. Electrons are
emitted from the surface and these are attracted to a positively charged electrode, as shown
in Fig. 8.
electromagnetic
radiation
electrode
evacuated
enclosure
metal
surface μA
Fig. 8
(a) Name the effect which gives rise to the emission of the electrons.
[1]
(b) State a word equation, base on the principle of conservation of energy, which
describes this effect
[2]
(c) The current recorded on the mircroammeter is 2.1 μA. Calculate the number of
electrons emitted per second from the surface.
number per second = [2]

20 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) The incident radiation has wavelength 240 nm. Show that the energy of a photon
incident on the surface is 8.28 x 10-19 J.
[1]
(e) The intensity of the incident radiation is 8.2 × 103 W m-2. The area of the surface is
2.0 cm2. Calculate
(i) the power of the radiation incident on the surface,
power of radiation = W [1]
(ii) the number of photons incident per second on the surface.
number per second = [2]
(iii) Hence determine the ratio
number of electrons emitted per second

number of photons incident per second
ratio = [1]
(f) Comment on your answer to (e)(iii).
[1]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

21 For
Examiner’s
Use
(g) When the wavelength of the radiation is gradually increased to 310 nm, the reading in
the microammeter just drops to zero. Explain this phenomenon and calculate the
maximum kinetic energy of the electrons emitted from the metal surface when the
wavelength of the radiation remains at 240 nm.
[2]
maximum k.e. = J [2]
(h) (i) Calculate the momentum of the photon given in (d).
momentum = N s [1]
(ii) If there are altogether 1.5 x 1018 photons striking onto the metal surface per
second and are all absorbed, determine the force exerting on the metal surface.
Show your working clearly.
force on metal surface = N [4]

2010 NYJC Prelim H1 Paper 1 Solutions
1 C 11 D 21 C
2 B 12 B 22 B
3 B 13 A 23 B
4 C 14 C 24 C
5 B 15 D 25 D
6 A 16 C 26 D
7 B 17 C 27 A
8 C 18 C 28 A
9 D 19 A 29 A
10 A 20 D 30 B
Higher 1
CANDIDATE
NAME
TUTOR’S
CLASS
NAME
PHYSICS 8866/02
Paper 2 Structured questions 15 September 2010
2 hours
No Additional Materials are required

Section A
Section B
Section A
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part 1
question.
2
Section B
Total
[Turn over
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
DATA AND FORMULAE
Data
8 –1
–19
–34
–27
–31
–27
–2
Formulae

v2 = u2 + 2as
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section A
1 A 450 g football is kicked off the top of a building as shown in Fig. 1 below.
Building
30 m
24 m Ground
Fig. 1
The football leaves the building at an angle θ and takes 3.0 s to hit the ground.
Determine, for the football as it is kicked off the building,
(a) the horizontal component of the velocity of the football,
sx = u xt
24 = u x (3.0)
u x = 8.0 m s−1
horizontal component of the velocity = m s-1 [1]
(b) the angle θ.
Taking upwards as positive,

1
s y = u yt + a yt 2
2
1
−30 = u y (3.0) − (9.81)(3.0)2
2
u y = 4.715 m s-1
u
tan θ = y
ux
θ = 310 angle θ = [3]
C

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
below the initial launch point.
(c) Find the speed at which the football lands on the ground.
v y = u y + a yt
= 4.715 − 9.81(3.0)
= −24.715 m s-1
Speed of football as it lands = (8.0)2 + (−24.715)2 = 25.978

= 26 m speed
s-1 = [1]
The football lands on the ground and does not rebound.
(d) Calculate the magnitude of the average force acting on the football as it lands if the
football stops in 0.12 s.
Final momentum of the football = 0 N s
Initial momentum of the football = 0.450 x 25.978 = 11.690 N s
Taking upwards as positive,

p f − pi 0 − (−11.690)
Average force = = = 97 N
t 0.12
average force = N [2]
2 (a) State the conditions necessary for a body to be in equilibrium.
The vector sum of forces acting on the body must be equal to zero.
The resultant torque of a body must be zero
[2]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a 1000 N uniform thin rod being towed and moving at constant
horizontal velocity.
.
T
R = Total reaction force from the ground

W = Gravitational force on the rod
α θ
Fig. 2.1
R
30o W
A
floor
(i) Draw and label the 2 other forces on Fig 2.1 and show that the forces acting on
the block meet at a point. Mark that point P. [2]
(ii) Given that T = 1500 N, show that θ = 40o.
Taking moment about point A,
l
∑τ : W ( ) cos 30o − T (l ) cos α = 0
A
2
[2]
α = 73.22 o
α + θ − 30o = 90o
θ = 46.8o ≈ 49o
(iii) In practice, wheels are installed at point A to reduce wear and tear at A, where
the block is in contact with the floor. Given that that θ is fixed, explain how the
motion of the rod will change.
When wheels are installed, the frictional force at A will reduce
significantly and since θ is fixed, T must remain the same to maintain
vertical equilibrium of forces, therefore, there must be a net force in the
horizontal direction and the rod will accelerate to the right.
[1]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a light dependent resistor (LDR), a 200 Ω resistor and a light bulb of
resistance 1.0 kΩ when operated normally connected to form a potential divider. The
resistance of the LDR is 1000 Ω and 100 Ω in the dark and in bright light conditions
respectively.
power
Q supply
200 Ω
R
S
Fig. 3.1
The light bulb requires a potential difference of 12 V to operate normally and it is designed to
be turned on when the room is in the dark.
(a) Calculate the effective resistance between P and Q when the LDR is placed in a dark
room and the bulb is operating normally.
1 1 −1
R=( + ) = 500 Ω
1000 1000
effective resistance = Ω [1]
(b) Calculate the potential at P when the room is in the dark.
The potential between P and Q is 12 V
By potential divider,
500
× VPR = 12V
(500 + 200)
VPR = 16.8V
(-16.8 V is also accepted) potential at P = V [2]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Calculate the power dissipated by the bulb when operated normally
V 2 122
P= = = 0.144 W ≈ 0.14 W
R 1000
power dissipated = W [1]
(d) Sketch the Ι-V characteristic graph of a filament bulb and thermistor below. [2]
I I
V V
Filament bulb Thermistor
(e) A student decides to connect a semi-conductor diode between S and R such that the
bulb will not light up. Draw the semiconductor on Fig. 3.1. [1]
4 (a) Define the term tesla.

One tesla is defined as the strength of a magnetic field in which a force of one newton
must act on a wire of length one meter carrying one ampere of current in a direction
perpendicular to the field.
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a piece of wire carrying a current of 2.0 A placed perpendicularly to a
uniform magnetic field.

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
Region of uniform
B
magnetic field
2.0 A 2.0 cm
300
10 cm
Fig. 4.1
The uniform magnetic field is of dimensions 10 cm by 2.0 cm and its magnetic flux
density is 0.10 mT. The magnetic field is into the page.
(i) Calculate the length of the wire in the magnetic field
2.0 = l sin 300

l = 4.0 cm
= 0.040 m
length of wire = m [1]
(ii) Hence calculate the electromagnetic force exerted on the wire.

F = BIl sin θ
= 0.1×10−3 × 2.0 × 4.0 ×10−2 × sin 900
= 8.0 ×10−6 N
force on wire = N [3]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows a negatively charged particle of velocity v entering a region of uniform
magnetic field.
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
Region of uniform
magnetic field
v Direction of
magnetic
field
Fig. 4.2
The electromagnetic force acting on the particle is into the page.
Draw the direction of the magnetic field on Fig. 4.2. [1]
5 In the design of structure, such as buildings, towers or bridges, an engineer may use a
cantilever beam to allow for overhanging structure without external bracing. A cantilever is a
beam supported only on one end.
The engineer will make calculations to ensure that the cantilever beam is strong enough to
withstand any forces applied on it and ensure that there is not too much vertical deflection.
An appropriate beam can then be chosen based on the maximum allowable load to be
applied.
Fig. 5.1 illustrates a cantilever of length L loaded with a point load P at its end. A vertical
deflection y of the free end of the cantilever will result from the loading.
Load
Fig. 5.1
A student was asked to investigate the behaviour of such an arrangement and found out
from a book that the expression relating the vertical deflection of a loader cantilever. This
was given as Equation 1:
4PL3
y= (Equation 1)
kbh3
where k is a constant
b = breath of cantilever
h = height of cantilever

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) The student first used two steel cantilevers to investigate the relationship between y, P
and L. He first kept L constant and varied P and obtained the results as shown in Fig.
5.2:
P (N) 10 20 40 50 70 90
y (mm) for Cantilever A 1.9 3.9 7.8 9.9 13.8 17.7
y (mm) for Cantilever B 10.8 16.0 26.9 34.8 46.2 57.9
Fig. 5.2
By plotting this result on a graph, he was able to deduce a relationship between y and P
for both cantilevers. This appeared to be of the same form for each, although there
seemed to be some form of systematic error in the results for B. The graph showing the
relationship between y and P for Cantilever A has been sketched on Fig. 5.3.
(i) On Fig. 5.3, draw a best fit line through the plots to show the relationship
between y and P for Cantilever B. [1]
Graph of Deflection y (mm) against Point Load P (N)
70
60
50 Cantilever B
40
y / mm
30
20
Cantilever A
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
P/N
Fig. 5.3
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) From Fig. 5.3, discuss whether the data in Fig. 5.2 support Equation 1.
The graph shows a linear relationship between y and P.

The data support Equation 1 as y is proportional to P.
[2]
(iii) Suggest a reason why the student thinks the measurements for Cantilever B
were subjected to systematic error.
When no point load is being applied to cantilever B (P = 0), there should

not be any deflection (y = 0). However, from the graph, there seems to
be a deflection when P = 0 for Cantilever B, suggesting the presence of a
systematic error.
[2]
(iv) From the graphs plotted, estimate the amount of this error.
Error = any answers between 5 – 6 mm [1]
(b) The student continued his investigation by keeping P constant and varying L, obtaining
the results for Cantilever A as shown in Fig. 5.4.
L (m) 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
y (mm) 1.6 5.3 12.5 24.6 42.4 67.2 99.9
Fig. 5.4
These results did not suggest direct proportionality between y and L. The student
proceeded to sketch a graph showing the variation of lg y against lg L as shown in Fig.
5.5.

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
Graph of lg (y/mm) against lg (L/m)
2.5
2.0
1.5
lg (y/mm)
1.0
0.5
0.0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
lg (L/m)
Fig. 5.5
(i) Determine the gradient of the graph. Show your working.
2.000 − 0.500
Gradient = = 3.00
0.600 − 0.100
choose a gradient triangle more than half the area of the grids
Gradient = [1]
(ii) Hence discuss whether the data in Fig. 5.4 support Equation 1.
The data supports Eq 1 as the gradient of the graph lg y against lg L

gives the order of the relation between y and L. From the data, y is
proportional to L3 which support Equation 1.
[2]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) After researching further into the subject, the student found out that the constant k in
Equation 1 is known as the Young’s Modulus which is a property of the material which
the cantilever is made from.
(i) Use Equation 1 to show that the S.I. unit of k is Pa. [2]
4PL3
y=
kbh3
4PL3
k=
ybh3
[P ][L3 ] N (m3 ) N
[k ] = 3
= 3
= 2 = Pa
[ y ][b][h ] m(m )(m ) m
(ii) A steel cantilever has width 0.12 m, height of 0.040 m and length of 2.0 m as
shown in Fig. 5.6. If a point load of 1.0 kN is applied at the end, a vertical
deflection of 2.0 cm was measured at the end. Calculate the Young’s Modulus of
steel.
2.0 m
Point
Load
0.040 m
Fig. 5.6
0.12 m
4PL3
y=
kbh 3
4PL3 4(1.0 × 103 )(2.0)3
k= = = 2.08 × 1011 Pa
ybh3 0.020(0.12)(0.040)3
Young’s Modulus of steel = Pa [1]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section B
6 A sports car of mass 1500 kg is speeding along a straight road at 110 km h-1. A lorry
suddenly appears in front of the car. In the time interval between the lorry being spotted and
the brakes on the car coming into operation, the car moves forward a distance of 10.6 m.
With the brakes applied, the front wheels of the car leave skid marks on the road that are
4.2 m long, as illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
110 km h-1 Skid mark

lorry
10.6 m 4.2 m
Fig. 6.1
It is estimated that, during the skid, the magnitude of the deceleration of the car is 0.85 g,
where g is the acceleration of free fall.
(a) Determine
(i) the speed v of the car before just before it collide with the stationary lorry.
110 km h-1 = 30.6 m s-1.

v2 = u2 +2as = (30.6)2 + 2(0.85)(-9.91)(4.2)
v = 29.1 m s-1.
speed v = m s-1 [2]
(ii) the time interval between the lorry appearing and the collision taking place.
t1 = 10.6/30.6 = 0.346 s.
t2 = v-u/a = (29.1 - 30.6)/(0.85)(-9.81) = 0.180 s
total time = t1 + t2 = (0.346 + 0.180) = 0.53 s
time interval = s [2]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the side view of the

passenger of mass 65 kg in the front seat. Normal
The forces acting on him at the instant reaction
when the brake is applied is also shown. force.
C.G. x
Frictional force
Weight of passenger
Fig. 6.2
(i) With reference to the forces acting on him, explain why the driver will lean
forward during this instant.
From the diagram shown, the frictional force will provide a clockwise
moment about the C.G. resulting in the driver rotating clockwise. Hence
the driver will lean forward during this instant.
[2]
(ii) State the net force acting on the passenger.

∑F = ma = (65)(0.85)(9.81) = 542 N
\\
net force = N [1]
(c) Given that the sport car make a completely inelastic collision with the stationary lorry
of mass 2500 kg.
(i) Explain what is meant by a completely inelastic collision.
A completely inelastic collision is one in which the 2 bodies move with a

common velocity after collision and the total kinetic energy of the system
before and after collision is not conserved.
[2]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Calculate the velocity of the car right after collision, stating any assumption made.
∑pinitial = ∑pfinal
(1500)(29.1) = (1500+2500)(v)
v = 10.9 m s-1
velocity = m s-1 [3]
(iii) The airbag in the sport car is deployed almost immediately after the collision.
Explain how the airbag help to minimize the injuries to the front seat passenger.
The airbag helps to increase the time of impact and by Newton 2nd law,
F = Δp/t, this will greatly reduce the force of impact on the passenger.
[2]
(d) After the accident, the sports car of mass 1500

kg had to be towed by a 2000 kg lorry up a slope
at a constant speed of 5.0 m s-1 as shown in Fig. 5.0 ms-1
6.3. The power P delivered by the lorry is 55 kW.
10o
Fig. 6.3
(i) By considering the sports car and the lorry as a whole system, find the rate of
increase of the gravitational potential energy of the system.
Rate of increase of GPE = mgvy = (3500)(9.81)(5.0sin10o)

= 29 800 J
rate of increase of GPE = J s-1 [2]
(ii) Using the principle of conservation of energy, show that the total resistive force,
fR acting on the whole system (sports car + lorry) is approximately 5000 N.
Power delivered = Rate of increase of GPE + rate of work done against fR

55 000 = 29800 + fR(5.0)
fR = 5000 N
[2]
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10
17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Hence determine the driving force, F acting on the lorry, explaining your answer.
∑F = 0
F - mgsinθ - fR = 0
F = (3500)(9.81)(sin10o)+ 5000 = 11 000 N
driving force = N [2]
7 The diagram below shows visible light waves spreading through a single slit a before
spreading at slits b and c.
S1
Y
S2
screen Image
Error! Not seen
a valid link.
on screen
(a) State the name of this experiment.
Young’s Double Slit experiment
[1]
(b) With reference to the waves spreading from the slits b and c, explain why interference
occurs only where waves from both sources overlap.
Interference is the result of superposition of two wavetrains, thus will
only occur where there are waves from both sources.

[2]
(c) Explain what diffraction is, and describe the part played by diffraction in this experiment.
Diffraction is the spreading of light waves past an opening. Diffraction
from b and c ensures that waves from two sources meet so that
[2]
interference can occur.

18 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) Label one part of the screen view where destructive interference has occurred with the
letter D.
[1]
(e) Explain in detail why constructive interference occurs at N.
Constructive interference occurs because the path difference between
aN and bN is 2λ. The waves will meet in phase, and thus the result of
superposition is reinforcement: the resultant amplitude is the sum of

[2]
the individual amplitudes
(f) State a condition necessary for observable interference, and explain how this
experiment ensures that the condition is met.
Coherence of the sources is necessary for observable interference. Slit
a is used to spread light from the same source to b and c so that they
are coherent sources.
OR The superposing waves must be of the same amplitude. Making slit [2]
(g) The monochromatic light used in this experiment has a wavelength 589 nm. The
distance between S1 and S2 is 0.200 m while the distance between S2 and the screen is
2.5 m. The distance between slits b and c is 0.80 mm.
Calculate the distance between two consecutive bright lines on the screen.
λD (589x10-9 ) (2.5)
x= = -3
= 2.9 x 10-3 m
a (0.8 x 10 )
distance = m [2]
(h) If a piece of plastic is placed in front of slit b, the light waves from b will be caused to
slow down, without any change in frequency. Some of the wave energy will be
absorbed by the plastic as well.
(i) State how the wavelength of the wave from b will change.
The wavelength will be smaller (from v = f λ)
[1]
(ii) State how the amplitude of the wave from b will change.
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10
19 For
Examiner’s
Use
The amplitude will be smaller.

[1]
(iii) Based on your answer in (h)(i), predict whether there will be more or fewer
waveforms in the plastic piece as compared to the number of waveforms in an
equal thickness of air.
There will be more waveforms in the plastic piece.
[1]
(iv) Using your answers in (h)(ii) and (iii), explain how the image on the screen will
change, in terms of position, separation and contrast, when a piece of plastic is
placed in front of slit b.
Because there are more waveforms in the plastic piece than in the
same thickness of air, the centre of the interference pattern (where
there are exactly the same number of waveforms between both the
sources and the centre) would be nearer the side X.
Because the amplitude of one wavetrain is smaller, the amplitude
of constructive interference would be smaller while the amplitude
of destructive interference would be bigger, so the contrast

[5]
between the fringes would be smaller.
The separation of the fringes remains unchanged.

20 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Electromagnetic radiation is incident normally on the surface of a metal. Electrons are
emitted from the surface and these are attracted to a positively charged electrode, as shown
in Fig. 8.
electromagnetic
radiation
electrode
evacuated
enclosure
metal
surface μA
Fig. 8
(a) Name the effect which gives rise to the emission of the electrons.
Photoelectric effect.
(b) State a word equation, base on the principle of conservation of energy, which describes this
effect
Energy of a photon is equal to the sum of the minimum energy required to remove an
electron from the metal surface and the maximum kinetic energy of the electron emitted.
(c) The current recorded on the mircroammeter is 2.1 μA. Calculate the number of electrons
emitted per second from the surface.
I = (N/t) e
(N/t) = 2.1 x 10-6/ 1.60 x 10-19 = 1.31 x 1013 s-1
(d) The incident radiation has wavelength 240 nm. Show that the energy of a photon incident on
the surface is 8.28 x10-19 J.
hf = hc/λ = 6.63 x 10-34 x 3.00 x 108 / 240 x 10-9 = 8.28 x10-19 J
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

21 For
Examiner’s
(e) The intensity of the incident radiation is 8.2 x 103 W m-2. The area of the surface is 2.0 cm2. Use
Calculate
(i) the power of the radiation incident on the surface,
power = I A = 8.2 x 103 x 2.0 x 10-4 = 1.64 W
(ii) the number of photons incident per second on the surface.
(N/t) hf = power
N/t = 1.64 / 8.28 x10-19 = 1.98 x 1018 s-1
(iii) Hence determine the ratio
number of electrons emitted per second

number of photons incident per second
= 1.31 x 1013/ 1.98 x 1018 = 6.62 x 10-6
ratio =…..……………. [1]
(f) Comment on your answer to (e) (iii).
Very few photons successfully emit an electron.
(g) When the wavelength of the radiation is gradually increased to 310 nm, the reading in the
microammeter just drops to zero. Explain this phenomenon and calculate the maximum kinetic
energy of the electrons emitted from the metal surface when the wavelength of the radiation
remains at 240 nm.
The wavelength 310 nm is the threshold wavelength [1], above which the energy of the
photon is not enough to remove an electron to the surface of the metal. [1] Hence no
current is detected.

22 For
Examiner’s
Use
hf = hfo + ½ mvmax2
½ mvmax2 = 8.28 x10-19 - hc/λo

= 8.28 x10-19 - 6.63 x 10-34 x 3.00 x 108 / 310 x 10-9
= 8.28 x10-19 – 6.40 x10-19
= 1.87 x10-19 J
(h) (i) Calculate the momentum of the photon given in (d). [1]
p = h / λ = 6.63 x 10-34 / 240 x 10-9 = 2.76 x 10-27 N s
(ii) If there are altogether 1.5 x 1018 photons striking onto the metal surface per second and are
all absorbed, determine the force exerting on the metal surface. Show your working clearly.
By Newton’s 2nd law, force on photon

N Δp 1.5 x1018 x(0 − 2.76 x10 −27 )
F= = = −4.14 x10 −9 N
Δt 1.0
By Newton’s 3rd law, force on metal surface = 4.14 x10-9 N
NYJC 2010 8866/02/PRELIM/10

PIONEER JUNIOR COLLEGE
PHYSICS 8866/01
Higher 1
1 hour

Write your name, class and index number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided.
There are thirty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there
are four possible answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the
separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong
answer.
[Turn over
2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 10 8 m s–1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10 −19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10 −34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10 −27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11× 10 −31 kg
rest mass of proton, m p = 1.67 × 10 −27 kg
acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s–2
Formulae
1 2
2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = pΔV
Q
electric potential, V =
4πε o r
resistors in series, R = R1 + R 2 + ...
resistors in parallel, 1/ R = 1/ R1 + 1/ R 2 + ...

3
1 Forces of 3 N, 4 N, and 5 N are in equilibrium. What is the angle between the 3 N and
5 N forces?
A 37 o B 53 o C 127 o D 143 o
2 Which estimate is unrealistic?
A The power of a hair dryer is 150 W.
B The kinetic energy of a running man is 2000 J.
C The weight of a can of soft drink is 4 N.
D The density of ice is 900 kg m─3.
3 A radio aerial of length L, when the current is I, emits a signal of wavelength λ and power
P. These quantities are related by
2
2⎛
L⎞
P = kΙ ⎜ ⎟
⎝λ ⎠
where k is a constant.
What unit, if any, should be used for the constant k?
A no unit
B volt
C watt
D ohm
4 An object is projected at an angle to the horizontal in a gravitational field and it follows a

parabolic path, PQRST. These points are positions of the object after successive equal
time intervals, T being the highest height reached.
The displacements PQ, QR, RS and ST
A are equal.
B decrease at a constant rate.
C have equal horizontal components.
D increase at a constant rate.
[Turn over
4
5 A stone slides across an icy surface and travels a distance x in time t while undergoing
uniform deceleration. Which of the following pairs of quantities would give a straight line
graph when plotted to represent the motion of the stone?
1
A x and
t2
1
B x and
t
x
C and t
t
x
D and t
t2
6 An aeroplane, flying in a straight line at a constant height of 500 m with a speed of

200 m s-1, drops an object. The object takes a time t to reach the ground and travels a
horizontal distance d in doing so. Taking g as 10 m s-2 and ignoring air resistance, which
one of the following gives the values of t and d?
t d
A 25 s 10 km
B 25 s 5 km
C 10 s 5 km
D 10 s 2 km
7 What is a suitable unit for the impulse of a force?
A N B Nm C Ns D N s−1
5
8 A small mass moving at a velocity of u1 collides head-on with a large mass moving at a
velocity of u 2 in the opposite direction.
small mass u1 u2 large mass
The collision is elastic.
After the collision, both masses move to the left. The small mass has a velocity of 11
m s−1 and the large mass has a velocity of 1 m s−1 .
Which pair of values of u1 and u 2 is possible?
u1 u2
A 2 m s−1 12 m s−1
B 4 m s−1 6 m s−1
C 9 m s−1 3 m s−1
D 11 m s−1 1 m s−1
9 A mass accelerates uniformly when the resultant force acting on it
A is zero.
B is constant but not zero.
C increases uniformly with respect to time.
D is proportional to the rate of change of momentum of the mass.
[Turn over
6
10 The tension in a spring of natural length lo is first increased from zero to T1 , causing the
length to increase to l1 . The tension is then reduced to T2 , causing length to decrease to
l2 as shown in the diagram.
tension
R U M
T1
T2 S V N
L Q P length
0 lo l2 l1
Which area of the graph represents the work done by the spring during this reduction in
length?
A MLP B MNQP C MNSR D MPLU
11 A proton is projected horizontally into the vertical electric field in the space between two
horizontal charged plates. The proton follows a curved path as shown.
electric field
proton path
There are changes to the proton’s electric potential energy and to its gravitational
potential energy.
Which row correctly identifies these changes?
electric gravitational
potential energy potential energy
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
7
12 A uniform ladder of weight 100 N rests against a smooth wall at X and a rough ground at
Z. N is the normal contact force of the wall at X and R is the total force at the ground at Z.
The height XY is 8.0 m and length ZY is 6.0 m.
X
N
R 8.0 m
100 N
Z Y
6.0 m
What is the value of R?
A 37.5 N B 50.0 N C 107 N D 154 N
13 An object of mass m passes a point X with a velocity v and slides up a frictionless incline
to stop at a point Y which is at a height h above X.
v
h
1 1
A second object of mass m passes X with a velocity of v . To what height will it rise?
2 2
1
A h
4
1
B h
2
1
C h
2
D h
[Turn over
8
14 A spring stretches 0.015 m when a force of 10 N acts on it. Calculate the elastic potential
energy stored in the spring when a force of 0.40 N is exerted on the spring.
(Assume that the spring obeys Hooke’s Law.)
A 0.9 x 10-4 J
B 1.2 x 10-4 J
C 2.0 x 10-4 J
D 2.2 x 10-4 J
15 The graph below shows how the potential energy, U varies with displacement, x for a
body in a uniform field. What is the force experienced by the body in this field?
U / 10–4 J
9.0
x/m
0 0.060
A 6.0 × 10–6 N
B 1.5 × 10–2 N
C 3.0 × 103 N
D 6.0 × 108 N
16 A plane wave of amplitude A is incident on a surface area S placed so that it is

perpendicular to the direction of travel of the wave. The energy per unit time intercepted
by the surface is E.
The amplitude of the wave is reduced to A/2 and the area of the surface is increased to
2S.
How much energy per unit time is intercepted by this surface?
A 4E
B E
C 2E
D E/2
9
17 The length l of an air column is slowly increased from zero while a note of constant
frequency is produced by a tuning fork placed in front of it.
Air Column
piston Tuning
l Fork
When l reaches 20 cm the sound increases greatly in volume. What is the wavelength of
the sound wave produced by the tuning fork?
A 20 cm
B 40 cm
C 80 cm
D 100 cm
18 Sound waves can be detected behind an obstacle rather than light waves because
A sound is a pressure wave whereas light is an electromagnetic wave.
B sound travels much more slowly than light.
C sound waves are longitudinal whereas light waves are transverse.
D sound waves have a much longer wavelength than light waves.
19 Light of wavelength 630 nm falls on a pair of slits, forming fringes 3.00 mm apart on a
screen. What would the fringe spacing become if the wavelength were 420 nm?
A 2.00 mm B 3.00 mm C 3.75 mm D 4.50 mm
20 The resistance of a piece of pure silicon falls rapidly as the temperature rises because
A the ratio of positive to negative charge carriers increases.
B the ratio of positive to negative charge carriers decreases.
C the total number of charge carriers increases with temperature.
D the charge carriers can move more easily at higher temperatures.
[Turn over
10
21 The resistance of a certain circuit element is directly proportional to the current passing
through it. When the current is 1.0 A the power dissipated in the element is 6.0 W. What
is the power dissipated when the current is raised to 2.0 A?
A 12 W
B 24 W
C 48 W
D 72 W
22 Three identical cells each having an e.m.f. of 1.5 V and internal resistance of 2.0 Ω are
connected in series with a 4.0 Ω resistor R, firstly as in circuit (i), and secondly as in
circuit (ii).
R R
Circuit (i) Circuit (ii)
What is the ratio power in R in circuit (i) ?

power in R in circuit (ii)
A 3.0
B 5.4
C 7.2
D 9.0
11
23 In the diagram below, the variable resistor R can be adjusted over its full range from zero
to 107 Ω.
0 to 107 Ω
10 Ω
R
P Q
104 Ω
What are the approximate limits for the resistance between P and Q?
A 10 Ω and 104 Ω
B 10 Ω and 107 Ω
C 10 Ω and 1011 Ω
D 104 Ω and 107 Ω
24 Three resistors are connected as shown below. The points X and Y are connected to a
source of direct current.
R2 I2
X R1
Y
I1 R3
I3
I1
The ratio is
I3
R3 + R1
A .
R1
R2 + R1
B .
R1
R2R3
C .
R1(R2 + R3 )
D independent of R1 .
[Turn over
12
25 A cell of e.m.f. 2.0 V and negligible internal resistance is connected to the network of
resistors shown.
5.0 kΩ 2.0 kΩ
2.0 V
P Q
5.0 kΩ 3.0 kΩ
V1 is the potential difference between S and P. V2 is the potential difference between S

and Q. What is the value of V1 − V2?
A +0.50 V
B +0.20 V
C −0.20 V
D −0.50 V
26 A small coil lies in a large coil coaxially. Both coils are horizontal and carry the
same amount of current flowing in a clockwise direction as shown below.
Which of the following statements is true as applied to the outer coil?
A The outer coil will be stretched outwards.
B The outer coil will be compressed inwards.
C The outer coil experiences a torque about the horizontal axis.
D The outer coil experiences a downward force along the plane of the coil.
13
27 The diagram below shows a solenoid carrying a current.

X
axis
In what direction should a straight conductor be placed within solenoid such that the
magnetic force acting on it is out of the plane of the paper?
A in the XY direction, current flowing from X to Y
B in the XY direction, current flowing from Y to X
C along the axis, current flowing from left to right
D along the axis, current flowing from right to left
28 A straight conductor rests in the space between two arms of a ferromagnetic core
(presently unmagnetized). After the switch has been closed for a while, in what direction
is the magnetic force acting on the conductor?
C
A D
[Turn over
14
29 The figure below shows the first four energy levels of an electron in a certain atom.
E4
E3
E2
E1
The transition from E3 to E1 produces a green line. Which transition could give rise to a
blue line?
A E2 to E1
B E3 to E2
C E4 to E1
D E4 to E2
30 When a metal is irradiated with monochromatic radiation, electrons are emitted. Which of
the following will increase if the frequency of the radiation is increased?
A The threshold frequency of the metal.
B The rate of emission of electrons.
C The stopping potential of the electrons.
D The maximum speed of the photons.
End of paper
1
Name Class Index Number
PIONEER JUNIOR COLLEGE

PHYSICS 8866/02
Higher 1
Paper 2 Structured questions

16 September 2010
2 hours
No additional materials are required.
Write your name, class and index number on all the work you hand in.
Section A
Answer all questions. For Examiner’s Use
Section B
Answer any two questions. Section A
1
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work
securely together. The number of marks is given in 2
brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
3
4
5
6
Section B
7
8
9
Total
[Turn over
2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 10 8 m s–1
permeability of free space, μ 0 = 4π × 10 −7 H m–1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10 −19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10 −34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10 −27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11× 10 −31 kg
rest mass of proton, m p = 1.67 × 10 −27 kg
the Avogadro constant, N A = 6.02 × 10 23 mol–1
gravitational constant, G = 6.67 × 10 −11 N m2 kg–2
Formulae
1 2
2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
resistors in series, R = R1 + R 2 + ...
resistors in parallel, 1/ R = 1/ R1 + 1/ R 2 + ...

3
Section A
1 When a solid is heated, the energy required is given by the expression
gain in energy = mass × c × temperature rise,
where c is a constant.
(a) Name the quantities in the expression that are SI base quantities.
.......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Express, in terms of SI base units, the units of
(i) energy,
units of energy = ........................................ [2]
(ii) the constant c.
units of c = ........................................ [2]
[Turn over
4
2 (a) Explain the meaning of the term wavelength and frequency in a progressive wave.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State two differences between a progressive wave and a stationary wave.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The power of a household torchlight is 8.0 W. Assuming that the light is a point
source, calculate the intensity of the light at a distance of 1.5 m away from the torch.
intensity = ........................................ W m-2 [1]

5
3 (a) Define magnetic flux density.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig 3.1 shows the simplest motor in the world called the homopolar motor, which was
first invented by Michael Faraday. The disc is a conducting magnet, pivoted at its
centre. The disc rotates when a current is passed through it.
Conducting
Magnetic disc
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the direction of the magnetic force on the disc.
direction = ........................................ [1]
(ii) Suggest two methods in which the disc can be made to move faster.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... [2]
[Turn over
6
4 Fig 4.1 shows the momentum against time graphs for two colliding lorries A and B.
30
momentum/ B
103 kg m s–1
20
A
10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time/ s
Fig. 4.1
The masses of lorries A and B are 2000 kg and 4000 kg respectively.
(a) Explain why the gradients of the graphs during the collision have opposite signs.
.......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the force acting on lorry B during the collision.
force = ........................................ N [2]
(c) Calculate the change in the kinetic energy of the system and hence deduce the type
of collision.
change in kinetic energy = ........................................ J [3]
type of collision: ……………..................................................................................... [1]

7
BLANK PAGE
[Turn over
8
5 A microwave transmitter emits waves which are reflected from a metal plate, as shown in
Fig. 5.1. A receiving aerial is placed between XY to detect the stationary waves formed.
metal plate
X Y
transmitter
receiving aerial
45 cm
Fig. 5.1
(a) Explain how the stationary waves are formed.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The receiving aerial is moved from one node at X through 6 antinodes to another
node at Y, a distance of 45 cm.
(i) Sketch the stationary wave pattern formed between X and Y.
X Y
[1]
(ii) On your diagram in (b)(i), label two points P and Q which are in phase with each
other, where the amplitude at P is larger than that at Q. [1]
(iii) On the same diagram, label a point R which is in antiphase with point Q, and has
the same amplitude as that at Q. [1]
9
(iv) Determine the frequency of the waves.
frequency = ........................................ Hz [2]
(v) The receiving aerial moves along XY with a speed of 5.0 cm s−1. Calculate the
rate at which nodes in this standing wave are passed by the moving receiver.
rate = ........................................ s−1 [2]
[Turn over
10
6 The wavelength λ of a series of lines in an emission spectrum of lithium are listed in

Table 6.1.
n λ / nm 1 1
/ m −1
(n − 0.041) 2
λ
2 670.8
3 323.3
4 274.2
5 256.2
6 247.6
Table 6.1
According to theory, the wavelengths are given by the equation:
1 ⎡ 1 1 ⎤
= R⎢ − 2 ⎥
,
⎢⎣ (1 + s ) (n − 0.041) ⎥⎦
2
λ
where n = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 … … as shown in Table. 6.1.
R is 1.097 x 107 m-1, and s is a constant.
(a) Complete the last two columns in Table. 6.1. [2]
(b) Rearrange the equation so that it may be used to plot a straight line graph to find the
constant s. Write down expressions for the gradient and y-intercept of the straight
line graph.
gradient = ........................................ [1]
y-intercept = ........................................ [1]

11
(c) Plot a straight graph on Fig. 6.2 using the values from Table 6.1.
Fig. 6.2
[1]
(d)(i) Calculate the gradient of the graph in Fig. 6.2.
gradient = ........................................ [1]
(ii) Discuss how well the experimental results in Table 6.1 fit the theory.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... [2]
[Turn over
12
Section B
7. (a) A car accelerates uniformly from rest along a straight line.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, sketch a graph showing how the displacement of the body varies
with time. [1]
Displacement
Time
Fig. 7.1
(ii) Explain how the instantaneous velocity of the car is obtained from a graph of
displacement against time.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The average power delivered by the engine of the car of mass 1200 kg is 90 kW.
Calculate the time in which the car could accelerate from rest to 30 m s-1.
time = ........................................ s [2]

13
(b) When the car is travelling at 30 m s-1, the car driver drops a ball from the car window,
1.0 m vertically from the ground.
Assuming no air resistance, calculate
(i) the time taken for the ball to reach the ground,
time taken = ........................................ s [2]
(ii) the horizontal distance travelled by the ball before it hits ground.
horizontal distance = ........................................ m [2]
(iii) the vertical component of velocity at the instant the ball hits the ground.
vertical component of velocity = ........................................ m [2]
[Turn over
14
(iv) On Fig 7.2 and Fig 7.3 sketch graphs to show how the vertical component (vy)
and horizontal component (vx) the ball’s velocity vary with time t until it reaches
the ground. [2]
vy vx
0 t 0 t
Fig. 7.2 Fig. 7.3
(v) Explain how your answer to (b)(i) would change, if the driver throw the ball
horizontally from the car window, instead of dropping it.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 7.4 shows a person doing a bungee jump.
Fig. 7.4
15
The bungee rope has negligible mass and it is assumed to obey Hooke’s law. The
bungee rope is secured to the feet of the person. The person leans over a bridge and
drops vertically downwards. You may assume that air resistance is negligible.
(i) Describe the energy changes taking place from the instant the person leaves the
bridge until the bungee rope is fully extended.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why it would be extremely dangerous to have a bungee rope that is much
stiffer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... [2]
[Turn over
16
8 (a) Electromotive force (e.m.f.) and potential difference (p.d.) may both have the volt as
a unit.
(i) Define the volt.
...................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) By reference to energy transfers, distinguish between e.m.f. and p.d.
e.m.f. .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
p.d. .........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) A cell of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r is connected in series with a resistor R, as
shown in Fig. 8.1. A current I passes through R. An ideal voltmeter connected across
R shows a reading V.
E
r
Fig. 8.1
(i) Using answers from (a)(ii), show that V is given by
V = E − Ir
[2]
17
(ii) Hence sketch a graph showing how the potential difference across R varies with
the current I passing through R.
I [1]
(iii) State the condition when the voltmeter reading is equal to E.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) A cell of e.m.f. 1.5 V and internal resistance 0.25 Ω is connected in series with a
resistor R, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
1.5 V
0.25 Ω
0.24 A
R
Fig. 8.2
The resistor R is made of metal wire.

A current of 0.24 A passes through R for a time of 5.0 minutes. An ideal voltmeter is
connected across R.
(i) Calculate
1. the total energy transferred by the cell,
energy = ........................................ J [2]
2. the resistance of R,
resistance = ........................................ Ω [2]
[Turn over
18
3. the energy transferred in the resistor R.
energy = ........................................ J [2]
(ii) If the voltmeter is non-ideal, state and explain the change to the voltmeter
reading.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(d) A cell of e.m.f. 3.0 V and negligible resistance is connected in series with a fixed
resistor of resistance 2000 Ω and a thermistor, as shown in Fig. 8.3.
3.0 V
2000 Ω
Fig.8.3
The thermistor has resistance 4000 Ω at 0 °C and 1800 Ω at 20 °C.
(i) Determine the potential difference across the thermistor
1. at 0 °C,
potential difference = ........................................ V [1]
2. at 20 °C,
potential difference = ........................................ V [1]

19
(ii) In one particular application of the circuit of Fig. 8.3, it is desired that the
potential difference across the fixed resistor should range from 1.2 V at 0 °C to
2.4 V at 20 °C.
Determine whether, by substituting a different fixed resistor in the circuit of

Fig. 8.3, it is possible to achieve this range of potential differences.
[3]
[Turn over
20
9 (a) State what is meant by photoelectric effect.
.......................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A hydrogen lamp emits light of frequency 5.8 x 1014 Hz at a rate of 0.50 W and the
light falls on the cathode of a photocell as shown in Fig. 9.1. The ammeter reads a
current of 4.0 μA and the work function of the metal is 3.0 x 10-19 J. You may assume
this current is due to all photoelectrons emitted from the photoelectric effect.
light
E C
A
Fig. 9.1
(i) Calculate
1. the energy of the photon.
energy = ..................................... J [2]
2. the number of photons leaving the source per second.
photons leaving source per second = ..................................... s-1 [2]

21
3. the percentage of photons falling on the surface that produces photoelectrons.
percentage of photons = ..................................... % [3]
4. the de Broglie wavelength of the most energetic photoelectrons emitted.
wavelength = ..................................... m [3]
(ii) The intensity of the photons falling on the cathode of a photocell is doubled. State
and explain what will be observed on the ammeter that records the photocurrent
in the external circuit.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... [2]
[Turn over
22
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a simplified representation of the 5 lowest energy levels of the
outermost electron in an atom.
E / eV
-0.54 n=5
-0.85 n=4
-1.5 n=3
-3.4 n=2
-13.6 n=1
Fig. 9.2
(i) State and explain which possible transitions you would expect to observe if the
atom is bombarded with
1. an electron of energy 12.3 eV.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... [2]
2. a photon of energy 12.3 eV.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... [2]
23
(ii) Calculate the wavelengths of the light emitted due to the transitions in (c)(i).
wavelengths = ............................................................................................... [3]
End of Paper
Answers to JC2 Preliminary Examination Paper 1 (H1 Physics)
1 C 9 B 17 C 25 C
2 A 10 B 18 D 26 B
3 D 11 A 19 A 27 A
4 C 12 C 20 C 28 D
5 C 13 A 21 C 29 C
6 D 14 B 22 D 30 C
7 C 15 B 23 A
8 B 16 D 24 D
5N 4N 5N
θ
α
3N 3N
sin α = 4/5, α = 53.13o

But angle between 3 N and 5 N forces = θ = 180o – 53.13o = 126.86o
Answer: C
2 Hair dryer: uses voltage of 240 V, if power is 150 W, current is 0.625 A (low current,
heating coils do not heat up properly)
Running man: assuming average mass of 70 kg and a speed of 8 ms–1 (fastest man on
earth runs 100 m in 9.69 s), gives a KE of 2240 J.
Vol. of a canned drink ~ 330 ml ~ 400 g in mass (include mass of can and additives
other than water)
Weight = 0.400 x 9.81 ~ 3.9 N
Ice is less dense than water (density = 1000 kg m–3)
Answer: A
3 from equation,
2
⎛L⎞
P = kΙ 2 ⎜ ⎟
⎝λ⎠
Pλ 2
k= 2 2
Ι L
W m2 W
Units of k = =
A 2m 2 A 2
V
Using P = Ι V , units of k = =Ω
A
2
. Answer: D
4. Horizontal component of velocity remains constant in the parabolic motion.

Hence, the horizontal displacement is the same.
Ans: C
5.
1 2
x = ut + at
2
x 1
= u + at
t 2
x
A plot of against t will yield a straight line graph.
t
Ans: C
6. Consider y-direction,
1
s y = ut + at 2
2
1
s y = gt 2
2
1
500 = (10)t 2
2
t = 10s
Consider x-direction,
s x = u x t = 200(10 ) = 2km
Ans: D
7 Impulse of a force = Ft
Units of impulse = N s
Answer: C
8 small mass u1 u2 large mass
11 m s−1 1 m s−1
Taking to the left as positive,

v 2 − v1 = 1 − 11 = −10 m s−1
Since
u1 − u2 = v 2 − v1
(note: vector equation)
u1 − u2 = −10 m s−1
Option A: u1 − u2 = −2 − 12 = −14 m s−1

3
Option B: u1 − u2 = −4 − 6 = −10 m s−1 (correct)

Option C: u1 − u2 = −9 − 3 = −12 m s−1
Option D: u1 − u2 = −11 − 1 = −12 m s−1
Answer: B
9 An object accelerates uniformly = constant acceleration Î constant resultant force

applied on mass.
Option D: Newton’s second law of motion.
Answer: B
10 Work done by spring during reduction = area under the T-x graph from l1 to l2 .
Answer: B
11 Upon entering the field, the proton experiences an electric force downwards. As it
accelerates downwards, its velocity increases, resulting in a gain in kinetic energy and a
corresponding loss in electric potential energy. In addition, the proton experiences a
decrease in height, and hence its gravitational potential energy decreases.
Answer: A
12 Taking moments about Z,

total clockwise moment = total anti-clockwise moment
100 × 3 = N × 8
N = 37.5 N
Since the ladder is in equilibrium and all the forces formed a closed polygon (right-angle
triangle), we have
R 2 = N 2 + 100 2
R ≈ 107 N
. Answer: C
13 By conservation of energy,
½ mv2 = mgh
v2
h=
2g
h ∝v2
The height is independent of mass.

1 1
Since the speed is v , the height will be of the original height.
2 4
Answer: A
4
14 By Hooke’s law,
F 10
k= = N m−1
x 0.015
F 0.015
x= = 0.4 ×
When F = 0.40 N, the new extension k 10 m
The elastic potential energy = ½ kx2
2
1 ⎛ 10 ⎞⎛ 0.015 ⎞
⎜ ⎟⎜ 0.4 × ⎟
= 2 ⎝ 0.015 ⎠⎝ 10 ⎠
= 1.2 x 10-4 J
Answer: B
15
ΔU 0.0009
F= = = 0.015 N
Δr 0.06
Answer: B
16
Power
Intensity =
Surface Area
power
Therefore, Intensity = α(Amplitud e) 2
surface area
A2 E/S
= '
A
( ) 2
E /2S
2
2E E
E' = =
4 2
Answer: D
17
λ
= 20 cm (open and close end air column)
4
Fundamenta l mode of vibration
λ = 80 cm
Answer: C
18 Waves tend to bend round an obstacle more if its wavelength is longer than the size of
the obstacle. For the same corner, sound waves which have a longer wavelength tend to
bend more than light waves which have a shorter wavelength. Hence, we cannot ‘see
round corners’ but can ‘hear round corners’.
Answer: D
λD D
19 Since x = , we have x ∝ λ with kept constant.
a a
5
x1 λ1
=
x 2 λ2
3.00 630
=
x2 420
x 2 = 2.00 mm
Answer: A
20 Answer: C
21 P = I 2R = I 2 (kI ) = kI 3
6.0 = k (1)3
P = k (2)3
P = 48 W
Answer: C
22 For circuit (i)

2
⎛ 4.5 ⎞
P =I R =⎜
2
⎟ 4 = 0.81 W
⎝ 10 ⎠
For circuit (ii)
2
⎛ 1.5 ⎞
P =I R =⎜
2
⎟ 4 = 0.09 W
⎝ 10 ⎠
Therefore, ratio = 9.0
Answer: D
10(104 )
23 If R = 0, effective resistance = ≈ 10Ω
10 + 104
107 (10 4 )
If R = 107 Ω, effective resistance ≈ ≈ 10 4 Ω
107 + 104
Answer: A
R3
24 I1 = I2 + I3 = I 3 + I3
R2
I1 R3 + R2
=
I3 R2
I
Therefore 1 is Independent of R1
I3
Answer: D
5.0
25 V1 = 2.0 = 1.0 V
5.0 + 5.0
6
3.0
V2 = 2.0 = 1.2 V
3.0 + 2.0
V1 − V2 = −0.20 V
Answer: C
26 Current in the same direction attracts, therefore both coils attract each other.
Answer: B
27 By right hand grip rule to first find the field in solenoid pointing towards the right.
Then by fleming left hand rule to find position as well as direction of current.
Answer: A
28 By fleming left hand rule. Tracing the way current flows in the DC circuit, the direction of
the magnetic field is known.
Answer: D
29 Blue has more energy than green => transit from greater energy level
Answer: C
30 Increasing the frequency of radiation

=> Increase in the energy of photons
=> Increase the maximum KE of photoelectrons
=> A larger stopping potential is required to stop the more energetic photoelectrons
Answer: C
1
Answers to JC2 Preliminary Examinations Paper 2 (H1 Physics)
No. Solution Remarks

1(a) Mass and temperature [1] each
1(b)(i) Units for energy = J [1] for correct
WD = Force × displacement definition of
J = N×m quantity
[1] final answer
= kg m2 s−2
1(b)(ii) gain in energy [[1] for correct
c= definition of
mass × temperatur e rise
quantity
kg m 2 s −2 [1] final answer
units of c = = m 2 s −2 K −1
kg K
2(a) Wavelength is the distance between successive [2] 2 marks for
crests/compressions, or the distance between successive meaning of
troughs/rarefactions, or the distance between any two wavelength and
successive points on the wave that are in phase. frequnecy
Frequency is the number of oscillations that pass through a
given point per unit time. Frequency is the reciprocal of the
1
f =
T
(b)(i) Stationary waves : Energy is not propagated [1]

Transverse waves: Energy is propagated.
Stationary waves: particles in a stationary wave have [1]

varying amplitude between 2 nodes.
Transverse wave: particles: Particles have fixed amplitude.
(b)(ii) power 8 [1]
intensity = =
area 4π r 2
Intensity = 0.283 W m-2

3(a) Magnetic flux density is defined as the force acting on a [2]
conductor of unit length carrying unit current placed
perpendicular to the magnetic field.
3(b)(i) Force is directed into the paper. [1]
3(b)(ii) Increase the strength of the magnet or increase magnitude [2]

of current.
4(a) The gradient of the momentum-time graph represents the [1] for correct
resultant force that acts on the object. The gradients for A explanation using
and B are of opposite signs and they are in opposite N3L
directions (but of the same magnitude) according to
Newton’s third law.
2
4(b) dp
F= = gradient of graph of B
dt
(28 − 22) × 103
= [1] substitution to
1.5 find gradient
= 2666.67 N
≈ 2700 N [1] final answer
4(c) 1 p2
KE = mv 2 =
2 2m
Total final kinetic energy
p 2 p 2
= A + B
2mA 2mB
120002 280002
= +
2(2000) 2(4000)
[1] for final KE
= 134 kJ
Total initial kinetic energy

p 2 p 2
= A + B
2mA 2mB
180002 220002
= +
2(2000) 2(4000)
[1] for initial KE
= 141500J = 141.5 kJ
Change in KE of the lorries

= KE f − KEi
= 134000 − 141500 [1] for change in
= −7500 J KE (with -ve sign)
[1] for correct type

Type of collision: inelastic as final KE is less than initial KE
of collision
(KE is not conserved)
No. Solutions Remarks

5(a) Stationary waves are formed when the incident waves from [2] for stating
the transmitter interfere with the reflected waves, where both waves moving in
progressive waves are of equal amplitude, frequency and opposite direction,
moving with the same speed. of equal
amplitude,
frequency, and
speed interfering
to form the
stationary wave,
with reference to
the question
3
5(b)(i) [1] for correct

diagram
5(b)(ii) [no mark if dotted
lines are not
5(b)(iii) X Y drawn, or that
P Q R shape is uneven]
[1] for correct
labelling of P and
Q
[1] for correct
labelling of R
5(b)(iv) 3λ = 45 [1] for correct

λ = 15 cm wavelength
Since v = fλ ,
3.0 × 10 8 = f × 15 × 10 −2 [1] for correct
substitution and
f = 2.0 × 10 9 Hz answer
5(b)(v) 1
The distance between consecutive nodes is λ . Hence, the
2
rate at which nodes are detected is
v
f = detector , [1] for correct
1
λ expression and
2 substitution
5.0
f =
7.5 [1] for correct
f ≈ 0.67 s−1 answer
6(a) [2]
n λ / nm 1 1
/ m −1
(n − 0.041) 2
λ
670.8 0.261 1.491 x 106

2
323.3 0.114 3.093 x 106
3
274.2 0.0638 3.647 x 106
4
256.2 0.0407 3.903 x 106
5
247.6 0.0282 4.039 x 106
6
6(b) 1 1 R
= −R +
λ (n − 0.041) (1 + s)2
2
Gradient of graph = -R
R
y-intercept of graph =
(1 + s)2
4
6(c) [1]
4.5
3.5
2.5
1.5
0.5
0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3
6(d) The experimental data forms a straight-line graph.

Gradient of graph = -1.10 x 107. Hence R = 1.10 x 107 m-1. [1]
This agrees well with the theoretical value R = 1.097 x 107 m-1
7(a)(i) [1]
Displacement
Time
7(a)(ii) The instantaneous velocity can be obtained from the gradient of

the graph since velocity is defined as the rate of change of
displacement.
5
7(a)(iii) 1 [1]
mv 2 = Pt
2
1
(1200 )(30) 2
t= 2 = 6.00s [1]
90 x10 3
7(b)(i) Consider vertical direction,
1
s = ut + at 2
2
[1]
1 2
s = gt
2
2s 2(1) [1]
t= = = 0.452s
g 9.81
7(b)(ii) Sx = u t [1]
= (30) (0.45152) = 13.5 m [1]
7(b)(iii) vy=at
= (9.81)(0.4515) [1]
= 4.43 m s-1 [1]
7(b)(iv) vy/ ms-1 [1]

Correct sharp
of graphs.
4.43
[1]
Correct values
at axes.
0 t/s
0.452
vx/ ms-1
30
0 t/s
0.452
6
7(b)(v) The answer to b(i) will remain unchanged. The ball has the same [1]
initial vertical velocity (0 ms-1) and the vertical acceleration
experienced is the same as well.
7(c)(i) When the person is on the bridge, he possesses maximum [1]

gravitational potential energy. Once he falls off the bridge, he
loses gravitational potential energy and gains kinetic energy.
When the rope is stretched longer than the original length of the
rope, there is elastic potential energy in the rope. The loss in [1]
gravitational potential energy and loss in kinetic energy at this
stage is converted to a gain elastic potential energy. When the
rope is fully stretched, the elastic potential energy is at its
maximum, the kinetic energy is zero and the gravitational [1]
potential energy is the minimum.
7(c)(iii) When the rope is much stiffer, the spring constant is larger. Since
Tension in rope = spring constant x extension of rope, a large [1]
tension is exerted on the person by the rope when the rope
stretches. This causes a large deceleration on the person and
may cause injuries. [1]
The time taken for change in momentum is shorter; therefore
there is larger resultant force.
8(a)(i) One volt (V) is the potential difference between two points in [1]
a circuit in which 1 joule of energy is converted when one
coulomb passes from one point to the other.
8(a)(ii) The e.m.f. of a cell (and that of other sources of electrical [1]
energy) can be defined as the energy converted into
electrical energy from other forms (e.g. chemical,
mechanical) when unit charge passes through the cell.
OR
The e.m.f. of a cell is defined as the energy transferred by a
cell in driving unit charge round a complete circuit.
The p.d. between two points in a circuit or across a [1]

conductor is defined as the energy converted from electrical
energy to other forms of energy when unit charge passes
from one point to the other.
8(b)(i) W
e.m.f. of cell, E =
Q
W' [1] for showing
potential difference across resistor R, V ' =
Q equations of the
W '' W
potential difference across internal resistor r, V '' = form V =
Q Q
By conservation of energy,
energy supplied by cell
= energy dissipated by R + energy dissipated by r [1] for forming
equation showing
W = W '+ W '' conservation of
7
EQ = V ' Q + V '' Q energy

E = V '+ V ''
E = IR + Ir
E = V + Ir
V = E − Ir
8(b)(ii) [1] for correct

V graph shape and y-
intercept E
8(b)(iii) If the circuit is open, voltmeter reading is equal to E. [1] for correct
OR condition
If the cell has no internal resistance, voltmeter reading is
equal to E.
8(c)(i)1 Total energy transferred by cell = EQ = 1.5(0.24)(5)(60) [1] for correct

= 108 J substitution
[1] for correct
answer
8(c)(i)2 E = I (R + r) [1] for correct
1.5 = 0.24 (R + 0.25) substitution
R = 6.0 Ω [1] for correct
answer
8(c)(i)3 Energy transferred in resistor R = I2Rt [1] for correct

= 0.242 (6.0)(5)(60) substitution
= 104 J [1] for correct
answer
8(c)(ii) Voltmeter reading will be lesser. [1]
The effective resistance across R and the voltmeter is

lesser. The p.d. across them is therefore lesser. [1]
8(d)(i)1 ⎛ 4000 ⎞ [1]

⎜ 2000 + 4000 ⎟ 3.0 = 2.0 V
⎝ ⎠
8(d)(i)2 ⎛ 1800 ⎞ [1]

⎜ 2000 + 1800 ⎟ 3.0 = 1.42 V
⎝ ⎠
8(d)(ii) ⎛ R ⎞ [1] for R at 0 °C

⎜ R + 4000 ⎟ 3.0 = 1.2
⎝ ⎠
R = 2670 Ω
8
⎛ R ⎞
⎜ R + 1800 ⎟ 3.0 = 2.4 [1] for R at 20 °C
⎝ ⎠
R = 7200 Ω
Therefore, there is no single value of R that satisfies both [1] for conclusion
conditions.
9(a) Photoelectric effect is the emission of electrons from a metal [1]

surface when it is exposed to electromagnetic radiation of
sufficiently high frequency.
(b)(i)1 E = hf [1] for correct
= (6.63 x 10-34)(5.8 x 1014) substitution
= 3.8454 x 10-19 J
= 3.8 x 10-19 J [1] for correct
answer
2 ⎛n⎞
P =⎜ ⎟ E
⎝ t ⎠p
⎛n⎞ 0.50 [1] for correct
⎜ ⎟ =
⎝ t ⎠ p 3.8454 × 10
−19 substitution
⎛n⎞ 18 −1 [1] for correct
⎜ ⎟ = 1.3 × 10 s
⎝ t ⎠p answer
3 ⎛n⎞
(
⎜ ⎟ 1.6 × 10
−19
)= 4.0 × 10 −6 [1]
⎝ t ⎠e
⎛n⎞ 13
⎜ ⎟ = 2.5 × 10
⎝ t ⎠e
⎛n⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎝ t ⎠e [1]
percentage = × 100%
⎛n⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎝ t ⎠p
2.5 × 10 13
= × 100%
1.3 × 10 18
= 1.92 x 10-3 % [1]
4 hf = φ + KE max
[1]
KE max = 3.8454 × 10 −19 − 3.0 × 10 −19
KE max = 0.8454 × 10 −19
1
mv 2 = 0.8454 × 10 −19
2
(mv )2 = 0.8454 × 10 −19
2m
( )(
p = 2 9.11× 10 −31 0.8454 × 10 −19 ) [1]
9
h
λ=
p
6.63 × 10 34
λ=
( )(
2 9.11× 10 −31 0.8454 × 10 −19 )
[1]
λ = 1.69 × 10 −9 m
(ii) The ammeter reading will be doubled. [1]

When the intensity of the photons falling on the cathode of a
photocell is doubled, this doubles the rate of photoelectrons
emitted and as a result, the photocurrent is doubled. [1]
(c)(i)1 Electron in atom absorbs 10.2 eV of energy and transits

from n = 1 to n = 2 state or absorbs 12.1 eV of energy and
transits from n = 1 to n = 3 state. These will lead to line
spectra produced due to transitions from n = 3 to n = 1, n = [1] for correct
2 to n = 1 and n = 3 to n = 2. transitions
This is because electron can lose any amount of its kinetic [1] reason
energy to the atom.
2 No transition will be observed. [1]
When a photon hits an atom, the photon can only be [1] reason
absorbed in full (or not at all). As such, it can only be
absorbed if its energy is equal to the difference in energy
levels. 12.3 eV does not correspond to the difference of any
2 particular energy levels in the atom.
(ii) n = 3 to n = 1 [1] for each correct
λ1 =
( )(
6.63 × 10 −34 3 × 108 )
= 1.03 × 10 − 7 m
wavelength
(
(13.6 − 1.5) 1.6 × 10 −19 ) calculated
n = 2 to n = 1
λ1 =
( )(
6.63 × 10 −34 3 × 108 )
= 1.22 × 10 − 7 m
(
(13.6 − 3.4) 1.6 × 10 −19
)
n = 3 to n = 2
λ1 =
( )(
6.63 × 10 −34 3 × 108 )
= 6.54 × 10 − 7 m
(
(3.4 − 1.5) 1.6 × 10 −19 )
RAFFLES INSTITUTION
2010 Preliminary Examination
PHYSICS 8866 / 01
Higher 1
24 September 2010
1 hour
Additional Materials: OMR form
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
Fill in your particulars on the OMR form.
There are thirty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there
are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and
record your choice in soft pencil on the OMR form.
Read the instructions on the OMR form very carefully.
answer.
This booklet consists of 14 printed pages including the cover page.

2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 x 108 m s−1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 x 10−19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 x 10−34 J s
unified atomic mass constant u = 1.66 x 10−27 kg
rest mass of electron me = 9.11 x 10−31 kg
rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 x 10−27 kg
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + 21 at 2
v2 = u 2 + 2as

3
1 The coefficient of viscosity, η , for a fluid is given by:
FL
η=
Av
where F is the external force on the fluid, v is the relative motion of the fluid layers, L and A
are the width and area of the fluid layer respectively. The base units for η are
A N s-1 m-2 C kg m s-1

B N s m-2 D kg m-1 s-1
2 Estimate the number of atoms in 1 cm3 of a solid.
A 1010 C 1030
B 1024 D 1040
L
3 The period of a simple pendulum is given by T = 2π . The length of the pendulum L is
g
measured to be (20.0 ± 0.1) cm , and the time recorded for 20 complete oscillations
is (17.9 ± 0.2) s . What is the fractional uncertainty in the calculated value for the acceleration
of free fall g?
A 0.0162 C 0.159
B 0.0273 D 0.270
4 At time t = 0 s, a ball was released from rest above a floor. In the velocity-time graph shown
below, at which time does the ball reach its maximum height after bouncing from the floor?
velocity v
B
0 time t
A C D
4
5 Consider a falling raindrop undergoing constant deceleration. Which pair of quantities would
yield a straight line graph when plotted to represent the motion of the raindrop?
A Velocity of the raindrop and its displacement.

B Displacement of the raindrop and its time in motion.
C Kinetic energy of the raindrop and its displacement.
D Kinetic energy of the raindrop and its time in motion.
6 In the absence of air resistance, a stone is thrown from X and follows a parabolic path in
which the highest point reached is Y.
X
The horizontal component of velocity of the stone is
A zero at Y C greatest at X
B greatest at Y D the same at X and Y
7 Two particles of identical masses are initially projected towards each other on a smooth
surface with speeds u1 and u2 respectively. They collide elastically with each other, and their
directions and speeds after the collision are shown in the figure below.
u1 u2
Before collision
v1 v2
After collision
5
Which one of the following equations cannot be applied to the collision of this system?
A u1 - u2 = v 2 + v 1 C u12 – u22 = v12 + v22

B u1 + u 2 = v 2 – v 1 D u12 + u22 = v12 + v22
8 A movable notice-board of mass 2.0 kg is placed on a smooth floor. What is the initial
acceleration of the notice-board when a horizontal stream of water, travelling at speed
8.0 m s-1, strikes it at a rate of 1.0 kg s-1 for a duration of 50 s.
A 0.16 m s-2 C 4.2 m s-2

B 4.0 m s-2 D 8.0 m s-2
9 A pendulum bob is suspended in a bus of mass 3000 kg undergoing constant deceleration.

The pendulum makes an angle of 18° with the vertical. What is the deceleration of the bus?
direction of motion
18°
A 0.32 m s-2 C 3.2 m s-2

B 3.0 m s-2 D 9.3 m s-2
6
10 A clown on a unicycle accelerates to the left.
direction of motion
road
What is the direction of the resultant force due to the road acting on the wheel of the
unicycle?
A C
B D
11 Two blocks P and Q of masses 4m and m accelerate along a smooth floor when a force F is
applied to block P as shown.
F
P Q
What is the force exerted by block Q on block P during this acceleration?
F 4F
A C
5 5
F D F
B
4
7
12 A uniform rod of mass 2.0 kg is hinged to a wall as shown in the figure below. The rod is
supported at the other end by a cable. The rod makes an angle of 56o to the wall. If a load of
mass 1.5 kg is suspended from the centre of the rod, what is the tension in the cable?
cable
rod
56o
hinge
load
A 6.1 N C 16 N
B 14 N D 20 N
13 A 1.6 kg block slides down a plane that is inclined at 25° with the horizontal, at a constant
speed of 2.0 m s-1. At what rate is the frictional force doing work on the block?
A -28 W C 13 W
B -13 W D 28 W
14 A 100 kg crate is pulled from rest across a floor with a constant force of 320 N. For the first
20.0 m, the floor is frictionless and for the next 10.0 m, a constant frictional force of 30.0 N
acts on the crate. What is the final speed of the crate?
A 8.00 m s-1 C 13.6 m s-1

B 8.37 m s-1 D 13.9 m s-1
8
15 An electric motor has an efficiency of 45%. It is used to raise a bucket of rocks of mass
250 kg at constant speed through a height of 20 m. The time taken to raise the bucket of
rocks is 20 minutes. What is the power supplied to the motor?
A 11 W C 41 W
B 21 W D 91 W
16 Which of the following statements about electromagnetic waves is not true?
A They can be polarised.

B They are transverse waves.
C They always travel at the speed of light.
D They are diffracted when they pass through a small aperture.
17 Some fine sand particles are present in a long transparent tube. A speaker is placed at the
end of the tube, and the frequency of the sound emitted is varied until the fine sand settles
into a series of small heaps. The diagram below shows a section of the tube and some of the
heaps that were formed.
Which of the following statements is true?
A The air molecules are vibrating vertically.

B The wavelength of the sound is given by L.
C The air pressure where the heaps are is the lowest.
D The positions of the heaps show the positions of the displacement nodes.
18 Which of the following gives three regions of the electromagnetic spectrum in order of
decreasing wavelength?
A radiowaves, ultraviolet, X-rays

B ultraviolet, infra-red, microwaves
C visible spectrum, gamma rays, radiowaves
D gamma rays, microwaves, visible spectrum
9
19 A horizontal steel wire is fixed at one end and is kept under tension by means of weights
suspended over a pulley. The length of wire between the fixed end and the pulley is 1.0 m.
Magnets are placed near the centre of the wire, and an alternating voltage supply is
connected to the wire between the fixed end and the pulley. Standing waves are formed when
the voltage supply is turned on. Five antinodes are observed on the wire.
1.0 m
S
pulley
N
Fixed
end
weights
Given that the speed of the wave on the wire is 24 m s-1, what is the frequency of the voltage
supply?
A 48 Hz C 96 Hz
B 60 Hz D 120 Hz
20 In the figure below, A and B are two loudspeakers which are π radians out of phase with each
other and emit sound waves of wavelength 4.0 m with equal amplitude X. The waves from A
and B arrive at point C.
C
m
18
A B
If AC is 18 m and BC is 10 m, what is the amplitude of the resultant wave at C?
A 0 C 2X
B X D 4X
10
21 Eight small conductors of charge Q are placed on the edge of an insulating disc of diameter
2π
D. Given the angular frequency of rotation of the disc is ω =
T , where T is the period of
rotation.
Q
Q Q
D
Q Q
Q Q
Q
What is the equivalent electric current at the edge of the disc?
4Qω
A C 8Qω
π
8Qω 16Qπ
B D
πD ω
22 A car battery of e.m.f. 12 V and internal resistance 0.020 Ω is connected to a load of 4.0 Ω. If
the potential difference across the load is 10 V, what is the power lost in the connecting
wires?
A 0.13 W C 4.9 W
B 1.0 W D 5.0 W
11
23 Five resistors of equal resistance are connected as shown.
S Q
Which two points would give the maximum combination resistance?
A PQ C PS
B PR D QS
24 The resistance of a certain element is directly proportional to the current passing through it.
When the current is 1.0 A the power dissipated in the element is 3.0 W. What is the power
dissipated when the current is raised to 2.0 A?
A 1.5 W C 12 W
B 6.0 W D 24 W
12
25 A battery is connected to a uniform resistance wire XYZ, where Y is at the midpoint between
points X and Z. Point Y is earthed as shown in the figure below.
X Y Z
Which one of the following graphs show how the potential varies across XYZ?
A V C V
X Y Z X Y Z
B V D V
X Y Z X Y Z
26 In the figure below, Y is a circular coil carrying an anti - clockwise current. X is a long, straight
wire carrying a current perpendicularly out of the plane of the paper through the centre of the
coil.
Each part of the coil Y experiences
A a force towards X C no force in any direction

B a force away from X D a force into or out of the plane of the paper
13
27 One end of a flat rectangular coil of negligible mass is placed at the centre of a 1000-turn
circular coil of diameter 25 cm as shown in the figure below. A current of 5.0 A is passed
through the rectangular coil and when a 5.0 g paper rider is placed at 2.0 cm to the right of
the pivot, the rectangular coil is balanced horizontally.
15 cm 2.0 cm
paper rider
4 .0
5.0 A
cm
1000-turn coil of
diameter 25 cm
The magnetic flux density at the centre of a flat circular coil of N turns and radius r is given by
μo N I
B= where I is the current carried in the coil and μo is the permeability of free space.
2r
What is the magnitude of the current in terms of μo that the 1000-turn circular coil must carry
in order for the rectangular coil to remain horizontal?
0.83 × 10 −6 8.2 × 10 −6
A A C A
μo μo
1.2 × 10 −6 16 × 10 −6
B A D A
μo μo
28 Four identical wires A, B, C and D carry equal currents but in the directions as shown in the
figure below. What is the direction of the resultant magnetic force experienced by wire C?
14
A C
B D
29 In a photoelectric emission experiment, a metal is irradiated with photons of wavelength λ.

The minimum frequency to cause photoelectric emission is f0. If c is the speed of light, what
fraction of the photon energy is converted to kinetic energy in the electron travelling with the
greatest speed?
A λ C f0 c
1−
λ − f0c λ
B c D f0 λ
1−
c − f0 λ c
30 The work function of a metal is 3.00 eV. White light, with frequencies ranging from
4.00 x 1014 Hz to 7.90 x 1014 Hz is incident on the surface of the metal. What is the maximum
kinetic energy of the electrons ejected from the surface of the metal?
A 4.38 x 10-20 J C 4.38 x 10-19 J

B 8.55 x 10-20 J D 8.55 x 10-19 J
END OF PAPER
Centre Number Index Number Name Class

RAFFLES INSTITUTION
PHYSICS
8866 / 02
Higher 1
Paper 2
21 September 2010
2 hours


Write your Centre number, index number, name and class in the spaces provided at the top of this
page.
Section A For Examiner’s Use

1 / 5
Section B 2 / 9
Answer two questions. Section A 3 / 8
Write your answers in the spaces 4 / 8
provided in this booklet.
5 / 10
At the end of the examination, circle the 6 / 20
Section B questions you have answered
in the grid. Section B 7 / 20
8 / 20
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ]
at the end of each question or part question. Total / 80
This booklet consists of 23 printed pages including the cover page.

2

DATA AND FORMULAE
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 x 108 m s−1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 x 10−19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 x 10−34 J s
unified atomic mass constant , u = 1.66 x 10−27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 x 10−31 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 x 10−27 kg
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + 21 at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Q
electric potential, V =−
4πε 0r
resistors in series, R = R1 + R2 + . . . .
resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + . . . .
3

SECTION A
Answer all questions in this section.

1 A cylindrical thermos flask is used to store hot water. The internal diameter and depth of
the thermos flask are measured to be (8.50 ± 0.01) cm and (21.0 ± 0.1) cm respectively.
(a) State the instrument used to measure its diameter and a systematic error that can
occur with the use of this instrument.
[2]
(b) Calculate the capacity of the thermos flask and its associated uncertainty.
Volume = cm3 [3]

4

2 (a) A mass hanging from a spring balance in air gives a reading of 50 N. When the
mass is completely immersed in water, the reading on the balance is 40 N. It is
now completely immersed in another liquid, giving a reading of 34 N. Calculate the
density of this liquid. Assume that the density of water is 1000 kg m-3.
Density = kg m-3 [2]
(b) In Fig. 2 below, a uniform beam of length 10.0 m and weight 500 N is hinged to a
wall at point O. Its far end is supported by a cable that makes an angle of 53.0°
with the horizontal. A 70.0 kg worker stands on the beam.
cable
53.0°
O
s beam
Fig. 2
(i) Draw a labelled diagram showing the forces acting on the beam. [2]
5

(ii) The worker walks towards the far end of the beam from O. Calculate the
furthest distance s he can travel if the maximum possible tension in the
cable is 1000 N.
s= m [2]
(iii) Calculate the magnitude of the force exerted by the hinge on the beam
when the tension in the cable is 1000 N.
Force exerted by the hinge = N [3]

6

3 (a) Define magnetic flux density.
[2]
(b) A long, thin wire is in a region of uniform magnetic flux density B. The wire carries
a current of 5.8 A and is oriented at an angle of 12o to the direction of the magnetic
field as shown in Fig 3.
Fig. 3
(i) Calculate the magnetic flux density B given that the magnetic force exerted
per unit length on the wire is 0.045 N m-1.
B= T [3]
7

(ii) Determine the angle at which the wire must be oriented with respect to the
magnetic field if the force per unit length acting on the wire is now
0.015 N m-1.
o
angle = [2]
(iii) State the direction of the magnetic force on the wire.
[1]

8

4 A hydrogen lamp emits light of frequency 7.0 x 1014 Hz at a rate of 0.25 W. Only 0.40 %
of all the photons given out fall on the cathode of a photocell. The current registered in
the external circuit is 8.5 μA. It can be assumed that this current consists of all the
photoelectrons emitted.
(a) Calculate
(i) the energy of a photon
Energy of a photon = J [2]
(ii) the number of photons leaving the lamp in one second
Number of photons in one second = [2]
(b) Calculate the percentage of the photons that fall on the cathode which produces
photoelectrons.
Percentage = % [3]
(c) State the effect on the current registered in the external circuit when the power of
the lamp is increased.
9

[1]
10

5 Radiation is a significant component of heat transfer in buildings, especially for sun-

exposed surfaces and regions of large temperature differences. Most countries have
building regulations that contain instructions about limiting heat transfer in order to
reduce the amount of heating or air-conditioning required.
In order to calculate heat transfer, a thermal transmittance coefficient or U-value is

P
measured for each type of building material. Mathematically, U = where P is the
AΔT
rate of heat transfer in watts, A is the surface area of the structure and ΔT is the air
temperature difference between each side of the structure in kelvins. The U-values of
three construction components are given below:
Component U-value / W m-2 K-1

Single-glazed window 5.6
Double-glazed window 3.2
Uninsulated roof 1.9
A house has windows of total area 24 m2 and a roof of area 60 m2. On average, the
owner heats the house for 3000 hours per year to a temperature that is 14 K above that
of the air outside.
(a) (i) Calculate the amount of energy lost in a year through single-glazed windows.
Energy Loss = kWh [3]
(ii) By installing double-glazed windows, calculate the owner’s annual savings if

electricity costs $0.25 per kWh.
11

Savings = $ [3]
(b) The roof is now insulated with two 50 mm thick layers of thermal insulation on each
side to reduce heat transfer, as shown in Fig. 5 below.
t
Fig. 5
U-value for thermal insulation 50 mm thick = 1.4 W m-2 K-1

To calculate the rate of heat transfer P through such a roof, a composite U-value,
Uc, has to be used. Uc can be expressed in terms of the U-values of the individual
materials by the equation
1 1 1
= + + .....
UC U1 U2
(i) Using the above equation, show that the rate of heat transfer P through the
roof with thickness of thermal insulation on each side t = 50 mm is 430 W. [1]
12

(ii) The table below shows the values of P for their respective t values.
t / mm P/W
50 430
100 250
150 170
200 130
Using the data from the table, plot a graph of P against t. [2]
400
300
200
100
t /mm
(iii) Explain why the rate of heat transfer for a thickness of 250 mm thermal
insulation on each side cannot be accurately determined from the above
graph.
[1]

13

SECTION B

6 A group of students built a catapult to test its capability as a launcher. In one of their
test launches, a ball was successfully projected over a 5.0 m wall. The ball was
released 1.0 m above the ground with an initial velocity u at an angle θ to the
horizontal. At the highest part of the trajectory, the ball managed to just go over the wall
with a horizontal speed of 10 m s−1. Assume that air resistance is negligible.
5.0 m
1.0 m
Fig. 6.1
(a) Describe the shape of the trajectory (labelled A) of the ball.

[1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the vertical component of the initial velocity u,
Vertical component of u = m s-1 [2]

14

(ii) the angle of projection θ,
θ = 0
[2]

(iii) the time taken for the ball to reach top of the wall, and
time taken = s [2]
(iv) the horizontal distance between the wall and the point of projection.
horizontal distance = m
[2]
15

(c) If air resistance was significant, sketch the path of the trajectory on Fig. 6.1 and
label it B. State two differences between trajectories A and B.
[3]
(d) The estimated normal contact force acting on the ball upon hitting the floor is
shown in Fig. 6.2. Assume that the floor is frictionless.
Normal contact force / N
300
0 Time/s
0.250
0.250
Fig. 6.2
(i) Sketch on Fig.6.2 the normal contact force exerted by the ball on the floor. [1]
(ii) Define impulse.
[1]
16

(iii) Determine the impulse delivered to the ball in the vertical direction.
Vertical component of impulse = Ns [2]
(iv) Hence find the average normal contact force acting on the ball.

Average normal contact force = N [2]

(v) Describe the energy changes during the collision of the ball with the floor.
[2]
17

7 (a) State the Principle of Superposition of waves.
[2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows two waves P and Q. They are superimposed on each other at the
instant shown. Draw the resultant waveform in Fig.7.1 on page 17.
18

Y
A
Wave P
X
‐A
Y
A
Wave Q
X
‐A
Y
Resultant
wave
A
X
‐A
.
Fig. 7.1
[4]
19

(c) A 0.60 m horizontal piece of string is attached to two fixed points and made to
vibrate with a small amplitude.
(i) For a particular frequency of the vibrating string, a stationary wave pattern
with three nodes is observed. Sketch the waveform.
[1]
(ii) A stationary wave pattern with five nodes is obtained when the string
vibrates at a frequency of 160 Hz. Calculate the speed of propagation of the
wave in the string.
Speed = m s-1 [3]

20

(d) Fig. 7.2 shows an arrangement to demonstrate double-slit experiment using

microwaves of wavelength 3.00 cm. The slit separation is 9.00 cm and the
microwave emitter is placed along the perpendicular bisector of the slits A and B.
Fig. 7.2
(i) For observable interference patterns, the sources must be coherent. Explain
what is meant by coherent.
[1]
(ii) A detector travelling along AX detects a series of maxima and minima.

Explain.
[4]
21

22

(iii) Find the greatest distance from A, along the line AX, for which destructive
interference occurs.
Greatest distance from A = m [3]
(iv) Describe the intensity detected along AX at distance beyond that calculated
in (iii).
[2]
23

8 (a) Define the terms resistance and resistivity.
[2]
(b) Use energy considerations to distinguish between electromotive force (e.m.f.) and
potential difference (p.d.).
[2]
(c) A cell of e.m.f. 2.50 V and internal resistance r is connected to two resistive wires
in series as shown in Fig. 8.1. The wires are made of the same material but have
different lengths and diameters. Wire AB is 50.0 cm long and has a diameter d,
whereas wire BC is 30.0 cm long and has a diameter 0.30 d. The connecting wires
are assumed to have no resistance.
2.50 V
A B C
Fig. 8.1
RAB
Show that = 0.15
RBC [2]
24

(d) An ammeter is added to the circuit in part (c), along with a voltmeter connected
across wire BC as shown in Fig 8.2. If the ammeter shows a reading of 0.400 A
and the voltmeter gives a reading of 2.00 V, determine
2.50 V
A
r
A B C
V
Fig 8.2
(i) the terminal p.d. of the 2.50 V cell
V= V [3]
(ii) the internal resistance r of the 2.50 V cell
r = Ω [2]
(iii) the efficiency of the circuit, given that

Power Output
Efficiency = × 100%
Power Input
25

Efficiency = % [2]
(iv) the resistivity of the wires AB and BC, given that d is 2 mm.
Resistivity = Ωm [2]
(e) Suggest and explain whether your answer in part (d)(ii) is an overestimate or
underestimate if the ammeter cannot be considered to be ideal.
[2]

(f) The wires AB and BC are now connected in parallel. State and explain how this
will affect the efficiency of the system as calculated in part (d)(iii), assuming that
both the ammeter and voltmeter are ideal.
[3]
26

END OF PAPER

Question Answer
1 D
2 B
3 B
4 D
5 C
6 D
7 C
8 B
9 C
10 B
11 A
12 B
13 B
14 C
15 D
16 C
17 D
18 A
19 B
20 A
21 A
22 C
23 B
24 C
25 C
26 C
27 C
28 A
29 D
30 A
H1 Physics Prelim Paper Suggested Solutions
1 (a) Vernier callipers, zero error.
(b) ⎛ d2 ⎞
V = π ⎜ ⎟ h = 1191.645 cm3
⎝ 4 ⎠
ΔV 2Δd Δh
= +
V d h
⎛ 2 × 0.01 0.1 ⎞
ΔV = ⎜ + ⎟ × 1191.645
⎝ 8.50 21.0 ⎠
= 8 cm3 (1 s.f.)
∴ V = (1192 ± 8 ) cm3
2 (a) U1 = W − T1 = 50 − 40 = 10 N
= ρ1Vg
10
∴V = = 1.02 × 10−3 m3
1000 × 9.81
U2 = 50 − 34 = 16 N
= ρ2Vg
16
∴ ρ2 = −3
= 1600 kg m−3
1.02 × 10 × 9.81
(b) (i) reaction tension

force
weight of
weight of
beam
worker
(ii) Taking moments about O,
5.00 × 500 + (70 × 9.81× s ) = 1000sin ( 53.0°) × 10.0
s = 7.99 m
(iii) At equilibrium, the net vertical and horizontal forces must be zero.
Rx = T cos53.0° = 602 N
Ry = 500 + (70 × 9.81) − T sin53.0° = 388 N
R = 6022 + 3882 = 716 N
3 (a) It is the force per unit length per unit current on a straight conductor oriented B2
perpendicularly to the direction of the magnetic field.
(b) (i) F = B I L sinθ

⎛ F ⎞⎛ 1 ⎞ ⎛ 1 ⎞
B = ⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ = ( 0.045 ) ⎜ ⎟
⎝ L ⎠⎝ I sinθ ⎠ ⎝ 5.8 sin12 ⎠
∴ B = 0.037 T
(ii) ⎛F ⎞ 1 ⎛ 1 ⎞
sinθ = ⎜ ⎟ = ( 0.015 ) ⎜ ⎟
⎝ L ⎠ BI ⎝ 0.0373 × 5.8 ⎠
∴θ = 4.0o
(iii) Into the paper
4 (a) (i) E = 6.63 × 10 −34 × 7.0 × 1014 = 4.641× 10 −19 J

(ii) nhf
P=
t
n P 0.25
⇒ = = −19
= 5.39 × 1017 s−1
t E 4.641× 10
(b) No. of photons that fall on cathode = 0.0040 x 5.39 x 1017 = 2.155 x 1015
Q = I t ⇒ ne × e = I t
ne I 8.5 × 10−6
∴ = = −19
= 5.313 × 1013
t e 1.6 × 10
This is the amount of photons per second that cause photocurrent.
∴ the percentage of photons causing photocurrent
5.313 × 1013
= × 100 = 0.0099%
5.39 × 1017
(c) Decrease. With a greater work function, for the same no. of photons that fall on the
cathode, less no. of electrons are ejected per unit time.
5 (a) (i) P = UAΔT = 5.6 × 24 × 14 = 1881.6

E = Pt = 1881.6 × 3000 × 60 × 60 = 2.0321× 104 MJ
1 kWh = 1000 × 60 × 60 = 3.60 × 106 J
∴ 2.0321× 104 MJ = 5644.7 kWh
(ii) ΔP = (U1 − U 2 )AΔT = (5.6 − 3.2) × 24 × 14 = 806.4

ΔE = ΔPt = 806.4 × 3000 × 60 × 60 = 8.7091× 109 J = 2419.2 kWh
Savings = 2419.2 × 0.25 = $604.80
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(b) (i) = + + = + +
UC U1 U2 U3 1.4 1.9 1.4
−1
⎛ 1 1 1 ⎞
UC = ⎜ + + ⎟ = 0.51154
⎝ 1.4 1.9 1.4 ⎠
P = UC AΔT = 0.51154 × 60 × 14 = 430 W
(ii)
Heat transfer via conduction dominates and relationship between rate of heat
kAΔT
transfer and thickness of thermal insulation is given to be R = where k
L
is the thermal conductivity of the medium, A is the surface area normal to
direction of heat transfer and L is the thickness of the insulation. This
relationship is inversely proportional, thus graph should be a curve.
A curve needs at least 8 plotted points to be accurate. There are only 3

(iii)
plotted points in this graph, thus the curve may not be accurate.
6 (a) The shape of the trajectory is parabolic.
(b) (i) v Y 2 = u Y 2 + 2 aY sY
0 = u Y 2 + 2 ( − 9.81)( 5.0 − 1.0 ) ⇒ u Y = 8.9 m s − 1
(ii) uY 8.86
tan θ = = ⇒ θ = 41.50
uX 10
(iii) vY = uY + aY t
0 = ( 8.86 ) + ( −9.81) t ⇒ t = 0.90 s
(iv) s X = u X t = (10 )( 0.903 ) = 9.0 m
(c) • B is non-parabolic or asymmetrical.

• Maximum height for B is lower than A.
• Range for B would be shorter than A.
• B will reach maximum height earlier than A.
(d) (i) Normal contact force / N

300
Time / s
0.250
(ii) Impulse of a force acting on an object is the change in momentum of the

object.
(iii) Impulse
= area under F - t graph
1
= ( 0.250 )( 300 ) = 37.5 Ns
2
(iv) impulse 37.5

Average normal contact force = = = = 150 N
time 0.250
(v) During collision, the KE of the ball is converted into sound energy, thermal
energy and elastic PE as the ball deforms. Part of the elastic PE is returned
to the ball as KE on rebound.
7 (a) When two or more waves meet at a point, the resultant displacement at that point is
the vector sum of the individual displacements due to each wave.
(b)
(c) (i)
(ii) λ
( 4) = 0.60
2
( 4 ) v = 0.60
2 (160 )
v = 48 m s-1
(d) (i) Sources must have a constant phase difference.
(ii) As detector moves along A X, the path difference decreases from 9.00 cm (at
A) to 0.00 cm (at infinity). Since path difference Δ = nλ , n decreases from 3
(at A) to 0 (at infinity). When n is an integer, maxima is obtained; when n is a
half-integer, minima is obtained.
(iii) For destructive interference, path difference Δ = 21 λ
1
x 2 + 92 − x = ( 3.00 )
2
x 2 + 81 = x + 1.5
x 2 + 81 = ( x + 1.5 )
2
= x 2 + 3 x + 2.25
3 x = 78.75
x = 26.3 cm
(iv) Beyond 26.3 cm, the intensity increases to a maximum then decreases again
as distance increases.
8 (a) The electrical resistance, R of a conductor is defined as the ratio of the p.d., V
across it to the current, I through it.
The electrical resistivity ρ of a material is the constant of proportionality relating
the electrical resistance R to the dimensions of the material (length and area).
Also accept if there is a statement relating dependence of R on dimensions and ρ

as a material characteristic/property.
(b) The potential difference V between two points in a circuit is the amount of electric
energy that is converted to other forms of energy when a unit charge passes from
one point to the other.
The e.m.f. of a source is defined as the amount of converted from other forms to
electrical energy when the source drives a unit charge round a complete circuit.
(c) L L 4ρ L
R=ρ =ρ =
A
(
πd2
4 ) π d2
2 2
RAB LAB dBC LAB dBC
= 2 × OR × 2
RBC d AB LBC LBC d AB
50.0 ( 0.3d )
2
= × = 0.15
d2 30.0
(d) (i) VBC = ( 0.400 ) RBC = 2.00 V

RBC = 5.00 Ω
From part (c)
RAB = 0.15RBC = 0.75 Ω
VAB = ( 0.400 )( 0.75 ) = 0.300 V
VAC = 2.00 + 0.300 = 2.30 V
(ii) E = VAC + Ir
2.50 = ( 2.00 + 0.300 ) + ( 0.400 ) r
r = 0.500 Ω
(iii) IVAC
Efficiency = × 100%
IE
2.30
= × 100% = 92.0%
2.50
(iv) From part (c)(i)

L
RBC = 5.00 Ω = ρ
A
( )
2
π 0.30 × 2 × 10−3
( 5.00 )
ρ= 4 = 4.71× 10−6 Ω m
−2
30 × 10
(e) Over-estimate. 0.20 V is actually the p.d. across R as well as that of the ammeter.
E − VAC = I ( R + RA )
R + RA = 0.500 Ω ⇒ R < 0.500 Ω
There must be some statement relating the resistance of the ammeter to either
- pd calculated for R actually includes the pd across the ammeter
- resistance calculated of R actually includes the resistance of the ammeter
to show that the calculated value of R is actually an overestimate.
(f) Efficiency will decrease.

The combined resistance of the load (wires) is now much lower (≈0.652 Ω) and
comparable to internal resistance R which results in the terminal p.d. dropping
quite substantially as well.
This means that the power dissipated across the load is now comparable to the
power loss due to the internal resistance R which implies that efficiency will
be < 92%.
RIVER VALLEY HIGH SCHOOL
YEAR 6 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION
H1 PHYSICS 8866
PAPER 1
20 SEP 2010
1 HOUR
CANDIDATE
NAME
CENTRE INDEX
NUMBER S NUMBER
DO NOT OPEN THIS BOOKLET UNTIL YOU ARE TOLD TO DO SO.
Read these notes carefully.

Write your name, class and index number in the spaces above.
There are thirty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D.
Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any
rough working should be done on the Question Paper.
The total number of marks for this paper is 30.
____________________________________________________________________________
This Question Paper consists of 15 printed pages.
River Valley High School Pg 1 of 15 Year 6 H1 Physics 8866
Preliminary Examination 2010
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 108 m s–1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10–19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10–34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10–27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 × 10–31 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 × 10–27 kg
Formulae
1 2
2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
hydrostatic pressure, p = ρ gh
resistors in series, R = R1 + R2 + K
resistors in parallel, 1/ R = 1/ R1 + 1/ R2 + K

For each question there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you
consider to be correct.
1 Which of the following could be the correct expression for the speed v of sound in
a gas of density ρ and at a pressure P?
(γ is a dimensionless constant.)
γ γρ γP
A v= B v= C v= D v = γρ P
ρP P ρ
2 When a drop of oil of mass m and density ρ is put on a water surface it spreads
over a circular area of diameter d. Assuming that this area consists of a
monomolecular layer which one of the following gives the approximate diameter
of a molecule?
m ρ 3m 4m
A B C D
πρ d π dm 4π d 3 ρ π d 2ρ
3 The figure below shows a graph of an object’s motion. Which sentence is a

correct interpretation?
displacement
0 time
A The object slides along a flat surface. Then it slides forward down a smooth
incline plane, and then finally stops.
B The object is moving at constant velocity. Then it slows down and stops.
C The object is initially stationary. Then it moves backwards and then finally
stops.
D The object moves along a flat area, moves backwards down a smooth
incline plane, and then it keeps moving.

4 An object has an initial velocity u. It is subjected to a constant acceleration a.
The force is not in the same direction as the initial velocity.
A vector diagram is drawn to find the final velocity v.
What is the length of side X of the vector diagram?
A v–u B v+u C at D u + at
5 The diagram shows two trolleys X and Y held stationary and connected by an
extended elastic cord. The mass of X is twice that of Y.
The trolleys are released at the same instant. They move towards each other and
stick together on impact. Just before the collision, the speed of X is 20 cm s–1.
What is the speed of Y after the collision?
A zero B 5.0 cm s–1 C 7.0 cm s–1 D 10 cm s–1

6 The graph shows the variation with time of the momentum of a ball as it is kicked
in a straight line.
Initially, the momentum is p1 at time t1. At time t2 the momentum is p2.

What is the magnitude of the average force acting on the ball between times t1
and t2?
p2 − p1 p2 − p1 p2 p2 + p1
A B C D
t2 t 2 − t1 t2 t 2 − t1
7 A 2.0 kg object moving at 10 m s−1 collides normally with a wall and bounces off
with half of its original kinetic energy. What is the magnitude of the impulse
applied by the wall?
A 5.9 N s B 14 N s C 34 N s D 50 N s
8 A car with front-wheel drive accelerates in the direction shown.
Which diagram best shows the direction of the total force exerted by the road on
the front wheels?
A B C D

9 A ball falls vertically and bounces on the ground.
Which of the following statements is true when the ball is in contact with the
ground?
A The force that the ball exerts on the ground is always less than the weight of
the ball.
B The force that the ball exerts on the ground is always equal to the weight of
the ball.
C The weight of the ball is always equal in magnitude and opposite in direction
to the force that the ground exerts on the ball.
D The force that the ball exerts on the ground is always equal in magnitude
and opposite in direction to the force the ground exerts on the ball.
10 A solid has density 4.0 g cm−3. What is the density of a liquid in which the solid
would float with one-fifth of its total volume above the liquid surface?
A 4.0 g cm−3 B 5.0 g cm−3 C 7.5 g cm−3 D 8.5 g cm−3
11 Two 20 g flatworms climb over a very thin wall, 10 cm high. One of the worms is
20 cm long, the other is wider and only 10 cm long. Determine the ratio of work
done against gravity by the longer worm to the shorter one when half of their
bodies are over the top of the wall.
thin wall
Me
too!
I am a
flatworm.
2 3
A B 1 C D 2
3 2
12 A body moving along a straight-line has mass 3.0 kg and kinetic energy 24 J. The
motion is then opposed by a resultant force of 4.0 N. The body will come to rest
after travelling a distance of
A 2.0 m B 6.0 m C 8.0 m D 12 m

13 A cannon of mass 3000 kg fires a cannonball of mass 50 kg with a horizontal
velocity of 85 m s−1. Determine the kinetic energy of the cannon.
A 1.1 × 107 J B 1.8 × 105 J C 3.0 × 103 J D 50 J
14 In a ripple tank experiment, parallel water waves of wavelength 0.80 m strikes the
hypotenuse of a triangular barrier as shown.
What is the phase difference, in radian, at any instant between the waves at two
points 0.50 m apart along the barrier as shown?
A 0.80π B 0.96π C 1.0π D 1.3π

15 The figure shows the shape at a particular instant of part of a transverse wave
travelling from left to right along a string.
Which statement about the motion of elements of the string at this instant is
correct?
A The speed of Q is higher than S.

B Both Q and R are moving upwards.
C The energy of P and S is entirely kinetic.
D The acceleration of P and R is a maximum.
16 A stationary wave in a gas in a resonance tube can be described in terms of the

amplitude Δx of oscillation of the particles of the gas from their mean positions.
Which one of the following correctly describes the situation at resonance in a tube
which is closed at one end? (Neglect end correction at the open end.)
at closed end at open end

Δx Δx
A zero zero
B zero maximum
C maximum maximum
D maximum zero

17 A source of sound of frequency 2300 Hz is placed several metres from a vertical
reflecting board. A microphone, connected to a cathode-ray oscilloscope, is
moved from A to B which are both positions of maximum intensity through ten
minimum intensity positions as shown.
If L is 0.75 m, what is the speed of sound in air?
A 310 m s–1 B 330 m s–1 C 350 m s–1 D 380 m s–1
18 A student sets up the apparatus shown to determine a two-slit interference

pattern on the screen.
He wishes to increase the fringe spacing. Which of the following changes to the
apparatus will increase the fringe spacing?
A Increase the distance p.

B Increase the distance q.
C Increase the distance r.
D Immerse the whole setup in water.

19 Two cubes, X and Y are cut from the same block of metal. The linear dimension
R
of X is 2 times that of Y. What is the ratio X of the resistances between the
RY
opposite faces of X and of Y?
1
A B 1 C 2 D 4
2
20 The electrical characteristic of a component is shown below.

I
Which graph below shows the way the resistance of the component varies with
applied voltage?
A B
C D

21 A battery of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r is connected to a 4.0 Ω resistor. A
p.d. of 5.2 V is measured across the terminals of the battery. When the 4.0 Ω
resistor is replaced with one of resistance 12.0 Ω, the p.d. across the battery
becomes 6.0 V.
What are the values of E and r?
E/V r/Ω
A 6.5 1.0
B 7.5 1.8
C 7.6 0.63
D 12 6.0
22 The battery in the circuit below has negligible internal resistance.
2.0 Ω 2.0 Ω 2.0 Ω
I
6.0 V
The current I is
A 1.0 A B 2.0 A C 4.5 A D 9.0 A

In the diagram below shows an electrical circuit in which the internal resistance of
23
the cell is negligible. It may be assumed that the voltmeter has infinite resistance
and the resistance of the ammeter is negligible.
2.0 V
S
A
100 Ω
What is the voltmeter reading when switch S is opened and when switch S is
closed?
S opened S closed
A 0V 0V
B 1.0 V 1.0 V
C 2.0 V 0V
D 2.0 V 2.0 V
24 Two long current carrying conductors are placed perpendicular to each other.
The current flowing through one of the wires is 4.0 A upwards, while the current
through the other wire is 2.0 A towards the left.
X 3.0 m
4.0 A
3.0 m
2.0 A
What is the magnitude and direction of the resultant magnetic field at a point X,
which is 3.0 m perpendicularly away from both wires? Ignore the Earth's
magnetic field.
(Magnetic flux density at a distance d from a long straight conductor carrying
μ I
current I is B = o .)
2π d
A 1.33 x 10−7 T out of the plane of the page
B 4.00 x 10−7 T into the plane of the page
C 4.00 x 10−7 T out of the plane of the page
D 2.67 x 10−7 T into the plane of the page

25 A horizontal wire PQ of length 0.50 m and weight 0.50 N is placed at an angle 30°
to the magnetic field as shown below. The wire is balanced by the magnetic force
of the magnetic field of magnetic flux density of 1.0 T.
Top view
P
30°
What is the magnitude and direction of the current in the wire?
magnitude direction
A 1.2 A P to Q
B 2.0 A P to Q
C 1.2 A Q to P
D 2.0 A Q to P
26 The diagram shows a simple current balance. The rectangular metallic frame
WXYZ carries a current I in a magnetic field B as shown. WX and YZ have length
p while XY and WZ have breadth q. The counterbalancing rod is of length r.
Weights of mass m are placed on the pan until the rectangular frame is
horizontal. When equilibrium has been established,
mgr mg mgr mgp

A I= B I= C I= D I=
Bqp Bq Bq 2 Bqr
27 When electromagnetic radiation falls on a particular metal surface, photoelectrons
may be emitted. The variation of the maximum kinetic energy E of these
electrons with the frequency f of the radiation is shown in the figure below.
When the experiment is repeated using another metal with a smaller work
function, which graph best represent the variation of E with f of this metal (solid
line)?
A B
C D
28 The intensity of a beam of monochromatic light is doubled. Which of the following

about the photons is correct?
A The speed of the photon is doubled.
B The frequency of the photon is doubled.
C The kinetic energy of the photon is doubled.
D The number of photons arriving per unit are per unit time is doubled.

29 An ultraviolet radiation source causes the emission of photoelectrons from a zinc
plate.
How would the maximum kinetic energy EK of the photoelectrons and the
photocurrent be affected by changing to a more intense source with the same
wavelength?
EK photocurrent
A unchanged decreased
B increased decreased
C unchanged increased
D increased increased
30 A beam of light of wavelength λ is incident normal to a surface of area S and is

completely absorbed by the surface. The rate of photons arriving at the surface is
n. The pressure exerted on the surface by the light is
nhλ nh 2nhλ 2nh

A B C D
S λS S λS
END OF PAPER

RIVER VALLEY HIGH SCHOOL
YEAR 6 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION
H1 PHYSICS 8866
PAPER 2
13 SEP 2010
2 HOUR
CANDIDATE
NAME
CENTRE INDEX
NUMBER S NUMBER
DO NOT OPEN THIS BOOKLET UNTIL YOU ARE TOLD TO DO SO.
Read these notes carefully.
Write your name, centre and index number and class in the spaces above.
Candidates answer on the Question Paper. FOR EXAMINERS’ USE

Section A
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough 1 /5
working.
Do not use paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. 2 /8
Section A 3 /9
4 /8
Section B
Answer any two questions. 5 /10
Section B
6 /20
7 /20
8 /20
TOTAL /80
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
____________________________________________________________________________
This Question Paper consists of 21 printed pages.
Data
Formulae
1 2
2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
hydrostatic pressure, p = ρ gh
resistors in series, R = R1 + R2 + K
resistors in parallel, 1/ R = 1/ R1 + 1/ R2 + K

Section A
1 The resistive force F that acts on an object moving at speed v in a stationary fluid of
constant density is given by the expression
F = kv2
where k is a constant.
(a) State the base units of

(i) force F,
[1]
(ii) speed v.
[1]
(b) Use your answers in (a) to determine the base units of k.
base units of k = ………………………… [1]
(c) Explain why it is technically incorrect to define speed as distance travelled per
second. Include in your answer the correct statement defining speed.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………… [2]

2 Jane, whose mass is 50.0 kg, needs to swing across a river (having width D) filled
with man-eating crocodiles to save Tarzan from danger. She must swing on a vine
into a wind exerting a constant horizontal force F. The vine has a length L and
initially makes an angle θ with the vertical (Fig. 2.1). Take D = 50.0 m, F = 110 N,
L = 40.0 m, and θ = 50.0°.
φ
L
Wind Jane
F
Tarzan
Fig 2.1
(a) (i) Show that the angle φ is 28.9°.
[2]
(ii) Hence, or otherwise, determine h.
h = ………………………… m [2]
(b) Calculate the minimum speed Jane needs to begin her swing in order for her to
just reach Tarzan.
minimum speed of Jane = ………………………… m s–1 [2]
(c) Once the rescue is complete, Tarzan and Jane must swing back across the
river. With what minimum speed must they begin their swing if Tarzan has a
mass of 80.0 kg?
minimum speed = ………………………… m s–1 [2]

3 Fig. 3 shows a pair of identical loudspeakers A and B placed 2.00 m apart and
emitting coherent sound waves of frequency 470 Hz. An observer walks from X to Y.
The perpendicular distance between the sources and XY is 12.0 m. As he walks, he
hears sound of maximum intensity at P, minimum intensity at Q and maximum
intensity at R. R is 4.50 m away from P.
Fig. 3
(a) Explain why the observer hears sound of maximum and minimum intensity as
he walks from X to Y.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………… [2]
(b) It can be shown using Pythagoras’ theorem that AR is 12.5 m and BR is

13.2 m.
(i) Determine the wavelength of the sound.
wavelength = ………………………… m [2]

(ii) Determine the speed of the sound.
speed of sound = ………………………… m s–1 [2]
(c) The power of the loudspeakers A and B are identical. Suggest why the
intensity at Q is not zero.
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………… [3]

4 (a) Distinguish between electromotive force and potential difference.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………… [2]
(b) An electric hotplate is designed to operate on a power supply of 240 V has two
coils of wire of resistivity of 9.8 × 10–7 Ω m. Each coil of wire has a length of
16 m of cross-sectional area 0.20 mm2.
(i) For one of the coils, calculate

1. its resistance,
resistance = ………………………… Ω
2. the power dissipation when a 240 V supply is connected across it.
power = ………………………… W [4]

(ii) Fig. 4.1 shows how the two coils can be connected to operate at
different powers.
240 V
B
C
Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.2, fill up the table with “ON” or “OFF” to obtain the lowest and
highest levels of operating power.
switch A switch B switch C

Lowest
Highest
Fig. 4.2
[ 2]

5 The Geiger-Nuttall theory of α-particle emission relates the half-life of the α-particle
emitter to the energy E of the α-particle. One form of this relationship is
166
L= – 53.5.
E
L is a number calculated from the half-life of the α-particle emitting nuclide and E is
measured in MeV.
Values of E and L for different nuclides are given Fig. 5.1.
1
1
Nuclide E / MeV L / (MeV ) 2
E
238
U 4.20 17.15 0.488
236
U 4.49 14.87 0.472
234
U 4.82 12.89 0.455
228
Th 5.42 7.78
208
Rn 6.14 3.16 0.404
212
Po 7.39 –2.75 0.368
Fig. 5.1
(a) Complete the table above by calculating, using the value of E provided, the
1
value of for the nuclide 228 Th . Give your answer to three significant
E
figures. [1]

1
Fig. 5.2 shows the variation with of the quantity L.
E
LL 20
16
12
0
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
11 1– 1
1 E 2 / MeV2 2
/ (MeV)
–4 E
Fig. 5.2
208
(b) (i) Identify the data point for the nuclide Rn . Label this point R. [1]
228
(ii) On Fig. 5.2, mark the point for the nuclide Th . Label this point T. [1]
(iii) Draw the best-fit straight line for all the data points. [1]
(c) (i) Determine the gradient of the line you have drawn in (b)(iii).
[2]

(ii) Suggest why the graph does not agree with the stated relationship for
the Geiger-Nuttall theory.
[2]
(d) On Fig. 5.2, draw the line that would be expected if the relationship for the
Geiger-Nuttall theory were correct. No further calculation is required. [2]

Section B
6 (a) Define moment of a force.
…………………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………….... [2]
(b) A person supports a load of 20 N in his hand as shown in Fig 6.1. The system
of the hand and load is represented by Fig 6.2. The rod represents the forearm
and T represents the tension exerted in the biceps. The forearm weighs 65 N.
(i) Show that the tension T in the biceps is 410 N.
[2]

(ii) Determine the magnitude and direction of the force acting at the elbow.
force acting at the elbow = ………………………… N
direction of the force: ………………………… [4]
(c) (i) State Newton’s laws of motion.
…………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………....
……………………………………………………………………………… [3]
(ii) A karate expert can split a stack of bricks by bringing her arm and hand
swiftly against the bricks with considerable speed. Using Newton’s laws
of motion, explain why she has to execute the karate strike very quickly.
…………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………....
……………………………………………………………………………… [3]
(d) Part of an arch made of stone is shown in Fig. 6.3.
load
10° 10°
P Q
keystone
Fig. 6.3
The central stone is known as a keystone and has a weight of 600 N. The
keystone is supporting a load of 4600 N. The sides of the keystone make an
angle of 10° to the vertical. The two stones P and Q, which are next to the
keystone, exert forces at right angles to the sides of the keystone.
(i) On Fig. 6.3, draw and label arrows on the keystone to show the
following four forces.
W, the weight of the keystone
L, the force the load exerts on the keystone
FP, the force stone P exerts on the keystone
FQ, the force stone Q exerts on the keystone [4]
(ii) Determine the value of the force FP.
FP = ………………………… N [2]

7 (a) Define magnetic flux density and the tesla.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………... [3]
(b) A metal wire of length 0.57 m and cross-sectional area 1.0 × 10–6 m2 is situated
at right angles to a uniform magnetic field of flux density 1.8 × 10–3 T, as
illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
electromagnetic
force on wire
× × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
magnetic field
× × × × × × × × × × × × × × × directed into
× × × × × × × plane of paper
× × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Fig. 7.1
The metal has density 7.9 × 103 kg m–3 and resistivity 8.8 × 10–8 Ω m.
A potential difference is applied between the ends of the wire so that there is
an electromagnetic force acting on the wire.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, mark the direction of the current in the wire. [1]
(ii) For the wire, calculate
1. its weight
weight = ………………………… N

2. its resistance.
resistance = ………………………… Ω [5]
(iii) Calculate the potential difference required between the ends of the wire
for the electromagnetic force on the wire to equal its weight.
potential difference = ………………………… V [3]
(iv) The horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field is 1.8 × 10–5 T.
State and explain why, in practice, current-carrying conductor wires are
not seen to lift off the ground
...................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................
……………………………………………………………………………... [2]

(c) (i) Two long straight parallel wires are separated by a distance x. Each
carries current I in the same direction. Explain, with the aid of
diagrams, the forces which exist between the two wires.
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………... [5]
(ii) The ampere is defined as the constant current which, if maintained in

two straight parallel conductors of infinite length, of negligible circular
cross-section, and placed 1 meter apart in vacuum, would produce
between these conductors a force equal to 2 × 10–7 N m–1 of length.
Suggest why this definition of ampere may pose a problem in
determining one ampere experimentally.
...................................................................................................................
……………………………………………………………………………... [1]

8 (a) Explain what is meant by the following terms photon, photoelectric effect,
threshold frequency, stopping potential and ionisation energy.
photon: ………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………
photoelectric effect: ……………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
threshold frequency: …………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………………
stopping potential: ……………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………………
ionisation energy: ……………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………... [6]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a simplified representation of the 5 lowest energy levels of
doubly ionised lithium ( Li 2+ ) that has only one electron.
Fig. 8.1

(i) Explain how emission spectral lines provide the evidence for the
existence of discrete energy levels in an atom.
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………… [3]
(ii) Explain why the ionised lithium vapour must be heated in order to
produce an emission spectrum.
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………… [1]
(iii) Considering transitions between only these levels,
1. determine the wavelengths of the spectral transition that produce

the shortest and longest wavelength,
shortest wavelength = ………………………… m
longest wavelength = ………………………… m [2]
2. state the number of emission spectral lines that is produced by

transitions among these levels,
………………………………………………………………………... [1]

3. sketch the emission spectrum of a gas consisting of these ions on
Fig. 7.2. Use vertical lines to denote the relative positions of the
spectral lines.
Fig. 8.2 [4]
(c) The electronic configuration of a lithium atom ( 73 Li ) is as shown in Fig. 8.3.
Fig. 8.3
The ionisation energies of a lithium atom are:
• first ionisation energy – 5.42 eV
• second ionisation energy – 76.0 eV
(i) State the value of the third ionisation energy.
……………………………………………………………………………... [1]
(ii) The work function of lithium metal is less than 3 eV. Explain why the
ionisation energies of an atom are always higher than the work function
of the metal of the same element.
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………… [2]
END OF PAPER

CONFIDENTIAL
River Valley High School

2010 Year 6 Preliminary Examination
H1 Physics
Answer Key and Solutions
Paper 1
No. Answer Key No. Answer Key No. Answer Key

1 C 11 A 21 A
2 D 12 B 22 D
3 C 13 C 23 C
4 C 14 B 24 A
5 A 15 D 25 B
6 D 16 B 26 A
7 C 17 C 27 C
8 B 18 C 28 D
9 D 19 A 29 C
10 B 20 B 30 B
CONFIDENTIAL 1
CONFIDENTIAL
River Valley High School

2010 Year 6 Preliminary Examination
H2 Physics
Paper 2
Section A
Qn No.
1(a) (i) [Force] = kg m s−2
(ii) [speed] = m s−1
(b) [k] = (kg m s−2)/( m s−1)2 = kg m−1
(c) To define a quantity, in this case speed, it has to be defined in terms of

quantities only and not in terms of units (e.g. second).
Speed should be defined as distance travelled per unit time.
2(a) (i) Lsin θ + Lsin φ = D

(40.0 sin 50.0° + 40.0 sin φ) = 50.0
φ = 28.9° (Shown)
(ii) Vertical height Jane is above Tarzan, h
= 40.0 cos φ − 40.0 cos 50.0°
= 9.307 m
(b) By conservation of energy,

1
MJvJ2 + MJgh = F × D (work done against friction)
2
Therefore, vJ = 6.12 m s−1
(c) By conservation of energy,

1
(MJ + MT)v2 + F × D = (MJ + MT)gh
2
Therefore, v = 9.90 m s−1
3(a) The distances of a point on XY from the two sources are different.
When the difference in distance is integer multiples of wavelength apart, the

wave meet in phase and constructive interference occurs. This results in
maximum intensity.
When the difference in distance is half-integer multiples of wavelength apart,

the wave meet out-of-phase and destructive interference occurs. This results in
minimum intensity.
(b) (i) Since a maximum is detected at P and next at Q, the path difference from A
and B is one wavelength.
[Explanation must be shown to obtain 1 mark]
CONFIDENTIAL 2
CONFIDENTIAL
λ = BR − AR = 13.2 − 12.5 = 0.700 m

(ii) v = f λ = 470 × 0.700
v = 329 m s−1
(c) Distances of Q from A and B are different.
Since intensity at a position from a point source is inversely proportional to the

square of the distance between them, the intensities of the waves arriving at Q
from A and B are different.
Since intensity is proportional to the square of the amplitude, the amplitude of

the waves arriving from A and B will be different.
Q is a position with destructive interference without complete cancellation of

the waves occurs. Hence the intensity at Q is not zero.
4(a) Electromotive force of a source is the amount of energy converted from

non-electrical forms to electrical energy when unit charge passes through
the source.
The potential difference between two points in a circuit is one volt if one
joule of electrical energy is converted to other forms when one coulomb
of charge moves from one point to the other.
(b) (i) 16
(
1. R = 9.8 × 10 −7 )
( )
2
0.20 × 10−3
R = 78.4 Ω
( 240 )
2
2. P=
78.4
P = 735 W
(ii)
switch A switch B switch C
Lowest OFF ON OFF
Highest ON OFF ON
5(a) 0.430
(b) (i) correct point identified;

(ii) 1
plot correct to ± square;
2
(iii) straight-line with acceptable fit;
(c) (i) some indication that large triangle used;

(points separated by at least half-length of line)
correct value from candidate’s graph;
(ii) intercept identified;
should be 0.32, not 0.38 so graph does not agree;
(d) straight-line with same gradient;
CONFIDENTIAL 3
CONFIDENTIAL
having intercept of 0.32;
CONFIDENTIAL 4
CONFIDENTIAL
Section B
6(a) Moment of a force acts on a rigid body about an axis is the product of
the force and the perpendicular distance between the line of action of
the force and the axis.
(b) (i) Taking moments about the elbow,

Ty x 3.5 = 65 x 10 + 20 x 35
Ty = 385.7 N
T = Ty / cos 20° = 410 N
(ii) Tx = 385.7 / tan 20° = 140.4 N
∑ Fx = 0
Tx = Rx = 140.4 N
∑ Fy = 0
Ty = Ry + 65 + 20
Ry = 385.7 -65 – 20 = 300.7 N
Resultant force acting at elbow (pivot)

= Rx2 + Ry2 = 332 N
State direction
(c) (i) Newton’s second law states that the rate of change of momentum of an
object is directly proportional to the resultant force acting on that object and
has the same direction as the force.
Impulse-momentum theorem states that the impulse imparted to an object is

equal to the change in its momentum.
(ii) Larger change in momentum (higher speed)
Shorter time interval
force exerted on hand equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to the

force on wood
(d) (i) 1 mark for each correct direction
(ii) ∑F = 0
4600 + 600 = 2FP sin10
FP = 15 kN
7(a) The magnetic flux density is defined as the force per unit length per unit
current acting on an infinitely long current carrying conductor placed
perpendicularly to the magnetic field.
CONFIDENTIAL 5
CONFIDENTIAL
The magnetic flux density of a magnetic field is said to be 1 tesla, if the force
acting per unit length on an infinitely long conductor carrying a current of
1 A and placed perpendicularly to the magnetic field is 1 N m−1.
(b) (i) From left to right

(ii) 1. W = mg
= ( ρD AL ) g
( )( )
= 7.9 × 103 1.0 × 10 −6 ( 0.57 )( 9.81)
= 4.42 × 10−2 N
ρ L
2. R = R
A
( 0.57 )
(
= 8.8 × 10 −8 )
(1.0 × 10 )
−6
= 5.02 × 10−2 Ω
(iii) F = BIL = W
V
W =B L
R
WR
V= = 2.16 V
BL
(iv) B-field is very weak.
Moreover W and R is higher in practice (wires are longer), F required is

larger.
(c) (i) correct diagram (directions of B-field and forces)
current in one wire sets-up concentric B-field around itself
second wire is placed with current flowing perpendicularly to the B-field set-up
by first wire, a force is experienced by the second wire
By N3L, the first wire will experience and equal and opposite force to that of
the second wire
Hence the forces on the wires are attractive

(ii) • Infinitely long wire is not possible in practice
• Geometrical arrangement is difficult to maintain (i.e., wires are 1 m apart)
8(a) Photon is a quantum of electromagnetic energy
Photoelectric effect is the emission of electrons …

… when electromagnetic radiation of frequency greater than the threshold
frequency is incident on the surface of a metal.
Threshold frequency is the minimum em radiation frequency that can cause

photoelectric emission on a particular metal.
Stopping potential is the highest negative potential at the collecting plate that
stop even the most energetic photoelectrons.
CONFIDENTIAL 6
CONFIDENTIAL
The energy needed to remove the outermost electron.
(b) (i) Electromagnetic radiation is emitted as photons when electrons losses energy
in the atom. The energy of the photons is hf, f is the frequency of the
radiation.
Spectral lines are discrete with well-defined frequency.
Therefore electrons loss energy in discrete amount in atoms. This is only

possible if electrons in an atom transit between discrete energy level.
(ii) Heating causes the sizable number of ions to be excited, i.e., electrons are at
higher energy levels.
Heating causes the sizable number of ions to be excited, i.e., electrons are at
higher energy levels.
(iii) hc hc hc
1. E = ⇒λ = ⇒ λemission =
λ E ΔE
hc
Shortest wavelength = = 10.6 nm (3 s.f.)
(121.9 − 4.9 ) e
hc
Longest wavelength = = 460 nm (3 s.f.)
( 7.6 − 4.9 ) e
2. Number of spectral lines occurs between two levels, number of ways to

produce spectral lines is 5 C2
Number of spectral lines is 10.
3.
Approx. correct position for spectral lines (5 → 1) and (5 → 4) at 10 nm and

460 nm.
Approx. correct relative position for spectral lines (5 → 2) and (5 → 3).
3 other lines very close and to the right of (5 → 1) spectral line.
2 other lines slightly further and increasing wavelength to the right of (5 → 2)

spectral line.
(c) (i) 122 eV
(ii) Work function is the energy to remove delocalised electrons in the conduction
band.
Ionisation energy is the energy to remove electrons in an energy level of an

atom.
The conduction band occupies energies higher than the discrete energy
levels in an atom.
Therefore less energy is required to remove delocalised electrons.
CONFIDENTIAL 7
CONFIDENTIAL
CONFIDENTIAL 8
1
ST. ANDREW’S JUNIOR COLLEGE

JC2 2010
Preliminary Examinations
PHYSICS, Higher 1 8866/01

Paper 1
22nd September 2010 1 hour

(1400 Hrs – 1500 Hrs)
Additional Materials: Optical Mark Sheet (OMS)

Write your name, Civic Group and index number on the separate Optical Mark Sheet (OMS).
There are thirty questions in this paper. Answer all the questions. For each question there are four
possible answers A, B, C, D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Optical
Mark Sheet (OMS).
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer. Any rough
working should be done in this booklet.
Instructions for using the Optical Mark Sheet (OMS)
Class no.
Write your
numbers here
Register no.
1. Fill in your class number (e.g. 09A01 = "01", 09S22 = “22”) in the first two rows.
2. Fill in your class register number in the next two rows. (e.g. register number 1 is filled in as
"01").
3. Write your class and register numbers into the column on the left (ie. 0101)
For Official Use
Paper 1 / 30 Paper 2 / 80
Total / 110 Percentage / 100 Grade
This Question Paper consists of 12 printed pages
SAJC 2010 Prelims/8866/01 [Turn Over

2
Data
elementary charge, e = -1.60 x 10-19 C
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = u t + ½ a t2
v2 = u2 + 2 a s
hydrostatic pressure, p =ρgh

resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1 / R1 + 1 / R2 + ..

3
1 A quantity x is measured many times and the number N of measurements is plotted

against x. The true value of the quantity is x0. Which graph best represents precise
measurements with poor accuracy?
A B C D
2 A stationary rocket is fired horizontally and travels a distance of (100 ± 1) m. If the

acceleration of the rocket is constant at (23.1 ± 0.5) m s-2, what would be its final
velocity at the end of the distance covered?
A (68 ± 1) m s-1
B (67.9 ± 1.0) m s-1
C (68.0 ± 1.1) m s-1
D (67.97 ± 1.08) m s-1
3 Frankie throws a small rubber ball vertically downwards at a speed of 3.0 m s-1. It hits
the ground and rebounds vertically. The graph below shows the velocity-time graph
for the first 1.7 s of the motion of the rubber ball.
v / ms-1
8
time / s
0 0.6 1.5 1.7
-3
-9
Fig. 3
What is the displacement of the ball between the point at which it was first thrown
and the highest point of the motion?
A zero
B 1.8 m
C 3.6 m
D 7.2 m

4
4 A device launches two identical balls, x and y, simultaneously in a horizontal direction

from the same height, as shown in the diagram below. The results are as indicated.
Launch device
x y
Fig. 4 (not to scale)
Which statement correctly describes what happens?
A x hits the ground before y as it is closer to the launch site.

B y hits the ground before x as it has a higher launch velocity.
C x and y hit the ground simultaneously with the same velocity.
D x and y hit the ground simultaneously with different velocities.
5 Three balls A, B and C, each move in different directions, as indicated by the vector v.
They then experience the same acceleration in the upward direction. Which of the
following is true about their respective speeds?
a a v a
v
A B C
v
Ball A Ball B Ball C
Fig. 5
Ball A Ball B Ball C

A increases increases increases
B increases increases decreases
C no change increases increases
D no change no change decreases

5
6 A force F is applied to a body of mass m on a smooth inclined plane as shown. The

body moves up along the inclined plane with uniform acceleration. The magnitude of
the resultant force acting on the body upwards along the incline is
F
φ
θ mg
Fig. 6
A F sin φ – mg sin θ
B F cos φ – mg sin θ
C mg cos θ – mg sin θ
D - F cos φ + mg sin θ
7 Which of the following statement concerning momentum is correct?
A Momentum is a scalar quantity.

B Momentum is proportional to the rate of change of force.
C Newton’s third law can be used to derive the principle of conservation of
momentum.
D When a small mass collide with a large mass and they coalesce, momentum
is not conserved.
8 In which of the following situations can a person experience weightlessness?
A A parachutist descending at terminal velocity with the parachute fully open.

B An astronaut propelled vertically in the initial stage of his journey, with the
rocket engines burning.
C An athlete clearing the bar in a high jump event.
D A Naval Diver equipped so that he remains at a constant depth below the
water surface without any effort on his part.
9 What is not true of two forces that give rise to a couple?
A They act in opposite directions.

B They both act at the same point.
C They both act on the same body.
D They both have the same magnitude.

6
10 The diagram shows the force against extension for a wire. When the force is 60 N,
the extension of wire is 3.4 mm. The energy stored when the wire is extended by
1 mm from its initial length is
force/ N
60
extension/ mm
3.4
Fig. 10
A 0.0088 J C 29.9 J
B 0.102 J D 102 J
11 A man drives along a straight road from right to left with a constant speed and tosses
a coin vertically upwards. If effects of air resistance are significant, which diagram
best represents the trajectory of the coin seen by a stationary observer?
A B
C D

7
12 A boat moving at constant speed v through still water experiences both water drag
force, F1 and force of air resistance, F2. What power does the boat engine supply?
A (F1 + F2) v C (F1 + F2) v2

B (F1 − F2) v D 1
(F1 + F2) v
2
13 A body moves from X to Y along a track. Its kinetic energy at Y is 25 J, and its
potential energy is 30 J more than at X. If the work done by friction on the body along
XY is 10 J, what is the original kinetic energy of the body at X?
Y
X
Fig. 13
A 35 J B 45 J C 55 J D 65 J
14 A block of mass 4 kg is released at point P on a curved frictionless track as shown.

The block slides down a vertical distance of 80 cm and strikes a spring at the end of
the track. If the elastic constant of the spring is 350 N m-1, find the maximum
compression of the spring.
P
wall
80 cm spring
Fig. 14
A 8.97 cm B 17.9 cm C 29.9 cm D 42.4 cm
15 The diagram shows a transverse wave on a rope. The wave is travelling from left to
right. The phase difference between P and Q is
P Q
Fig. 15
π π
A B C π D 2π
4 2

8
16 The energy carried by a wave is proportional to
A the square of the wave’s amplitude.

B the square of the wave’s intensity.
C the square root of the wave’s intensity.
D the wave’s amplitude.
17 A cylindrical glass tube with both ends open is closed at one end by covering it with a
thick metal sheet as shown below. The fundamental resonant frequency is found to
be 280 Hz.
Metal sheet
Glass tube
Fig. 17
If the metal sheet is now removed, what is the new fundamental frequency of the
resulting open tube?
A 140 Hz B 280 Hz C 420 Hz D 560 Hz
18 Wave generators S1 and S2 generate waves of equal wavelength which then arrive at
a point P. At P, S1 by itself produces an oscillation of amplitude a and S2 produces an
oscillation of amplitude 2a, and there is a phase difference of 2π radians between the
oscillations.
Which of the following graphs best represents the resultant oscillation at P when both
generators are switched on?
displacement displacement
a time a time
−a −a
A C
3a
a time time
−a
−3a
B D

9
19 A standing wave is set up on a stretched string PS as shown in the diagram.
antinode
x x
P Q R S
Fig. 19
The vibrations of the two points Q and R, shown on the string have
A different amplitude and are in anti-phase.
B different amplitude and are in phase.
C the same amplitude and are in anti-phase.
D the same amplitude and are in phase.
20 Fig. 20a shows a circuit with battery of EMF, E connected to identical bulbs of
resistance, R. An additional identical bulb, D, was added to the circuit as shown in
Fig. 20b. Which bulbs will become brighter or dimmer?
A A
B C B C D
Fig. 20a Fig. 20b
Bulb A Bulbs B & C
A Brighter Brighter
B Brighter Dimmer
C Dimmer Dimmer
D Dimmer Brighter
21 The diagram shows two resistors connected in a circuit in which a current of 1.5 A is
flowing. What is the current in the 1.8 Ω resistor?
1.8 Ω
1.5 A
0.2 Ω
Fig. 21
A 0.15 A B 1.35 A C 1.5 A D 2.7 A

10
22 A 24-ohm resistor radiates 12 W. A 16-ohm resistor in parallel with it will radiate
A 8W B 12 W C 18 W D 24 W
23 A resistor is made from two equal lengths of wire of the same resistivity joined in
series. The first wire X has twice the diameter of the second wire Y. When a current
flows through the resistor, what is the potential difference across X as a fraction of
the total potential difference across the resistor?
1 1 4 1
A B C D
5 4 5 2
24 A 10 Ω resistor is connected across three identical cells each having an e.m.f. of

1.5 V and internal resistance of 3 Ω.
10 Ω
Fig. 24
What is the current flowing through the resistor?
A 0.079 A B 0.12 A C 0.14 A D 1.7 A
25 The figure shows the path taken by an electron as it enters a region of magnetic field
directed downwards into the plane of the paper. Which of the indicated paths is the
one taken by the electron in the magnetic field?
× A × × × B×
Electron entering
× × × × ×
magnetic field
× × × × × D
× × × × ×
× × × × ×
C
Fig. 25

11
26 Two long straight wires, X and Y, are placed perpendicularly to each other at a small
distance apart. The current in wire X is flowing into the page and the current in wire Y
is flowing to the right.
Wire X
x
Wire Y
P
Fig. 26
What is the direction of the force acting on wire Y at point P due to the magnetic field
produced by wire X?
A out of the page

B into the page
C upwards
D downward
27 Two long straight and parallel wires carrying currents in the same direction separate
the surrounding space into three regions 1, 2 and 3. In which region(s) can there be a
neutral point (i.e. a point of zero magnetic field)?
Region 1 I1
Region 2 I2
Region 3
Fig. 27
A Region 2 only.
B Both regions 1 and 3.
C Either region 1 or region 3 but not both.
D There are no neutral points.
28 A student connects a photocell to a supply and finds that when the cell is exposed to
monochromatic radiation a current flows only when the potential difference across
the cell is less than 1.6 V. What is the maximum energy of the emitted electrons?
A 1.0 x 10–19 J
B 2.6 x 10–19 J
C 4.8 x 10–11 J
D 1.6 J
29 Which of the following statements, referring to photoelectric emission, is always true?
A No emission of electrons occurs for very low intensity illumination.

B For a given metal there is a minimum frequency of radiation below which no
emission occurs.
C The velocity of the emitted electrons is proportional to the intensity of the
incident radiation.
D The number of electrons emitted per second is independent of the intensity of
incident radiation.

12
30 The diagram shows the energy levels of a gas atom.
____________________ 0 J
____________________ -2.4 x 10-19 J
____________________ -5.4 x 10-19 J
____________________ -21.8 x 10-19 J
Fig. 30
A free electron of kinetic energy of 20.0 x 10-19 J collides with the cool gas atoms.
What is the kinetic energy of the free electron after the collision?
A 1.8 x 10-19 J
B 3.6 x 10-19 J
C 5.4 x 10-19 J
D 16.4 x 10-19 J
- End of Paper -

1
Class Index Number Name

09
ST. ANDREW’S JUNIOR COLLEGE

JC 2 2010
Preliminary Examinations
PHYSICS, Higher 1 8866/02

Paper 2 Structured Questions
20th September 2010 2 hours

(1400 Hrs – 1600 Hrs)
Candidates answer all questions on the Question Paper.

Write your name, index number and Civics Group on all the work you hand in.
Section A
Section B
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question.
Section A / 40
Section B / 40
Total / 80

2
Data
elementary charge, e = -1.60 x 10-19 C
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = u t + ½ a t2
v2 = u2 + 2 a s
hydrostatic pressure, p =ρgh

resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1 / R1 + 1 / R2 + ..

3
Section A
Answer all the questions in the space provided.
1 A boom is used to enable a person to move heavy loads. A typical arrangement is as shown.
rope
cable
Fig. 1.1
A steel cable is attached to the top of the boom and the floor, a certain distance behind the
boom, such that the cable makes an angle of 45º to the horizontal, as shown in Fig. 1.1. The
uniform boom has a mass of 45 kg and length 3 m.
A human operator exerts a force F of 120 N horizontally at a distance of 0.75 m away from
the hinge, as measured along the boom. The system is in equilibrium.
(a) State the conditions for a body to be in equilibrium. [ 2 ]
…………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………………...
(b) Show that the tension, T, in the cable connecting the top of the boom to the floor is
4.1 kN. [ 2 ]

4
(c) Determine the magnitude of the force exerted on the hinge by the boom.
Force = ………………………. N [ 3 ]
2 (a) In a YOG cross-country cycling event, a competitor cycles up a slope inclined at 37o
at a steady speed of 13 m s-1. The total mass of the bicycle and the rider is 80 kg.
The total resistive force acting on the bicycle and the rider is 75 N. Find the power
required to sustain this speed.
Power = ……………………….. W [ 3 ]
(b) Discuss the energy changes of the rider as he travels up the slope mentioned in (a).
[ 3 ]
…………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………………...

5
3 For a hypothetical electronic device, the potential difference V, measured across the device,
is related to the current I by
V = 355 I 2
(a) (i) Explain whether the device obeys Ohm’s Law. [1]
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
(ii) Determine the resistance of the device when the current is 240 mA.
Resistance = ………………….. Ω [ 2 ]
(b) When the lights of a car are switched on, an ideal ammeter in series with them reads
10.0 A and an ideal voltmeter connected across them reads 12.0 V. (See Fig. 3.1)
The internal resistance of the battery is 50.0 mΩ.
50.0 mΩ
Fig. 3.1
(i) Show that the EMF of the battery is 12.5 V. [1]

6
(ii) With both switches turned on, the ammeter reading now drops to 8.00 A and
the voltmeter reading decreases to 9.6 V. Calculate the current through the
starting motor when the lights are on.
Current = ……..……………..A [ 3 ]
4 A uniform wire of length 62.0 cm and mass 13.0 g is suspended by a pair of flexible leads in
a magnetic field B of 440 mT. A current is passed through the wire such that the tension T
in the supporting leads is zero.
x x x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x
B Flexible
leads
x x x x x
x T x x x T x
62 cm wire
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) Draw in Fig. 4.1 the direction of the current in the wire. [1]
(ii) Determine the magnitude of the current through the wire.
Current = ……………..……. mA [ 2 ]

7
(b) “If a current-carrying conductor does not experience any magnetic force when placed
stationary in a region of space, there is no magnetic field in that region.”
Discuss the validity of the above conclusion that there is no magnetic field in that
region of space. [ 2 ]
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
5 (a) De Broglie discovered that when he passed fast-moving electrons through a crystalline
solid, diffraction images obtained were similar to those found in diffraction experiments
using X-rays ( λ = 10 – 10 m) through crystalline solids. Explain what can be deduced
from this experiment concerning
1. the nature of electrons. [ 1 ]
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
2. separation of the atoms of the crystalline solid. [ 1 ]
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
(b) One such electron has a kinetic energy of 1 x 10-18 J. Calculate
(i) the speed of the electron,
Speed = ……………………. m s -1 [ 1 ]
(ii) the wavelength of the electron.
Wavelength = ………………………….. m [ 2 ]

8
6 A mass M is moving at 5.00 ms-1 along a horizontal frictionless guide which bends into a
vertical circle of radius r, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
r
M
A
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2 and Fig. 6.3 show the velocity-time graphs for the vertical and horizontal
components respectively of the velocity along the section ABC of the curve.
Fig.6.2

9
Fig. 6.3
(a) With the aid of Fig. 6.2, determine an appropriate value for the height of the vertical
circle.
height of vertical circle = ……………………….. m [ 2 ]

10
(b) (i) From Fig. 6.2 and Fig. 6.3, determine the vertical and horizontal components of
the acceleration of the mass M at B, 200 ms after it passes the point A.
vertical component of the acceleration = ……………………….. ms-2 [ 1 ]
horizontal component of the acceleration = ……………………….. ms-2 [2]
(ii) Hence, determine the magnitude and the direction of the resultant
acceleration of the mass M at B.
magnitude of acceleration = ……………………….. ms-2 [ 1 ]
direction of acceleration = ………………………………………… [ 2 ]
(c) Without detailed mathematical calculations, deduce the total area between the curve
and the time axis of Fig. 6.3. Explain your answer. [2]
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………

11
Section B
Answer any two questions from this section.
7 (a) Frankie released a 15.0 g rubber ball from a height of 10.0 m from a classroom block
above a flat ground. Assume that air resistance is negligible.
(i) How long does it take for the ball to reach the ground?
time = ………..………… s [ 2 ]
(ii) Assuming that the ball does not lose any energy during the bounce, sketch and
label the acceleration versus time graph of the ball, starting from the release of
the ball to the third time that the ball hits the ground. [ 3 ]
a /m s-2
t/s
(iii) State one change in the a-t graph above if the ball loses some energy as it
bounces off the ground. [ 1 ]
…..……………………….…………………………………………………………………..
…..……………………….…………………………………………………………………..

12
(iv) Calculate the speed of the ball just before it hits the ground.
Speed = …………………………. m s-1 [ 2 ]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows how the force F on the rubber ball in (a) varies with time t when the ball
first hits the hard ground and rebounds. The kinetic energy of the ball after the collision
is the same as it was before the collision.
F/N
F1
t / ms
0 0.8 1.6
Fig. 7.1
(i) State the quantity that is obtained by determining the area under the graph in
Fig. 7.1. [ 1 ]
……………………………………………………………………………………………..
(ii) Using Fig. 7.1 and your answer in (a)(iv), determine the maximum force F1 that
was applied by the ground on the ball during its rebound.
F1 = ………………………… N [ 3 ]

13
(c) Frankie decides to throw the same rubber ball at a velocity of 22 m s-1 at an angle of
35o below the horizontal, aiming at a 450.0 g toy truck placed 9.9 m below him on the
ground, as shown in Fig. 7.2 below.
35o
9.9 m
Classroom
block
tray
truck
Fig. 7.2
(i) State the principle of conservation of momentum. [ 2 ]
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
(ii) Calculate the vertical velocity of the ball just before it hits the toy truck.
Vertical velocity = ……………………… m s-1 [ 2 ]

14
(iii) If the ball hits the base of the tray on top of the toy truck, determine their common
velocity when they move off together after the impact. (Assume that there is no
friction acting on the truck initially).
Velocity = ……………………… m s-1 [ 2 ]
(iv) How should Frankie hit the truck with his rubber ball so that the truck moves off
with a higher velocity than the one calculated in (c)(iii) ? [ 2 ]
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………….

15
8 (a) State and explain two differences between sound waves and electro-magnetic (EM)
radiation. [4]
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
………..…………………………………………………………………………………………
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows Graph A, which is the displacement-distance graph at time t = 0 s of
a progressive wave. Graph B represents the displacement-distance graph of the
same wave at t = 0.1 s.
Fig. 8.1

16
(i) State the amplitude of Graph A at t = 0 s.
Amplitude = …………….……. cm [ 1 ]
(ii) State the wavelength of the progressive wave.
Wavelength = ..………….………. cm [ 1 ]
(iii) On Graph B, draw a dot (labelling it Q), to represent the position of P when
t = 0.1 s. [1]
(iv) Determine the phase difference between Graph A and Graph B, and hence
compute the period of the wave.
Phase difference = ……..……………… [ 1 ]
Period = ……….…….…..…. s [ 2 ]
(v) Hence or otherwise, sketch displacement-time graph of particle P, starting

from t = 0 s for one complete cycle. Indicate Q on your sketch.
[ 4 ]
Displacement /cm
Time/ s

17
(c) A long freight train on a straight track can be treated as a line source emitting a
cylindrical expanding sound wave. Assuming that the air absorbs no energy, show
that the amplitude, A of the wave is dependent on the distance from the source, r in
1
the relationship, A α [ 2 ]
r
(d) A spherical sound source is placed at P1 near a reflecting wall AB and a microphone
is located at point P2, as shown in Fig. 8.2. The frequency of the sound source is
variable. When the sound reflects off the wall, there is no phase change on reflection;
the angle of incidence equals the angle of reflection.
Fig. 8.2
(i) Show that the length of the dashed path from P1 to P2 travelled by sound
waves reflected off AB is 34.08 m. [1]

18
(ii) Determine the lowest frequency for which the sound intensity, as observed at
P2, will be a maximum.
Frequency = ……..….……….. Hz [ 3 ]

19
9 (a) The figure below represents the lowest energy levels of the mercury atom with the
corresponding quantum number, n, and energy measured in eV.
Energy
n
– 1.56 eV
5
– 2.48 eV
4
– 3.71 eV
3
– 5.52 eV
2
– 10.4 eV
1
Fig. 9.1
Considering transitions between only these 5 levels, state
(i) The total number of possible emission transitions that can be produced.
Number = .………..………….. [ 1 ]
(ii) The spectral transition that has the shortest wavelength.
From level ……… to level ……… [ 1 ]
(b) Cool mercury vapour (with energy levels like that of Fig. 9.1) at low pressure is
bombarded with electrons of kinetic energy E. State the transition(s), if any, that
would be observed if E has the value of
(i) 4.00 eV : …………………………………………………………………………. [ 1 ]
(ii) 7.00 eV : …………………………………………………………………………. [ 1 ]
(iii) Instead of an electron, a photon of energy 7.00 eV is incident on the mercury

atom in the ground state. Which transitions, if any, would be made by the
electron in the ground state? Explain your answer. [ 2 ]
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..

20
(c) A student commented that ionization energy and work function are the same since
both involve the removal of electrons. Discuss whether you agree with the statement.
[ 2 ]
…………….……………………………………………………………………………………
…………….……………………………………………………………………………………
…………….……………………………………………………………………………………
(d) A monochromatic light source with a power output of 0.50 W and a wavelength of
480 nm is incident on a cold metal surface in a vacuum tube. The light is incident on
a metal surface which has a work function of 4.7 eV.
(i) Calculate the rate of emission of photons from the light source.
Rate of emission = …..………………….. [ 2 ]
(ii) Explain whether photoelectrons are emitted. [ 2 ]
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………..

21
(iii) Assuming that the radiation is incident normally to the metal surface of area
4.13 × 10 – 7 m2, calculate the radiation pressure on the surface.
Radiation pressure = …………………. N m-2 [ 4 ]
(e) The emitted photoelectrons in a photoelectric experiment are collected at the

adjacent electrode of the same metal. The photoelectric current I depends on the
frequency f of the incident light, the potential difference V between collector and
emitter, and the incident power P. Draw sketch graphs to show
(i) How I varies with V, with P and f remaining constant. [ 2 ]
(ii) Suggest and explain what will happen to the graph if the metal is replaced by
another metal with a higher work function. [ 2 ]
………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………….
[End of Paper]

1
SAJC JC2 Preliminary Exams (H1 Physics) 2010

Suggested Solutions
Paper 1 (MCQs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B A A D B B C C B A
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
D A D D C A D D D B
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A C A C C B A B B B
Paper 2 (Structured)
Section A
1 (a) Net force in all directions is zero. [1]

Net moment about any axis or point is zero. [1]
(b)
T sin 15O
200 x 9.81
F sin 60O
45 x 9.81
Taking moments about the hinge,

(T sin 15º × 3) + (120 × 0.75 sin 60º) [1]
= (45 × 9.81 × 1.5 sin 30º) + (200 × 9.81 × 3 sin 30o) [1]
Æ T = 4.1 kN (shown)
(c) Consider vertical equilibrium,

Hy = (45 × 9.81) + (200 × 9.81) + T cos 45o , where T = 4.1 kN [1]
Hy = 5.3 kN (upwards)
Consider horizontal equilibrium

Hx = 120 + T sin 45 º = 3.0 kN (rightwards) [1]
H = H x + H y = 6.1 kN
2 2
[1]
Magnitude of the force the hinge exerts on the boom is 6.1 kN
SAJC 2010 H1 Prelims solutions
2
2 (a) ΣF = 0 (steady speed)

Fmotor – FR – mg sin 370 = 0
Fmotor – 75 – 80(9.81)(sin 370) = 0 [1]
Fmotor = 547.3 N [1]
∴P = Fv = (547.3)(13) = 7110 W [1]
(b) Chemical energy in cyclist

is converted into gravitational PE of the cyclist system,
while remaining energy is to do work against resistive force (to maintain the
speed). [3]
3 (a) (i) The device does not obey Ohm’s Law, which states that for a conductor
at constant temperature, the current in the conductor is directly
proportional to the potential difference across it. For this device, I is not
directly proportional to V [1]
(ii) When I = 0.240 A,

V = 355(0.240)2
= 20.448 V [1]
R = V/I
= 20.448 / 0.240
= 85.2 Ω [1]
(b) (i) E = Ir + V
= (10.0)(0.05) + 12 [1]
= 12.5 V
(ii) E = Ir + V
12.5 = Itotal (0.05) + 9.6 [1]
Itotal = 58 A
Itotal = Imotor + Ilights [1]

Imotor = 58 – 8
= 50 A [1]
4 (a) (i) left-to-right [1]
(ii) F = B I L sin θ
mg =BIL
I = (0.013)(9.81) / [(0.440)(0.620)] [1]
= 0.467 A = 467 mA [1]
(b) A stationary current-carrying conductor placed parallel to a magnetic field will not
experience a magnetic force. Hence, the conclusion is not valid. [2]
3
5 (a) 1. Electrons exhibit wave-like nature as diffraction is a wave property. [1]
2. Significant diffraction occurs when the wavelength is similar in the order

of magnitude as the separation between the crystal atoms. Since
wavelength of x-ray is of the order of 10 – 10m, hence the separation of
atoms in the crystalline solid is of the order 10 – 10m. [1]
(b) (i) KE = ½ mv2 Æ v =

2 KE
=
(
2 1 × 10 −18 )
m 9.11 × 10 −31
v = 1.5 x 106 m s-1 [1]
h 6.63 × 10 −34
λ= =
( )( )
(ii) [1]
mv 9.11 × 10 −31 1.5 × 10 6
λ = 4.9 × 10 −10 m [1]
6 (a) From Fig. 6.2, area under the graph = vertical displacement traveled from A to C
= height of circle
= 32 x (0.5 x 50x10-3) [1]
= 0.800 m (3 sf) [1]
(b) (i)
ay = (3.5 – 0.4) / (170 – 300)x10-3 = - 23.8 ms-2 (3 sf) [1]
ax = (0 – (-4)) / (100 – 305)x10-3- = - 19.5 ms-2 (3 sf) [2]
4
(ii)
[1]
[1]
The direction of the acceleration is 39.3o south of west. [1]
(c) The total area between the curve and the time axis is zero. [1]
This is because the net horizontal displacement traveled by the mass from A to C
is zero. [1]
Section B
1 2
7 (a) (i) Using s = ut + at
2
1
10.0 = (9.81)t 2 [1]
2
t = 1.43 s [1]
(ii)
For correct shape [1]
a For correct number of bounces [ 1 ]

-2
9.81 ms
For correct labeling of timing at first
bounce [1]
1.43 s t
5
(iii) The horizontal part of the graph will get shorter with each consecutive bounce.
OR
The peak negative acceleration gets smaller. [1]
(iv) From v2 = u2 + 2 a s,
v2 = 0 + 2 (9.81)(10.0)
Æ v = 14.0 m s-1
(b) (i) Impulse or change in momentum. [1]
(ii) total change in momentum = area under F-t graph
Since total change in momentum = final momentum – initial momentum

and final momentum is equal in magnitude but opposite in direction to initial
momentum, hence
| total change in momentum | = 2 (initial momentum)
= 2 (15.0 x 10-3)(14.0) [1]
Æ 2 (15.0 x 10-3)(14.0) = ½ (1.6 x 10-3)(F1) [1]

Æ F1 = 525 N (3 sf) [1]
(c) (i) For a system of interacting objects, the total momentum of the bodies (ie.
momentum of the system) remains constant, [1]
provided no external resultant force acts on the system. [1]
(ii) Taking downwards as positive,

v2 = u2 + 2 a s
= (22 sin 35o)2 + 2 (9.81)(9.9) [1]
v = 18.8 m s-1 [1]
(ii) By conservation of momentum,

m1 u1 + m2 u2 = (m1 + m2) v
(0.015)(22 cos 35o) + 0 = (0.465)(v) [1]
Æ v = 0.581 m s-1 [1]
(iv) To impact a greater momentum to the truck so that it moves off with a higher
velocity, the ball should strike the truck and rebound off the truck (i.e. should
not be collected in the tray of the truck). [2]
Q8 (a) Sound waves are longitudinal waves; EM waves are transverse waves. [1]
The particles of longitudinal waves oscillate parallel to the direction of the

propagation of the waves while the particles of transverse waves oscillate
perpendicular to the direction of the propagation of the waves. [1]
Sound waves are mechanical waves while EM waves are electromagnetic waves.
[1]
Mechanical waves require a material medium for their propagation while EM waves
do not require a material medium for their propagation. [1]
6
(b) (i) 1 cm [1]
(ii) 2 cm [1]
(iii) Q directly below P [1]
(iv) Phase difference = (0.25/2) X 2π = π/4 [1]
0.1 / Period = (π/4) / 2π [1]
Period = 0.8 s [1]
(v) Labelling of vertical axis – Amplitude = 1 cm [1]
Labelling of horizontal axis – Period = 0.8 s [1]
Drawing of y = cos ωt for one cycle [1]
Correct position of Q at t = 0.1 s, y = 0.7 cm [1]
(c) Intensity = Power / Curved Area of Cylinder

= Power / 2πrL , where L is the length of the train [1]
Since Power and L is constant, and Intensity α A2, A2 α 1/r [1]

1
Aα
r
(d) (i) Reflected Path = √ [ (24.4 + 3.05 + 3.05)2 + (15.2)2 ] = 34.08 m [1]
(ii) Direct path = √ [ (24.4)2 + (15.2)2 ] = 28.75 m [1]
Lowest frequency occurs when

path difference = n x (max wavelength)
(34.08 – 28.75) = 1 x (max wavelength)
Æ max wavelength = 5.33 [1]
Æ Lowest frequency = 330 / 5.33 = 61.9 Hz [1]
7
9 (a) (i) 10 transitions [1]
(ii) shortest wavelength implies largest frequency. Transition which emits photon
of highest frequency is from level 5 Æ 1. [1]
(b) (i) No transition will be observed. [1]
(ii) from 3 Æ 1 , 3 Æ 2 , 2 Æ1 [1]

(No marks given if student gives any transition for absorption , e.g. 1 Æ3)
(iii) No transitions will be made. [1]

The incoming photon must be absorbed entirely or not at all. However, no
energy transition is exactly 7.00 eV. [1]
(c) Ionisation energy is the energy needed to free an outermost electron from the atom,
[ 1 ] whereas work function is the energy needed to free the free electrons from the
metal surface. [ 1 ]
(d) (i)
nhf n hc
P= = ( )
t t λ
n Pλ 0.50(480 × 10 −9 )
= = [1]
t hc 6.63 × 10 −34 (3 × 10 8 )
= 1.21×1018 [1]
(ii) Photoelectrons will be emitted if f > fo

c 3 × 10 8
Frequency of the radiation is = = = 6.25 × 1014 Hz
λ 480 × 10 −9
Threshold frequency, fo = 4.7eV × 1.6 × 10 -19 ÷ 6.63 × 10 – 34

= 1.13 × 10 – 15 [1]
Since f < fo, no photoelectrons will be emitted. [1]
8
(iii)
Total change in momentum n(2 p)
F= = [1]
t t
h
p=
λ
2nh 2(1.21 × 1018 )(6.63 × 10 −34 )
F= = [1]
tλ 480 × 10 −9
F = 3.343 × 10 −9 N [1]
F
P= = 3.343 × 10 −9 ÷ 4.13 × 10 − 7 = 8.09 × 10 −3 Pa [1]
A
(e) (i)
shape of graph: [ 1 ] ; labelling: [ 1 ]
(ii) With a lower stopping potential, [1]
graph will shift right [1]
‐ End of solutions ‐
1
SERANGOON JUNIOR COLLEGE

General Certificate of Education Advanced Level
Higher 1
NAME
CG INDEX NO.
PHYSICS 8866
Preliminary Examination 26 August 2010
Paper 1 Multiple Choice 1 hour
Additional Materials: Optical Mark Sheet (OMS)
READ THIS INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your name, civics group and index number in the spaces at the top of this page.
There are thirty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are
four possible answers labeled A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the OMS.
Read the instructions on the OMS very carefully.
Any rough working should be done in this question paper.
Section A
Total / 30
This document consist of 14 printed pages and no blank page
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

DATA AND FORMULAE
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 x 108 m s1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 x 1019 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 x 1034 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 x 1027 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 x 1031 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 x 1027 kg
acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s2
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + ½ at2

v2 = u2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = pV
hydrostatic pressure, p = gh
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

1
1 In a speed test, an engineer has determined the top speed of an automobile to be

240.57 km h-1. The accuracy of his equipment is ±5%.
Which of the following is the correct representation of his results?
A (241 ± 2) km h-1 B (240 ± 10) km h-1

C (241 ± 12) km h-1 D (240.57 ± 12.03) km h-1
Ans: B
V/V = 0.05
V = 0.05 x 240.57
= 10 km h-1
V = (240 ± 10) km h-1
2 A precision engineering company specialises in making small ball bearings which are used in
many office equipment. Each ball bearing is 1.0 mg with an uncertainty of 0.1 mg. Its
diameter is 0.60 cm with an uncertainty of 0.01 cm.
What is the percentage error in the calculated value of its density?
A 12% B 15% C 23% D 29%
Ans: B
 = M/V
= 3M/(4r3)
= 6M/(D3)
/ x 100%
= [M/M + 3D/D] x 100%
= [0.1/1 + 3(0.01/0.60)] x 100%
= 15%
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

2
3 The diagram shows a velocity-time graph.
v / m s-1
24
20
16
12
8
4
t/s
0 1 2 3 4 5
What is the change in displacement during the last 2 seconds of the motion?
A 6m B 24 m C 40 m D 60 m
Ans: C
Area of trapezium = 0.5 (24+16)(2) = 40 m.
4 A stone is thrown upwards and follows a curved path.
Air resistance is negligible.
Why does the path have this shape?
A The stone has a constant horizontal velocity and constant vertical acceleration.
B The stone has a constant horizontal acceleration and constant vertical velocity.
C The stone has a constant upward acceleration followed by a constant downward

acceleration.
D The stone has a constant upward velocity followed by a constant downward velocity.
Ans: A
Any object travelling in free fall without the presence of air resistance would experience
only the force of gravity acting on it. This results in a constant acceleration downwards
hence vertical velocity is not a constant. While the horizontal velocity remains constant as
no net force acts in the horizontal direction.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010 [Turn Over

3
5 Which graph represents the motion of a car that is travelling along a straight road with a
speed that increases uniformly with time?
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
A B
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
Ans: A
For an object to travel with speed constantly increasing it must have constant acceleration.
6 A 1500 kg car and a 6000 kg lorry travel toward each other and collide head on. Both the
car and the lorry continue to move together in the original direction of the lorry with a speed
of 0.2 m s-1. The car and the lorry each exert forces on the other vehicle during the impact.
Which of the following statements is correct regarding the magnitude of the forces each
vehicle exerts on the other?
A The force exerted by the car is greater.

B The force exerted by the lorry is greater.
C The force exerted by both vehicles are the same.
D Not enough information is given to determine which force is greater.
Ans C
By Newton’s third law, the force by lorry on car is equal in magnitude to the force by car on
lorry.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

4
7 As shown below, a helicopter has a load slung at the bottom by means of a cable. The
helicopter is flying horizontally and accelerating in the forward direction.
load
Which of the following diagrams illustrates the resultant force acting on the load correctly?
load load
A B
load load
C D
Ans D
As the load is moving horizontally and accelerating to the left with the Helicopter, by
Newton’s 2nd Law, the acceleration is towards the left. (For those who need more visual
representations, the Vertical component of the Tension is equal in magnitude to the weight
of the load. The only remaining force left is the horizontal component of the Tension
towards the left.)
Tension
load
Weight

5
8 What is the total pressure at the bottom of a long narrow tube inclined at 30° to the
horizontal, and filled with water to a slant height of 80 cm, in the school science laboratory?
The density of water is 1000 kg m-3.
A 4.0 x 103 Pa B 7.8 x 103 Pa

C 1.05 x 105 Pa D 1.09 x 105 Pa
Ans: C
P = pressure due to water + atmospheric pressure
= water g (0.800 sin 30°) + 1.01 x 105
= 1000 x 9.81 (0.800 sin 30°) + 1.01 x 105
= 1.05 x 105 Pa
9 Which of the following describes the centre of gravity of a rigid body?
A The centre of the volume of the object.

B The single point through which the weight of the object acts.
C The point at which all forces must act on the body.
D The single point through which the weight of the object appears to act.
Ans: D
10 What are the conditions for equilibrium, for forces acting on an extended rigid body?
A The algebraic sum of all forces acting on a rigid body must be zero.
B The forces acting on the object must have the same line of action of force.
C The vector sum of all forces acting on a rigid body must be zero.
D None of the above
Ans: D
(the second necessary condition is that the vector sum of all external torques acting on the
body must be zero)
11 0.20 m3 of water is pumped up 10 m vertically in 4 minutes by a motor that is 30% efficient.

Taking the density of water to be 1000 kg m-3, what is the input power to the motor?
A 82 W
B 273 W
C 389 W
D 1635 W
Ans: B
mgh
0.3P =
t
Vgh
=
t
=
1000 0.20 9.8110 
4  60
P = 273 W
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

6
12 An engine accelerates a train carriage along a track by a constant force. Taking friction to
be negligible, which of the graphs below show the variation of the engine power with time?
A P/W
0 t/ms
B P/W
0 t/ms
C P/W
0 t/ms
D P/W
Ans: A 0 t/ms
F = ma (Newton’s 2nd law if mass is constant)

Since F is constant, a is also constant
P = Fv
v = u + at
P = mav
P = mau + ma2t
Since m, a and u are constant, so P is proportional to t, so option A has to be the answer.

7
13 A ball with a initial speed u is projected up along a smooth inclined plane. The plane is tilted
at an angle θ off the horizontal and is of length h. If the ball manages to clear the plane,
during its flight, what is its minimum speed?
A (2u2 – 2gh sin θ)½

B (2gh sin θ – 2u2)½
C cos θ (u2 – 2gh sin θ)½
D can’t be determined, not enough information
Ans: C
Let v be the speed of the ball just after clearing the inclined plane.
Change in K.E. + Change in P.E = 0
½ mv2 – ½ mu2 + mgh sin θ = 0
v2 – u2 + 2gh sin θ = 0
v = (u2 – 2gh sin θ)½
Component of horizontal velocity of v = v cos θ
= cos θ (u2 – 2gh sin θ)½
14 The diagram shows two waves X and Y.
displacement
Wave X
Wave Y
0 time
Wave Y has amplitude 8 cm and frequency 150 Hz.
What are the possible amplitude and frequency of wave X?
amplitude / cm frequency / Hz
A 4 50
B 4 450
C 16 50
D 16 450
Ans: C
Since there are three complete cycle of wave Y in wave X for the same time duration, hence
frequency of wave X is one third that of wave Y, i.e. 150/3 = 50 Hz.
And its amplitude is twice that of wave Y so wave X amplitude

= 8 x 2 = 16 cm.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010
8
15 Light can exhibit all of the phenomena listed.
Which phenomenon can sound not exhibit?
A interference B polarisation
C refraction D total internal reflection
Ans: B
Sound waves are longitudinal waves. Hence polarisation is not evident in sound waves.
16 The diagram shows a standing wave on a string. The standing wave has three nodes N1, N2
and N3.
N1 N2 N3
A All points on the string vibrate in phase.

B All points on the string vibrate with the same amplitude.
C Points equidistant from N2 vibrate with the same frequency and in phase.
D Points equidistant from N2 vibrate with the same frequency and the same amplitude.
Ans: D
A standing wave will have particles in phase with each other in a loop and in anti phase with
particles in the adjacent loop. Hence the particles equidistant from N2 would only have equal
amplitude and not similar phase.

9
17 T is a microwave transmitter placed at a fixed distance from a flat reflecting surface S.
T
R
A small microwave receiver, R, is moved from T towards S along the dotted line and
receives signals of alternate maxima and minima of intensity. The distance between one
maxima and the subsequent minima is 15 mm.
What is the frequency of the microwaves?
A 1.0 × 107 Hz B 1.0 × 1010 Hz
C 5.0 × 107 Hz D 5.0 × 109 Hz
Ans: D 0.25 λ = 15 x 10-3 m

λ = 60 x 10-3 m
v 3 x 108
f= = = 5.0 x 109 Hz
λ 60 x 10 -3
18 The diagram shows two loudspeakers producing sound waves that are in phase.
X
loud
soft
L
d loud
soft
loud
Y
As a student moves from X to Y, the intensity of the note she hears is alternately loud and
soft.
The distance between adjacent loud and quiet regions may be reduced by
A decreasing distance d.
B increasing distance L.
C decreasing the amplitude.
D increasing the frequency.
Ans: D
Using the equation for Young’s double slit experiment, the distance between adjacent
maximum and minimum intensity is given by the variable x.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010
10
λL vL
x= =
d fd
Hence it can be seen that increasing the frequency of the source would reduce the distance
between adjacent loud and soft sounds.
19 Four identical lamps are powered by an e.m.f source. The lamps are brightest when they are
A all arranged in parallel.
B all arranged in series.
C arranged in combination of series and parallel.
D arranged such that there are an equal number of lamps arranged in series and parallel.
Ans: A. The lamps will be brightest when they are all arranged in parallel.
20 Which of the following statements is true about the e.m.f. of a cell?

A It is the electrical force required to move a unit charge within a circuit.
. B It is the electrical power changed into other forms per unit charge within the cell.
C It is the electrical energy supplied per unit current by the cell.
D It is the electrical energy supplied per unit charge by the cell.
Ans: D. It is the electrical energy supplied per unit charge by the cell.
21 A 12 V cell with internal resistance is connected in series with five identical 500 resistors.
Focusing on a charge Q moving in the circuit, which of the following statements is correct?
A The energy dissipated in the five resistors is less than 12Q.
B The energy dissipated in the five resistors is equal to 12Q.
C The energy dissipated in the cell is equal to 12Q.
D The energy dissipated in the cell is more than 12Q.
Ans: A
Energy dissipated in the cell and resistors equal to 12Q. Thus, energy dissipated in the resistors
less than 12Q.
22 The effective resistance of resistors arranged in parallel

A increases when one resistor is removed.
B decreases when one resistor is removed.
C may increase or decrease when one resistor is removed, depending on the maximum
resistance value of the resistors.
D may increase or decrease when one resistor is removed, depending on the minimum
resistance value of the resistors.
Ans: A. The effective resistance of resistors arranged in parallel increases when one resistor is
removed.

11
23 Which of the following statements describes the correct property of a thermistor?

A The resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature of the surroundings.
B The resistance of a thermistor changes with light intensity of the surroundings.
C The resistance of a thermistor changes depending whether it is connected in series or
parallel.
D A thermistor allows electric current to flow in one direction only.
Ans: A. The resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature of the surroundings.
24 Three parallel conductors X, Y and Z carrying equal current are placed at the corners of an
equilateral triangle as shown below.
A
D
B C Y
Z
A fourth wire P carrying two times the current of the other wires is placed midway between
the straight line joining A to C.
What is the most probable direction of the resultant magnetic field passing through the fourth
wire due to X, Y and Z?
Ans: C
The resultant magnetic field of X and Z points perpendicular to the line XZ and the resultant
field due to Y points at a small angle anticlockwise from line XZ. The resultant field due to Y
is weaker than the combined field of X and Z as it is further away from P. Hence, resultant
field is most likely to be C.
25 A positively charged sphere hanged from the ceiling by an insulating spring as shown.
Spring
Positively charged
sphere
A magnetic field was then passed through the sphere. The magnetic field alternates between
going perpendicularly into and out of the paper at a rate of 1 cycle per second.
What is the subsequent motion of the sphere?
A Sphere oscillates left and right.
B Sphere oscillates into and out of the plane of the paper.
C Sphere remains stationary.
D Sphere oscillates up and down.
Ans: C
Force acts on moving charge only.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010
12
26 3 parallel straight conductors X, Y and Z carrying currents of I, 2I and I respectively are

placed in the position shown below.
Wire X Wire Y Wire Z
10 cm 10 cm
Which of the following is a correct description of the forces acting on the wires?
A Forces acting on wire Y due to X and Z are equal and opposite and therefore
considered as action-reaction forces.
B Wire Y exerts a larger force on X than Wire X on Y because Wire Y has a larger
current.
C Wire X exerts a larger force on Y than Wire Y on X because Wire Y has a larger
current.
D Wire Y and Z exerts forces equal and opposite on each other.
Ans: D
Forces acting on parallel conductors must be acting on different bodies and are action-
reaction forces and therefore must be of equal magnitude.
27 A piece of cool clean metal is irradiated with U-V light such that photoelectrons are emitted.
How would the maximum kinetic energy, EK, of the photoelectrons emitted and the
photocurrent i change, when a lower intensity of light with the same wavelength is irradiated?
EK i
A decreases decreases
B unchanged decreases
C decreases unchanged
D unchanged unchanged
Ans B
As wavelength of light is not changed, the energy of each photon is the same, hence Ek of
the electrons is unchanged.
As intensity of light source is proportional to the rate of emission of electrons, when
intensity decreases, the photocurrent also decreases.

13
28 In a typical photoelectric effect experiment, monochromatic light is irradiated onto a metal

surface. The graphs below shows the results of how y varies with x.
x
0
What is y and x?
y x
A p.d across emitter and collector frequency of radiation
B Intensity of source frequency of radiation
C photocurrent intensity of source
D photocurrent p.d across emitter and collector
Ans D
29 The intensity of a beam of monochromatic light is doubled. Which one of the following
represents the corresponding change if any in the momentum of each photon of the
radiation?
A increased fourfold B doubled

C the same D halved
Ans C
By de Broglie’s equation
h
p= .

However, changing the intensity of the light source does not change any of the variables in
the equation, therefore the momentum of the photon is unchanged.
30 When a parallel beam of white light passes through a cool vapour of mercury, dark lines
appear in the spectrum of the emergent light. This is principally because the energy is
absorbed and
A is not re-radiated at all.

B is re-radiated as ultra-violet radiation.
C is re-radiated gradually over a long period of time.
D is re-radiated uniformly in all directions.
Ans D
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

1
SERANGOON JUNIOR COLLEGE

General Certificate of Education Advanced Level
Higher 1
NAME
CG INDEX NO.
PHYSICS 8866
Preliminary Examination 20 August 2010
Paper 2 Structured Questions 2 hours

No additional Materials are required.
READ THIS INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your name, civics group and index number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Section A
Section B For Examiner’s Use

Section A
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely
together. 1
The number of marks is given in bracket [ ] at the end of each
2
Section B
Total
This document consist of 22 printed pages and no blank page

For
2 Examiner’s
Use
DATA AND FORMULAE
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 x 108 m s1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 x 1019 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 x 1034 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 x 1027 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 x 1031 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 x 1027 kg
acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s2
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + ½ at2

v2 = u2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = pV
hydrostatic pressure, p = gh
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
1 Examiner’s
Use
Section A
1 Romeo has devised a method to find out how much force a bouncing ball experiences when
it is in contact with the surface from which it bounces. The method consists of dropping the
ball on to the scale pan of a top pan balance as shown in Fig. 1.1. The balance is calibrated
in newtons and Romeo records the maximum reading on the scale, the height from which the
ball is dropped and the height to which it bounces.
Bouncing ball
Metre-rule
top pan balance
Fig. 1.1
Romeo obtains the following information.
Height from which the ball is dropped = 0.70 m

Height to which the ball bounces = 0.55 m
Maximum reading on the balance scale = 40.0 N
The mass of the ball is 0.20 kg
(a) Show that

(i) the speed of the ball when it strikes the scale pan is 3.71 m s-1. [1]
Loss in GPE = Gain in KE

mgh = ½ mv2
gh = = ½ v2
v 2gh  (2)(9.81)(0.70)  3.71 m s-1
(ii) the speed of the ball when it leaves the scale pan is 3.28 m s-1. [1]
Gain in GPE = Loss in KE

For
2 Examiner’s
Use
mgh = ½ mv2
gh = = ½ v2
v 2gh  (2)(9.81)(0.55)  3.28 m s-1
(b) Calculate the total change in momentum of the ball between striking and leaving the
scale pan.
change in momentum = ………………….. N s [2]
Taking upward to be positive
Change in momentum = m(vf – vi ) = (0.20)(3.28 – (-3.71))

= 1.40 N s
(c) Romeo assumes that the contact force between the ball and the scale pan F varies
with time t as shown in Fig. 1.2.
F/N
50
Δt t/s
Fig. 1.2
Determine the contact time Δt.
contact time Δt = ……………… s [2]
Area under F-t graph = change in momentum

½ (Δt)(50) = 1.40
Δt = 0.0559 s
(d) Romeo now drops another ball from the same height on to the scale pan. This ball is
the same mass as the first ball but is made of a harder material. Sketch in Fig. 1.2, the
shape of the graph Romeo might expect to get for this ball. [1]
Award mark when graph has larger maximum F and shorter contact time
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
3 Examiner’s
Use
(e) In practice, while Romeo was carrying out the experiment, the results of the height of
the ball was determined using the metre-rule and his naked eye.
(i) Suggest a method in which Romeo could reduce the errors in his results.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..[1]
Romeo could use a video camera to film the entire fall of the ball and play it in slow
motion to determine the time when the ball instantaneously comes to a stop.
(Other answers may be acceptable)
(ii) Precision, accuracy, systematic, random
Fill in the blanks in the following passage with the some of the words above.
When testing with the same ball, Romeo did not take into account the
compression of the pan when measuring the height of the ball on the rebound.
This introduces a ____________ error which affects the ____________ of his

reading. [2]

For
4 Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) State what is meant by a progressive wave.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
……………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..[2]
A progressive wave is one which energy can be transferred.

Its particles does not propagate in the direction of the wave but vibrates either perpendicular
or parallel to the direction of wave propagation.
(b) Two speakers S1 and S2 produce waves of the same frequency.
(i) State three conditions that must be satisfied for waves from the two sources to
produce audible interference pattern.
1. ………………………………………………………………………………………...………..
……………………………………………………………………………....................................
2. ………………………………………………………………………………………...………..
……………………………………………………………………………....................................
3. ………………………………………………………………………………………...………..
……………………………………………………………………………................................[3]
1. Sources must be coherent.
2. Waves must interfere.
3. Waves must have roughly the same amplitude.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
5 Examiner’s
Use
(ii) One of the speakers, S1, is connected to a signal generator. It is then oriented to
face a wall.
Signal generator wall
Sound waves are produced between the speaker and the wall to form a
stationary wave.
1. Outline how you would use this apparatus to obtain the speed of sound
waves in air.
………………………………………………………………………..……………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………..
………………………………………………………………………..…………………..[3]
Measure separation between (adjacent) nodes / antinodes and double to get

λ/this is ½λ [not between peaks and troughs]
Frequency known from/produced by signal generator OR measured on CRO / by

digital frequency meter.
Detail on measurement of wavelength OR frequency e.g. measure several [if a
number is specified then ≥3] node spacings and divide by the number [not one
several times]
OR measure several (≥3) periods on CRO and divide by the number
OR adjust CRO so only one full wave on screen
Use v = fλ

For
6 Examiner’s
Use
2. In principle stationary waves produced in this way could cause problems for
listeners in a concert hall. Explain why.
………………………………………………………………………..……………………..
………………………………………………………………………..…………………..[1]
Little or no sound /amplitude OR you may be sat at a node
3. In practice this problem is not serious. Suggest a reason why.
………………………………………………………………………..……………………..
………………………………………………………………………..…………………..[1]
Reflected wave not as strong as incident wave.

OR walls are covered to reduce reflections/Absorbs incident waves.
OR waves arrive from elsewhere [reflections/different speakers].
OR such positions depend on wavelength / frequency.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
7 Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) Photoelectric effect is the phenomenon where electrons are emitted from the surface of
a metal when a suitable source of electromagnetic radiation is irradiated on the surface.
(i) Explain the term suitable in the sentence above.
………………………………………………………………………..…………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..………………………..[1]
Suitable refers to the fact that the electromagnetic radiation must have a frequency
above the threshold frequency.
(ii) The variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy Ek of the emitted
electrons is shown in Fig. 3.1.
Ek / 10-19 J
0
0 4 8 12 16 20 f / 1014 Hz
Fig. 3.1
(iii) Use Fig. 3.1 to determine the threshold wavelength of the radiation required for
photoemission.
threshold wavelength = …………………….. nm [2]

From graph,
Threshold frequency, f = 7.6 x 1014
c 3.00  108
Threshold wavelength =  = 395 nm
f 7.6  1014

For
8 Examiner’s
Use
(iv) Draw in Fig. 3.1 a line to show the variation with frequency f of the maximum
kinetic energy Ek of the emitted electrons for a second metal which has a higher
work function than that in what is originally shown. [1]
Award marks only if gradient of two lines are the same and the new line appears on the
right of the original line.
(b) Explain how lines in the emission spectrum of gases at low pressure provide evidence
for discrete electron energy levels in atoms.
………………………………………………………………………..……………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..………………………….[2]
Only radiation of fixed wavelengths are detected in the emission spectrum implying that only
photons of fixed energies are emitted.
These photons emitted correspond to the energy lost by electrons when they de-excite from
a higher energy state to a lower energy state. Hence implying that there are discrete electron
energy levels in atoms.
(c) Three electron energy levels in atomic hydrogen are represented in Fig. 3.2.
1880 nm
Increasing 486 nm
energy
656 nm
Fig. 3.2
The wavelengths of the emission spectral lines produced by electron transitions

between these three energy levels are 486 nm, 656 nm and 1880 nm.
(i) On Fig. 3.2, draw arrows to show the electron transitions between the energy
levels that would give rise to these wavelengths. Label each arrow with the
wavelength of the emitted photon. [2]
Award 2 marks when all arrows and labels are correct.

Deduct 1 mark for each wrong label or direction.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
9 Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Calculate the minimum change in energy of an electron when making transitions
between these levels.
Minimum change in energy corresponds to the emission of photon with the longest
wavelength.
hc
Using E= ,

6.63  10 34  3.00  108
E=
1880  10 9
E = 1.06 x 10-19 J

For
10 Examiner’s
Use
4 Statistics for road traffic accidents are sometimes interpreted as showing that many occur as
a result of speeding or tiredness of the driver. As a result, some countries have introduced
laws to limit the speed at which vehicles may travel and also the length of time a person may
drive without a rest.
Fig. 4.1
In order to enforce these laws, some types of vehicle are fitted with tachographs. A
tachograph records, on a circular chart, amongst other information, the times at which the
vehicle is being driven together with its speed. One such chart from a lorry tachograph is
illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
The time of day, using the 24 hour clock, is shown on the inner scale. Each concentric circle
represents a speed measured in kilometers per hour (km h-1). For example, at time 12.15,
the lorry was travelling at 40 km h-1.
(a) Use Fig. 4.1 to determine
(i) the speed of the lorry at 10.40.
speed = …………………. km h-1 [1]
80 km h-1
(ii) the length of time for which the lorry was in motion between 08.00 to 11.00.
time = …………………. h [1]
1.75 h or 1 hr 45 min
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
11 Examiner’s
Use
(b) Suggest what evidence is provided between the times 08.00 and 13.00 on Fig. 4.1 that
some device on the lorry limits its maximum speed.
………………………………………………………………………..……………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..………………………….[2]
Between 10.15 and 10.30, the lorry accelerates quickly / steeply from rest and seems to
reach a maximum of 80 km h-1 beyond which it is unable to exceed.
Between 10.30 to 12.00, the lorry’s also seems to plateau at 80 km h-1.

Whenever there is a slight reduction of speed from 80 km h-1 the speed of the lorry
immediately spikes upwards suggesting that the lorry driver must have accelerated the lorry
quickly but it was limited only to 80 km h-1 by the device.
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows data for a particular journey.
time of day activity

1800 – 1900 moving at constant speed of 30 km h-1
1900 stop
1930 accelerate to 60 km h-1
1930 – 2120 continue at 60 km h-1
2120 decelerate to 40 km h-1
2120 – 2230 continue at 40 km h-1
Indicate in Fig. 4.1 the journey represented by the information in Fig. 4.2. [3]

For
12 Examiner’s
Use
(d) When the tachograph was switched off, the chart stops rotating and the speed
recorded is the maximum for the chart.
(i) Use Fig 4.1 to determine the time at which the tachogrpah was switched off.
time = …………………. [1]

14.12 – 14.15
(ii) Suggest why, when the tachograph is switched off, it is desirable for the speed
recorded to be the maximum, rather than zero.
………………………………………………………………………..……………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..……………………………..
………………………………………………………………………..………………………….[2]
This is to distinguish the time the lorry is switched off from the time the lorry stops due
to jams or traffic lights.
The maximum speed of 100 km h-1 is used to indicate this since the lorry is only able to
move at a maximum speed of 80 km h-1.
Hence it could only mean that the lorry is swiched off.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
13 Examiner’s
Use
Section B
Answer two questions in this section
5 (a) State the principle of conservation of energy.
…………………………………………………………………………………………..…………
..……………………………………………………………………………………………………
…..…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
Energy can neither be destroyed nor created in any process.
It can be transformed from one form to another, and transferred from one body to
another but the total amount remains constant.
(b) Comment, with a short explanation, the validity of the following statements:
(i) “The work done by a person lowering a weight in his hand at constant speed is
negative.”
…..…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………. [2]
True.
The force by the person on the weight is upwards, whereas the displacement is
downwards.
Thus, work done, which is the force multiplied by the displacement in the direction of
the force, is negative.
(ii) “Work is a scalar quantity and therefore has no direction associated with it.”
…..…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………. [1]
True. Work is the scalar product of two vector components, force and displacement.
Therefore, work is a scalar.
(c) Derive, from the equations of motion, the formula, Ek = ½ mv2 [4]
Consider a body of mass m which moves a displacement s under the action of a

constant force F, starting with initial velocity 0 m s-1 and having a final velocity v m s-1.
It possesses kinetic energy Ek equal to the work done by the force F.

For
14 Examiner’s
Use
The total work done, W = Fs

nd
By Newton’s 2 Law, F = ma, W = mas
The body has been uniformly accelerated from rest to some velocity v, thus
v2 = 02 + 2as
Rearranging as = v2 /2
Substituting above into W = mas:
W = ½ mv2
Hence, Ek = ½ mv2
(d) In Fig. 5.1, Object X, which has a mass of 600 g, with an attached Spring A, is pushed
against Spring B (Both springs are of negligible mass and Object X is not attached to
Spring B), compressing Spring B by 10 cm. Object X is then released. Spring A has a
spring constant of 2.5 x 104 N m-1. Spring B has a spring constant of 3.0 x 104 N m-1.
Object X Rough
Spring A inclined 75 cm Point C
plane
Spring B
350 cm
flat smooth ground

continues for 1 km
Fig. 5.1
(i) Show that the energy stored in Spring B when Object X is released is 150 J.
energy = ……………… J [1]
E = ½ k x2 = ½ (3.0 x 104) (0.10)2 = 150 J
(ii) Object X continues travelling. It goes up a rough plane inclined at 25° at is 1.5 m
long. The frictional force is 0.3 N.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the object at the end of the rough inclined plane.
kinetic energy = ……………… J [2]
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
15 Examiner’s
Use
Final K.E = 150 – (0.6)(9.81)(1.5 sin 25°) – (0.3)(1.5)

= 145.81 m s-1
(iii) The object continues travelling. The rest of the path is smooth. Calculate Object
X’s velocity at point C.
velocity = ………………m s-1 [2]
Loss of G.P.E = Gain in K.E.

(0.6)(9.81)(1.5 sin 25° + 3.5) = Final K.E – 146.3
(0.6)(9.81)(1.5 sin 25° + 3.5) = ½ (0.6)(v2) – 146.3
v = 23.8 m s-1
OR
150 + (3.5)(0.6)(9.81) = ½ (0.6) v2 + (0.3)(1.5)

v = 23.82 m s-1
(iv) 5 cm after passing point C, Object X has a head on collision with Object B which
is moving at 3 m s-1 in the opposite direction. Object B has a mass of 500 g.
Spring A becomes maximally compressed during the collision
Calculate the maximal compression of the Spring A
velocity = ………………m s-1 [3]
By principle of conservation of momentum
mAuA + mB uB = (mA + mB) v

(0.6)(23.8) + (0.5)(-3) = (0.6 + 0.5) v
v = 10.6 m s-1
Energy stored in spring = loss in K.E.

½ k x2 = ½ (0.6)(23.8)2 + ½ (0.5)(3)2 – ½ (1.1)(10.6)2
½ (2.5 x 104)(x2) = ½ (0.6)(23.8)2 + ½ (0.5)(3)2 – ½ (1.1)(10.6)2
x = 0.0940 m
(c) A simplified way to derive the Bernoulli equation is to start from the fact that the change
in the work done on a fluid is equal to the change in the kinetic energy of the fluid.
Constant pressure is applied while work is being done on the fluid.

For
16 Examiner’s
Use
Bernoulli’s equation shows p1 + ½ ρ v12 = p2 + ½ ρ v22, where p1 is the initial pressure,
p2 is the final pressure, v1 is the initial velocity of the fluid, v2 is the final velocity of the
fluid, ρ is the density of the fluid. Note that gas is a fluid.
(i) Derive an expression for the change in the work done on a fluid. [1]
Change in the work done on a fluid = (p1 - p2) ΔV
(ii) Derive Bernoulli’s equation. [2]
Change in the work done on a fluid = Change in the kinetic energy of the fluid
(p1 - p2) ΔV = ½ Δm (v22 - v12)
m
ρ=
V
p 1 - p2 = ½ ρ (v22 - v12)
p1 + ½ ρ v12 = p2 + ½ ρ v22 (shown)
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
17 Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a circuit consisting of seven resistors and an 18 V e.m.f. source.
18 V
5
A B
10 
F E
8 3 2
6 4
Fig. 6.1
(i) Calculate the potential difference across AB.
potential difference = ……………………. V [4]
Effective resistance
= 1/{1/[1/(1/6 + 1/6) + 8] +1/10} + 5
= 10.24 
current = V/R = 18/10.24 = 1.76 A
VAB = IR = 1.76 x 5.23 = 9.22 V
(ii) Calculate the power dissipated in the 8  resistor.
power = ……………………. W [2]

Ans:
current = V/R = 9.22/11 = 0.838 A
P = I2R =0.8382(8) = 5.62 W

For
18 Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Describe the change in your answers in part (a)(i) and (a)(ii) when the wire CE is
removed from the circuit.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………..…………………….[2]
The potential difference across AB will be larger.

The power dissipated in the resistor will be smaller.
(b) A student wants to design a circuit to automatically turn on a 16 V lamp when the
ambient light is low. He is unsure what to do with a 500  resistor and a light
dependent resistor (LDR). The resistance of the LDR varies from 500  to 2500 .
Explain, with clear workings, how he should connect the two components to terminals
AB and CD in Fig. 6.2 for the 16 V lamp to be operating normally.
20 V 0V
A B C D
Fig. 6.2
……..........................………………………………………………............................………………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………………
……..........................………………………………………………..............................………… [4]
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
19 Examiner’s
Use
When ambient light is low, resistance of LDR = 2500 

If LDR at terminals CD,
VCD = 2500/(500+2500) x 20
= 16.7 V
Thus, connect LDR to terminals CD and 500  resistor to terminal AB.
(c) A student finds an unlabelled conductor and conducts an experiment to discover the
variation in voltage and current with time, as shown in Fig 6.3 and Fig. 6.4.
Voltage/ V Current/ mA
1.25
20 0.75
12 0.50
8
Time / s Time / s
2.0 10.0 15.0 2.0 10.0 20.0
Fig. 6.3 Fig. 6.4
(i) Calculate the total amount of charges that flow through the conductor from
time = 0 s to time = 20.0 s.
charges = ……………………. C [2]

Q = current x time
= area under current vs time graph
= [0.75 x 2.0 + 1.25 x 8.0 + 0.5(1.25+0.5)(10.0) ] x 10-3
= 2.03 x 10-2 C

For
20 Examiner’s
Use
(ii) The student claims that the conductor is non-ohmic. Explain whether he is correct
or not.
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………..............................…..[4]
Time = 0 to 2.0 s,
Resistance = 12/(0.75 x 10-3) = 16 x 103 
Time = 0 to 2.0 s,
Resistance = 12/(0.75 x 10-3) = 16 x 103 
At time = 15.0 s,
If resistance is still 16 x 103 , then current = V/R = 8/16 x 103
= 0.5 mA
However, from Fig. 6.4 the current at time = 15.0 s is higher than 0.5 mA. Thus,
resistance is not equal to 16 x 103  from time = 10.0 s onwards.
Therefore, this conductor is non-ohmic.
(iii) Determine the maximum power consumed by the conductor.
maximum power = ……………………. W [2]
Maximum power
= I2R
= (1.25 x 10-3)2 x 16 x 103
= 0.0250 W
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
21 Examin
Use
7 (a) Define magnetic flux density and tesla.
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………............................………
……..........................………………………………………………..............................…[2]
Magnetic field strength (flux density): the force exerted per unit length per unit current
on a conductor placed perpendicularly to the magnetic field.
One tesla is the magnetic flux density of a magnetic field that results in a force of 1 N
on a conductor of length 1 m carrying a current of 1 A, placed perpendicularly in the
field.
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a wire carrying 0.50 mA current passing through a region
consisting of a uniform magnetic field and Earth’s magnetic field.
Direction of Earth’s magnetic

-5
field, BE = 5 x 10 mT
wire
67o
Direction of uniform
magnetic field,
-5
Bp = 6 x 10 mT
Direction of current
100o
of 0.50 mA
Fig. 7.1
Determine the resultant force per unit length acting on the wire due to the
magnetic fields.
resultant force per unit length = ………………… N m-1 [3]

F  BR I L where BR is the resultant flux density perpendicular to the wire
BR  BE cos10  BP sin67  5.99  10 9 T
F
= BR I  5.99  10 9  0.50  10 3  3.00  10 12 N
L
Direction is perpendicularly out of the plane of the paper.

Fo
22 Exami
Us
(c) A current balance hinged at BE can be used to determine the magnetic field
strength of a magnetic field. The setup shown in Fig. 7.2a and Fig. 7.2b consists
of a wire frame of negligible mass in a uniform horizontal magnetic field of
unknown field strength Bu.
The total resistance along section BCD is 70 Ω. Section AF is an insulator.
A B C
F E D
5.0 cm
30.0 cm 10.0 cm
6.0 V 30 Ω
Fig. 7.2a
20o
A B C
F E D
Direction of horizontal
magnetic field Bu
Plan view
Fig. 7.2b
The wire frame was initially horizontal before being placed in the magnetic field.
After being placed in the magnetic field, the balance tilted in a way such that AF
is lower than CD.
A spring of spring constant 10 N m-1 was then attached to AF to pull AF vertically

upwards such that the wire frame is horizontal again.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
23 Examin
Use
The extension of the spring was 0.40 cm.
(i) Determine the spring force acting on AF.
spring force = .............. N [1]

0.40
Fs  10   0.040 N
100
(ii) Determine the current flowing through BCD and state the direction of the
current flow.
current = ................ A
direction ................................................[2]
V 6.0
I   0.060 A
R 30  70
Current flows from D to C to B.
(iii) Determine Bu.
Bv = …………….. T [3]
By principle of moments,
Fs  30  FBC  5.0  FCD  10.0
FBC  BBC I LBC  Bu sin20  0.06  10.0
FCD  BCD I LCD  Bu cos 20  0.06  5.0
Bu  0.312 T
(d) Three parallel wires A, B and C, carrying currents of 6.0 A, 4.0 A and 8.0 A
respectively are placed as shown in Fig. 7.3.
The magnetic field strength created by a current-carrying wire at a distance r

 I
away can be determined by the equation B  0 .
2 r
6.0 A 8.0 A
4.0 A
10.0 cm 5.0 cm
Wire A Wire B Wire C
Fig. 7.3

Fo
24 Exami
Us
(i) State the direction of the resultant force acting on wire A, due to wire B and
C.
.............................................................................................................................[1]
To the right
(ii) Explain your answer in part (i).
……..........................………………………………………………............................
……..........................………………………………………………............................
……..........................………………………………………………............................
……..........................………………………………………………............................
……..........................………………………………………………............................
……..........................………………………………………………............................
……..........................………………………………………………............................
……..........................………………………………………………...........................[4]
To the left of wire A:

BA > BC >BB
The magnetic field strength due to A and C are in the same direction and
opposite to that of B. Resultant field strength is BA + BC -BB.
To the right of wire A:

BA > BC >BB
The magnetic field strength due to A and B are in the same direction and
opposite to that of C. Resultant field strength is BA - BC + BB.
Hence, field strength to the left of A is stronger than that to the right of A.
Wire A experiences a force towards the right.
SRJC 2010 8866/Prelim/2010

For
25 Examin
Use
(iii) Sketch the flux patterns due to wire A and B only in Fig. 7.4. [2]
A B
Fig. 7.4
(e) Two charged particles A and B moved in a uniform magnetic field pointing
perpendicularly out of the plane of the paper as shown in Fig. 7.5.
Direction of
movement of
particle B
Direction of
movement of
particle A
Fig. 7.5
State whether the charges of A and B are positive or negative.
........................................................................................................................[2]
Both charges are positive.

TEMASEK JUNIOR COLLEGE
Higher 1
PHYSICS 8866/01
24 September 2010
1 hour

Write your name and Civics group on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided.
There are thirty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are
four possible answers, A, B, C and D.
Answer Sheet.
This booklet consists of 14 printed pages.

[Turn over
2
Data
Formulae
v2 = u2 + 2as

3
1 Which of the following list contains only scalar quantities?

A mass, volume, torque, potential energy
B density, electric potential, momentum, magnetic flux
C acceleration, kinetic energy, area, displacement
D gravitational potential, pressure, electric charge, temperature
2 Which list of SI units contains only base units?

A kilogram, newton, meter, ampere, ohm
B kelvin, meter, second, ohm, mole
C kelvin. meter, mole, ampere, kilogram
D newton, kelvin, second, volt, mole
3 A student measures the dimensions of a cylindrical metal rod with an uncertainty of 2 %.

Its diameter is 14.8 mm and its length is 40.2 mm. The metal rod has a resistivity of
1.5  10 8  m.
The percentage uncertainty in the value of the resistance of the rod is
A 2% B 4% C 6% D 8%
4 A student takes five readings of the diameter of a rod:
0.77 mm 0.78 mm 0.75 mm 0.76 mm 0.78 mm
The actual length of the rod is 0.90 mm. Which of the following best describes the errors
in the readings?
Random Error Systematic Error

A small small
B small large
C large small
D large large
5 A body is thrown vertically upwards in a medium in which the viscous drag cannot be
neglected. If the times of flight for the upward motion tu and the downward motion td (to
return to the same level) are compared, then
A td > tu because the body moves faster on its downward flight and therefore the
viscous force is greater.
B td = tu because the effect of the viscous force is the same whether the body is
moving upwards or downwards.
C td < tu because at a given speed the net accelerating force when the body is moving
downwards is greater than the retarding force when it is moving upwards.
D td > tu because at a given speed the net accelerating force when the body is moving
downwards is smaller than the retarding force when it is moving upwards.
4
6 A linear accelerator sends a charged particle along the axis of a set of coaxial hollow
metal cylinders as shown in the diagram.
track of particle
metal cylinders
The particles travel at constant speed inside each cylinder. The particle crosses the gap
between the cylinders at equal time intervals, and at each gap its kinetic energy
increases by a fixed amount. Which of the graphs best represents the way in which v, the
velocity of the particle varies with d, the distance along its track?
A B
d d
v v
C D
d d
7 A ball is projected horizontally from the top of a cliff on the surface of the Earth with a
speed of 40 m s-1.
Assuming that there is no air resistance, what will its speed be 3.0 s later? Take g as 10
m s2.
A 30 m s1 B 40 m s1 C 50 m s1 D 60 m s1

5
8 A bore hole contains both oil and water as shown. The depth of the water is 730 m. The
pressure difference between the top and the bottom of the bore hole is 17.5 MPa. The
density of the oil is 830 kg m-3 and the density of the water is 1000 kg m-3.
730 m
What is the depth x of the oil?
A 907 m B 1000 m C 1090 m D 1270 m
9 The figure below shows a massive column held stationary in position by a group of people
pulling at a rope.
40
The 4.0 m high column has a mass of 180 kg and its centre of gravity X is at a distance of
2.3 m from the base. The rope makes an angle of 35 to the column and the column itself
makes an angle of 40 to the horizontal. The tension T in the rope is
A 8.76  102 N B 9.50  102 N C 1.14  103 N D 1.36  103 N
10 Two blocks, X and Y, of masses m and 2 m respectively, are accelerated along a smooth
horizontal surface by a force F as shown in the diagram below.
F X Y
What is the magnitude of the force exerted by block Y on block X during the acceleration?
F F 2F 5F
A B C D
6 3 3 6
6
11 Students A and B engage in a tug of war. Student A wins the game, and student B falls
forward. Which of the following statements is correct?
A The force exerted by student A on student B is larger than that exerted by student B
on student A.
B The frictional forces exerted by the ground on both students are the same.
C The force exerted by student A on student B is smaller than the frictional force
exerted by the ground on student B.
D The force exerted by student A on student B is larger than the frictional force exerted
by the ground on student B.
12 An object of mass 1.5 kg is sliding with a velocity of 3.0 m s-1 on a frictionless surface
towards another object which is stationary and has a mass of 2.0 kg. This head-on
collision is completely inelastic.
If the duration of the collision is 0.050 s, the average force that is exerted between the
objects during the collision is
A 39 N B 51 N C 90 N D 119 N
13 A trolley runs freely down a slope with a constant acceleration a. The mass of the trolley is
now doubled and the trolley is allowed to run down the same slope. In both cases the
effects of friction and air resistance can be ignored.
Which statement is correct for the second experiment?
A The accelerating force is the same.

B The acceleration is½ a.
C The acceleration is a.
D The acceleration is 2a,
14 A small steel sphere is held just below the surface of a deep tank of water and released.
Which one of the following best illustrates the relationship between the acceleration a,
and the displacement z, of the sphere? (Take g = 10 m s-2 and you may neglect upthrust.)
A B
a / m s-2 a / m s-2
10 10
z z
C D
a / m s-2 a / m s-2
10 10
z z
7
15 Peter and Susan both stand at the edge of a tall building.

v (Peter)
30
building v (Susan)
Susan throws a stone vertically downwards and, at the same time, Peter throws a
stone upwards at an angle of 30 to the horizontal. The speed v with which both
stones are thrown is the same. Neglecting air resistance, which one of the following
statements is true?
A The stone thrown by Susan will hit the ground with a greater speed than the stone
thrown by Peter.
B Both stones will hit the sea with the same speed no matter what the height of the
building.
C In order to determine which stone will hit the ground with a greater speed, the height
of the building must be known.
D In order to determine which stone hits the ground first, the height of the
building must be known.
16 The graph shows the variation with time of the velocity of a body when it is acted on by a
force.
v / m s-1
10
0
t/s
10
If mass of the body is 2.0 kg, the work done by the force on the body is
A 64 J B 16 J C 64 J D 80 J
8
17 Figure (a) shows the positions of equally spaced molecules in a solid lattice. A longitudinal
sound wave travels from left to right through the solid. At a certain instant, the displaced
positions of the molecules are shown in Figure (b).
What will be the directions of motion of particle 1 and particle 7 immediately afterwards?
Particle 1 Particle 7
A to the right to the right
B to the right to the left
C to the left to the right
D to the left to the left
9
18 1
Two particles X and Y are situated a distance  apart on a stationary wave of wavelength .
2
The variation with time t of the displacement dx of X is shown below.
Which one of the following shows the variation with time t of the displacement dY of particle Y?
A B
C D
10
19 Two sound sources S1 and S2, which are separated by 10 m, are connected to a signal
generator such that they produce coherent waves. A detector D is placed 24 m directly in
front of source S2 as shown in the diagram below. The signal generator is set to a
frequency of 680 Hz.
24 m
S1 P
10 m
S2 D
Given that the speed of sound is 340 m s-1, how many sound minima will the detector
detect as it moves to point P, which is directly in front of source S1?
A 4 B 5 C 8 D 9
20 The intensity of a wave depends on the amplitude. It is also proportional to the square of
the frequency. The variation with time t of the displacement x of the particles in a medium,
when two progressive waves P and Q pass separately through the medium, are shown in
the graphs below.
The intensity of wave P is Io. What is the intensity of wave Q?
1
A Io B Io C 4Io D 16Io
2
11
21 Monochromatic light of wavelength 4.0 x 10-7 m passes through two narrow slits and
produces light and dark fringes on a screen.
What is the separation of the slits such that the angular separation between the two first
order bright fringes is 4.00 x10-4 rad?
A 0.5 x 10-3 m B 1.0 x 10-3 m C 1.50 x 10-3 m D 2.0 x 10-3 m
22 Two cells of e.m.f E1 and E2 and negligible resistance are connected with two variable
resistors as shown in the diagram.
When the galvanometer deflection is zero, the resistances of the variable resistors are P
E
and Q. What is the value of the ratio 2 ?
E1
A P B P C Q D P Q
Q P Q P Q P
23 Three light bulbs, each rated at 120 V, 50 W, are connected in series to a 120 V power
supply. The power dissipated by each bulb is
A 5.6 W B 17 W C 50 W D 150 W
24 The ammeter A1 of the circuit below reads 6.0 A.
A1 A2
Assuming that both ammeters have negligible resistance, what is the reading on
ammeter A2?
A 4.5 A B 6.0 A C 13.5 A D 18.0 A

12
25 The diagram below shows an 8-pin package consisting of ten identical resistors, each of
resistance 1.0 Ω, connected together.
What is the effective resistance if one were to plug into pins 4 and 7, while leaving the rest
of the pins unused?
A 0.33  B 1.3  C 2.0  D 5.0 
26 A 20-turn square coil of side 8.0 mm is pivoted at the centre and placed in a magnetic field
of flux density 0.010 T such that two sides of the coil are parallel to the field and two sides
are perpendicular to the field, as shown below. A current of 5.0 mA is passed through the
coil.
magnetic field
8.0 mm
axis of pivot
What is the torque created on the coil?
A 1.6 x 10-9 N m B 3.2 x 10-8 N m C 6.4 x 10-8 N m D 3.2 x 10-5 N m

13
27 In the diagram below, four long wires are placed at each corner of a square and carry
equal currents. The direction of the current in wires P and R is into the plane and that in
wires Q and S is out of the plane of the paper.
Which labelled arrow correctly shows the direction of the resultant force acting on wire Q?
A Arrow A B Arrow B C Arrow C D Arrow D
28 The apparatus shown below is used to measure the stopping potential Vs for
photoelectrons emitted from a metal surface. Vs is measured for different frequencies of
light incident on the surface.
incident light
Vs
metal plate
axis of pivot
fo f
The variation with the frequency f of the stopping potential Vs is shown above.
From the graph, it may be deduced that
A all the photoelectrons have the same kinetic energy for a given value of f.
B the maximum energy of the photoelectrons is proportional to (f - fo).
C the greater the value of f, the greater is the photocurrent detected.
D the slope of the graph is equal to the Planck constant.
14
29 Energy levels for an electron in the hydrogen atom are shown in the diagram below.
When an electron falls to the -3.41 eV level, it emits visible light. What is the spectrum seen
in the visible light?
30 An α-particle having a de Broglie wavelength i collides with a stationary carbon nucleus.

Both particles move off in the same direction as shown below.
final direction of α -particle,

initial direction of α -particle, de Broglie wavelength f
de Broglie wavelength i final direction of carbon
carbon nucleus, de Broglie
nucleus wavelength c
After the collision, the de Broglie wavelengths of the α-particle and the carbon nucleus are
f and c respectively. Which of the following is a true statement related to the de Broglie
wavelengths?
A i > f B i < f C f = c D i = c
15
TEMASEK JUNIOR COLLEGE
Higher 1
CANDIDATE
NAME
CIVICS INDEX
GROUP NUMBER
PHYSICS 8866/02
Paper 2 Structured Questions 13 September 2010
2 hours
Write your Civics group, index number and name on all the work you hand in.
Section A
Section B For Examiner’s Use

1
together and circle the questions you have answered in Section B 2
in the grid provided.
3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each 4
5
6
7
8
Total
This booklet consists of 21 printed pages.

2
Data
Formulae
v2 = u2 + 2as

3
Section A
1 The velocity-time graph in Fig. 1.1 shows the first 1.6 s of the motion of a ball which is
thrown vertically downward at an initial speed of 6.0 m s1.
v / m s1
10
0 t/s
0.8 1.6
6
12
Fig. 1.1
(a) How far does the ball travel before hitting the ground?
distance travelled = m [2]
(b) What is the maximum height attained by the ball after it hits the ground?
maximum height = m [1]
(c) Calculate the magnitude of the acceleration of the ball when it is in the air.
acceleration = m s2 [1]

4
(d) At what time does the ball next reach the ground?
time = s [1]
(e) If the ratio of the incident speed to the rebound speed has a constant value, determine
the rebound speed of the ball when the ball hits the ground the second time.
rebound speed = m s1 [1]
(f) Taking upward direction to be positive, sketch on Fig. 1.2, a clearly labelled
displacement-time graph for the motion of the ball from time t = 0 up to the second
time it hits the ground.
s/m
t/s
Fig. 1.2
[2]
5
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a catapult for launching a body vertically. A and B are fixed mounting points
and the diagram shows the system in equilibrium, ready for launch. The masses m1 and m2
are each 1.0 kg. You may assume that when the elastic band is horizontal the band is still
under tension.
A B
45 45
elastic band
m1
thin cord
m2
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the tension in the elastic band.
tension = N [2]
(b) Determine the initial acceleration of m1 and that of m2 at the instant the thin cord
breaks.
initial acceleration of m1 = m s2

initial acceleration of m2 = m s2 [3]
6
(c) State, with a reason, the acceleration of m1 just after it crosses the horizontal line AB.
[1]
(d) Suggest one reason why the resultant force on m1 decreases as m1 rises from its
original position upwards.
[1]
3 In an experiment to measure the speed of sound, two coherent sources S1 and S2 produce
sound waves of frequency 1700 Hz. A sound detector is moved along a line AB, parallel to
S1S2, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
A
S1
S2
Fig. 3.1
B
As the detector is moved along AB, regions of minimum and maximum loudness are
detected. When the detector is at P such that S1P = S2P, maximum loudness of sound is
detected. Point X is the third position of minimum loudness from P, and distances S1X =
1.00 m and S2X = 1.50 m.
(a) (i) Use the information to determine the wavelength of the sound wave.
wavelength of sound wave = m [2]

7
(ii) Hence, calculate the speed of sound.
speed of sound = m s-1 [2]
(b) At X, no sound is detected. The intensity of the sound produced by S1 alone is then
reduced. State and explain the effect of this change on the intensity of sound heard at
X and at P.
At X :
[2]
At P:
[2]
8
4 A wire carrying a current I1 is bent to form a circular loop P, which is then fixed in a vertical
plane as shown in Fig. 4.1.
horizontal axis
Fig. 4.1
(a) On Fig. 4.1, indicate the direction of the magnetic field, due to the current I1 in
[1]
loop P, at its centre O.
(b) The magnitude of the flux density B at O is proportional to the current I. The relation is
B = kI
where k is 1.0 x 10-5 TA-1.
In Fig. 4.2, another loop Q, which has the same diameter as loop P, is fixed in a
horizontal plane with its centre also at O. This loop carries a current I2.
Fig. 4.2
(i) If I1 = 3.0 A and I2 = 4.0 A, find the angle at which the resultant magnetic field
makes with respect to the horizontal plane. Draw a vector diagram, in the spaces
provided below, showing how you obtain the direction of this resultant magnetic
field. You may ignore the Earth’s magnetic field.
o
angle = [3]
9
(ii) Electrical connections are made to a short wire of length 5.0 mm arranged in the
plane of Q passing through O as shown in Fig. 4.3.
5 .0 mm short wire
carrying 7.0 A current
Fig. 4.3
A current of 7.0 A passes through the short wire.
Calculate the magnitude of the maximum possible force on this current-carrying

wire.
force = N [3]
10
The5ex In an experiment to investigate the light emitted by a filament lamp, the light output for a
lamp rated at 12 V, 20 W was investigated when a range of potential differences was applied
across it.
(a) Draw a circuit diagram showing how you would connect the lamp to a 12 V battery and
a 10 Ω rheostat such that the potential difference across the lamp can be varied
between 0 and 12 V.
Include in your diagram:

- a switch, situated so that the battery supplies no current when the switch is open;
- a voltmeter and an ammeter, which will enable the power supplied to the lamp to
be determined.
[3]
(b) The lamp drawn in (a) is now used to illuminate the LDR as shown in Fig. 5.1.
The LDR is then connected to a circuit as shown in Fig. 5.2 where it is used in
investigating the intensity of the light output of the lamp. The battery in the circuit is
assumed to have negligible internal resistance and the milliammeter has a full scale
deflection of 10 mA.
in
Fig. 5.2
LDR
Fig. 5.1 Fig. 5.2

11
The graph in Fig. 5.3 below shows how the resistance R of the LDR varies with the
incident illumination L, which is measured in W m-2. Both resistance and illumination
are plotted using log10 scales.
5
Log10 (R/)
0
0 1 2 3 4 Log10 (L/Wm-2)
Fig. 5.3
(i) Calculate the minimum resistance of the LDR when the milliammeter is at its full
scale deflection.
minimum resistance =  [2]

12
(ii) Use Fig. 5.3 to show that the maximum illumination which can be measured,
using the circuit shown in Fig. 5.2, is about 1000 W m-2.
[2]
(iii) If the uncertainty of the milliammeter is  0.5 mA, determine whether there is a
detectable current when the illumination is 10 W m-2.
[3]
13
Section B
Answer two questions in this section.
6 (a) (i) What is meant by the linear momentum of a body?
[1]
(ii) State how the change in momentum of a body is related to the force acting on it.
[2]
(b) A projectile of mass 3.2 x 10-2 kg is fired from a cylindrical barrel of cross-sectional area
2.8 x 10-4 m2 by means of a compressed gas. The variation with time t of the excess
pressure p of the gas in the barrel above atmospheric pressure is shown in Fig. 6.1.
Fig. 6.1
14
(i) Calculate the maximum force which the gas exerts on the projectile.
maximum force = N [2]
(ii) Calculate the acceleration of the projectile which would result from the
force calculated in (b)(i).
acceleration of the projectile = m s-2 [2]
(c) (i) Using Fig. 6.1, estimate the change of momentum due to the compressed
gas which is experienced by the projectile.
change of momentum = kg m s-1 [3]
(ii) The speed of the projectile changes from zero to 270 m s-1 as it leaves the
barrel. What is the change in the momentum of the projectile?
change of momentum = kg m s-1 [2]

15
(iii) Compare and comment on your answers to (c) (i) and (ii).
[2]
(d) (i) Name the conservation principles that apply to a system of interacting particles.
[2]
(ii) Explain in detail how you can apply the conservation principles to the inelastic
collision of a bullet with a stationary bag of sand suspended by a cord from the
ceiling. The bullet is of mass m travelling with speed v, while the bag of sand is of
mass 1000 m. The bullet gets embedded in the sand after the impact.
[4]
16
7 (a) Make estimates of the following quantities:
(i) the wavelength of blue light in a vacuum

wavelength = m [1]
(ii) the density of air at room temperature and pressure
density = kg m-3 [1]
(iii) the mass of a protractor

mass = g [1]
(iv) the amount of energy in 1 kilowatt-hour

energy = J [1]
(v) the resistance of a domestic light bulb when it is on

resistance =  [1]
(b) A student takes readings to measure the mean diameter of a wire using a micrometer
screw gauge.
Make suggestions, one in each case, that the student may adopt in order to
(i) reduce a systematic error in the readings,
(ii) allow for a wire of varying diameter along its length,
(iii) allow for a non-circular cross-section of the wire.
[4]
17
(c) A cell has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) E and an internal resistance r. It is connected
in series with a variable resistor R, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
(i) Distinguish between electromotive force (e.m.f.) and potential difference (p.d.).
[2]
(ii) The variable resistor R has resistance X. Show that
power dissipated in R X
=
power produced in cell X r
.
[3]
18
(iii) The variation with resistance X of the power PR dissipated in R is shown in

Fig. 7.2.
Fig. 7.2
Use Fig. 7.2 to state, for maximum power dissipation in resistor R, the magnitude
of this power and the resistance of R.
maximum power = W
resistance =  [2]
(iv) The cell has e.m.f. 1.5 V. Use your answers in (iii) to calculate the internal
resistance of the cell.
internal resistance =  [3]
(v) In Fig. 7.2, it can be seen that, for larger values of X, the power dissipation
decreases.
Use the relationship in (ii) to suggest one advantage, despite the lower power
output, of using the cell in a circuit where the resistance X is larger than the
internal resistance of the cell.
[1]
19
8 (a) Summarise the experimental evidence that suggests the existence of energy levels in
atoms.
[4]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows some of the electron energy levels of a hydrogen atom.
Fig. 8.2
(i) One of the emitted spectral lines of hydrogen has a wavelength of 6.5 x 10-7 m.
Calculate the energy, in eV, of a photon of this wavelength.
energy of photon = eV [3]

20
(ii) On the diagram in Fig. 8.2, draw an arrow to indicate the transition responsible
for this spectral line.
[1]
(iii) An electron in the ground state of a hydrogen atom is struck by a photon. State
and explain what happens to the electron and the photon when the energy of the
photon is
1. 10 eV,
2. 20 eV.
[4]
(c) The photoelectric effect is represented by the equation
hf =  + Ek.
Explain the meaning of each term in the equation.
hf:
:
Ek:
[3]
21
(d) A metal plate is illuminated with electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 190 nm. The
metal has a work function of 7. x10-19 J. A photoelectron is emitted from the metal.
(ii) Calculate the maximum speed of emission that this photoelectron can have.
maximum speed = m s-1 [3]
(ii) Explain why most electrons are emitted with speeds less than the maximum.
[2]
TJC Answers to 2010 Preliminary Exam H1 MCQ
8866/01
1D 2C 3C 4B 5D 6B 7C 8D 9D 10C
11D 12B 13C 14A 15B 16A 17C 18A 19C 20B
21D 22B 23A 24A 25C 26C 27B 28B 29B 30B
3. 10.
12.
5.
6.
13.
14.
7.
8.
15.
16.
9.
17.
19. 26.
27.
20.
28.
21.
29.
22.
30.
23.
24.
25.
TJC Solutions to 2010 Prelim H1 8866 Physics Paper 2
Section A
1
1 (a) Distance = Area under the graph = (6 + 12)0.6 [1]
2
= 5.4 m [1]
1
(b) Max height =Area under the graph = × 1.0 × 10 = 5.0 m [1]
2
12 − 6
(c) a = Gradient= = 10 m s −2 [1]
0.6
(d) From graph, time taken to reach max height on rebound = time taken to next reach
ground = 1.0 s.
Thus, time taken to next reach ground = 1.0 + 1.6 = 2.6 s [1]
(e) upward v = (10/12) × 10 = 8.3 m s−1 [1]
(f) [2]
s/m
0.6 2.6
0 t/s
0.4
1 m for correct shape,
1 m for correct values
5.4
2(a) 2 T cos 45o = 2 mg = 2x1.0x9.81 [1]

T = 13.9 N [1]
2(b) When string breaks, T =0

Net force on m1 = m2g
m1a = m2g
a = g =9.81 ms-2 upwards, since equal masses [2]
m2 falls freely,
acceleration of m2 = 9.81 m s−2 downwards [1]
2(c) The acceleration of m1 is 9.81 m s−2 downwards as the elastic band is horizontal
so there is no vertical component to the tension that cancels out the weight. [1]
2(d) As m1 rises the elastic band becomes less stretched so the tension in the band decreases.
[1]
2
3 (a)(i) Path difference = S2X – S1X = 1.50 – 1.00 = 0.50 m [1]
⇒ 2.5λ = 0.50 m ⇒ λ = 0.20 m [1]
(a)(ii) v = fλ = 1700 × 0.20 = 340 m s-1 [2]
(b) At X : Loudness increases. The waves arriving at X will no longer have the same
amplitude and so the two amplitudes do not cancel out one another completely at X and so
no complete destructive interference occurs at X. [2]
At P : Loudness decreases. The sum of the two amplitudes is less than before and hence
the resultant intensity will be lower. [2]
[correct answer + explanation gets 2 marks each]
4 (a)
horizontal axis
[1]
B2 kI1 4.0
4 (b) tan θ = = = [1]
BR B1 kI 2 3.0
B2
θ = 53o [1]
θ Diagram [1]
B1
F = BR IL = k I1 + I 2 IL
2 2
4 (c) [1]
(
= 1.0 × 10−5 3.02 + 4.02 × (7.0 ) × 5 × 10−3 ) [1]
= 1.8 × 10 −6 N [1]
3
5 (a)
correct placement of
voltmeter and ammeter [1]
A
switch connected
in series [1]
rheostat in series with

lamp [1]
V
emf 1.50
5 (b) (i) minimum resistance of the LDR = = = 150 Ω [2]
current 10 × 10 −3
(ii) from graph: lg R = lg (150) = 2.18

this correspond to: lg L = 3.05 [1]
−2
∴ L = 10 3.05
≈ 1000 W m [1]
(iii) when L = 10 W m-2, lg (10) = 1

this corresponds to lg R = 4 (from graph)
∴ R = 10000 Ω [1]
emf 1.50
Current in the circuit = = 4 = 0.15 mA [1]
R 10
No. Cannot detect as milliammeter has a precision of up to ± 0.5 mA. [1]
4
Section B
6 (a) (i) The linear momentum of a body is defined as the product of its mass and its velocity.
[1]
(ii) The rate of change in momentum of a freely moving body is directly proportional to the
force acting on it, and the change takes place in the direction of the force. [2]
(b )(i ) Fmax = p max A

[2]
( )
= 55 × 10 6 2.8 × 10 − 4 = 1.54 × 10 4 N
(ii ) Fmax = ma max
1.54 × 10 4 = 3.2 × 10 −2 a max [2]
5 −2
⇒ a max = 4.81× 10 m s
(c )(i ) Δp = area under F − t graph

( )
= A(p × t ) = 2.8 × 10 − 4 17 × 10 6 3.3 × 10 −3 [3]
−1
= 15.7 kg m s
(c )(ii ) Δp = mΔv = 3.2 × 10 −2 (270 − 0 )
[2]
= 8.64 kg m s −1
(c)(iii) The actual change in the momentum of the projectile is less than the expected change is
momentum from the force applied by the compressed gas. Some KE is lost due to work done
against the friction between the projectile and the cylindrical barrel, OR due to leakage of gas.
[2]
(d)(i) Conservation of momentum and Conservation of energy. [2]
(ii ) Momentum is conserved.

By conservation of momentum,
1
mv = (1000 + 1)mv' ⇒ v' = v.
1001
As collison is perfectly inelastic, energy is conserved but the KE is not.

Some KE is lost as internal energy of the system of colliding bodies,
and is ultimately dissipated as heat to the surrounding.
The following equation is optional and can we award one mark if it is shown. [4]
⎛ 1 1 ⎛ v ⎞
2
⎞
⎜ mv 2 − (1001m )⎜ ⎟ ⎟
⎜ 2 2 ⎝ 1001 ⎠ 1 ⎟
⎜ KE loss = = 1− = 99.9%.⎟
1 1001
⎜ mv 2 ⎟
⎜ 2 ⎟
⎝ ⎠
5
7 (a) (i) allow (4.0 – 4.5) x 10-7 [1]

(a) (ii) allow 0.5 kg m-3 → 1.5 kg m-3 [1]
(a) (iii) allow 5 g → 50 g [1]
(a) (iv) allow only 3.6 x 106 J [1]
(a) (v) allow 600 → 3000 Ω [1]
7 (b) (i) check for zero error (on micrometer) and subtract it from the reading. [1]
(ii) take readings along the length of the wire at different points [1]
(iii) take readings spirally/rotate the wire [1]
for (ii) and (iii) mention taking average of the readings to minimize random error [1]
7 (c) (i) Emf is energy transferred from source / changed from some other form to electrical per
unit charge through the source, p.d. is electrical energy converted to other forms per
unit charge across a device. [2]
7 (c) (ii) Power in R = I2X [1]

E = I (X + r) [1]
Power in cell = EI and algebra clear leading to ratio = X / (X + r) [1]
7 (c) (iii) max P =1.4 W at R= 0.40 Ω [2]
7 (c) (iv) current in circuit = 1.4/0.4 = 1.87 A

1.5 = 1.87 (r + 0.40)
r = 0.40 Ω [3]
7 (c) (v) either less power lost / energy wasted / lost

or greater efficiency (of energy transfer) [1]
6
8 (a)
Evidence: the existence of emission/absorption line spectra of atoms.
Electrons are allowed to orbit in fixed energy levels/orbits
When e are excited to higher levels/orbits, they relax/fall down and emit photons/em radiation
Photon energies/frequencies are discrete as it is obtained by difference in energies between
higher and lower energy levels. [4]
(b)(i) Energy = hf = hc/λ

= 6.63 x 10-34 x 3.00 x108/6.5 x 10-7 = 3.06 x 10-19 J
= 1.9 eV [3]
(ii) Arrow from n=3 to n=2. [1]
(iii) 1. 10 eV : energy of this photon is not absorbed as it does not correspond to any energy
difference between any excited and ground state of hydrogen atom. [2]
2. 20 eV: this energy is absorbed as it is more than ionization energy (13.6 eV). The
electron will be completely removed from the atom. [2]
(c) hf : energy of a photon

Φ : work function which is the min energy to liberate an electron from the metal surface.
EK : maximum kinetic energy of the electron emitted. [3]
(d)(i) ½ mv2 = hf - Φ
v = √(2/9.1x10-31)[( 6.63 x 10-34 x 3.00 x108/190 x 10-9) – 7.9 x10-19 ]
= √(2/9.1x10-31)( 1.05 x 10-18 – 7.9 x10-19
= 7.51 x 105 ms-1 [3]
(ii) Electrons on surface of metal are loosely bound and thus need less energy to be liberated.
However electrons below the surface need more energy to be liberated. Thus they move
off with less KE and therefore less speed. [2]
1
TAMPINES JUNIOR COLLEGE

PHYSICS 8866/01
Higher 1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
Monday 20 September 2010
1 hour
Time 0800 – 0900 hr

Write your name and class on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided.
There are thirty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.

For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you
consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

2
Data
Formulae

2
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
hydrostatic pressure p = ρ gh

3
1 The viscous force experienced by an object in a fluid under turbulent conditions can be
given by the expression F = kρv 2 , where ρ is the density of the fluid and v is the
velocity of the object in the fluid. The unit of the constant k, expressed in SI base units,
is
A m3 s-1 B m-3 s-1 C m2 D m-4
2 Four experiments were conducted separately to measure the speed of light c. The table
showed the results obtained.
Which set of results could be described as precise but not accurate?
Experiment Results, c / x 108 ms-1

A 3.00 2.97 3.02 3.01
B 3.16 2.88 2.91 3.05
C 2.79 2.65 2.98 3.01
D 2.81 2.79 2.81 2.80
3 A student makes measurements from which he calculates the acceleration of free fall
as 9.7823 m s–2. He estimates that his result is accurate to ± 3%.
How should he present his result?
A (10 ± 3) m s–2
B (9.8 ± 0.3) m s–2
C (9.78 ± 0.29) m s–2
D (9.78 ± 0.03) m s–2
4 The period T of a simple pendulum of length L is given by the expression:

L
T = 2π g
A student carries out an experiment with a particular simple pendulum and measured
the time for 20 oscillations for various lengths of pendulum L. He plots a graph of T2
against L. The student measured the length of the pendulum by measuring the length
of the string, and did not include the short distance between the end of the string and
the centre of mass of the pendulum. What effect does this have on the graph he
plotted?
A The gradient of the graph will be smaller than the correct value.
B The gradient of the graph will be larger than the correct value.
C The y-intercept of the graph will occur above the origin.
D The y-intercept of the graph will occur below the origin.
4
5 A car at rest at a traffic junction starts to accelerate at 2.0 m s-2 when the traffic light
turned green. At this moment, a truck passes it, travelling at a constant velocity of
14 m s-1. If the car is accelerating uniformly, how long will it take for the car to just
overtake the truck?
A 7.0 s B 14 s C 28 s D 56 s
6 Fig. 6 shows a trolley traveling at a constant speed of 10 m s-1 to the left. A steel ball is
held by an electromagnet attached to trolley.
Fig. 6
The ball is released and stroboscopic photographs (a series of exposures on the same
film at equal intervals) are taken of the path of the ball.
Which of the following diagrams best represents what is seen on the photograph?
A B C D
7 Fig. 7 shows a ball being thrown horizontally from a tower and lands 20 m away. At
what speed is the ball thrown? (Ignore air resistance)
Fig. 7
A 10 m s-1 B 15 m s-1 C 20 m s-1 D 28 m s-1

5
8 A stone is thrown from P and follows a parabolic path. The highest point reached is T.
The vertical component of the acceleration of the stone
A decreases at a constant rate.
B is greatest at T.
C is greatest at P.
D is the same at P as at T.
9 A wire is stretched by a force F which causes an extension x. The energy stored in the
wire is ½ F x only if
A the extension of the wire is proportional to the force applied.
B the weight of the wire is negligible.
C the wire is not stretched beyond its elastic limit.
D the cross-sectional area of the wire remains a constant.
10 Newton's third law concerns the forces of interaction between two bodies. Which of the
following statements relating to the third law is false?
A The two forces must act on different bodies.
B The two forces are always in opposite direction.
C The two forces are at all times equal in magnitude.
D The two forces are equal and opposite so that the bodies are in equilibrium.
11 A kite is held stationary under the influence of three forces: the tension T in the string,
the force F of the wind and the weight W of the kite. Which one of the following force
diagrams could be correct?
A B C D
F F F
F
T T
W T W W T W
6
12 A trailer of weight 30 kN is hitched to a cab at the point X as shown in Fig. 12.
Fig. 12
If the trailer carries a weight of 20 kN at the position shown in the diagram, what
upward force is exerted by the cab on the trailer at the point X?
A 15 kN B 20 kN C 30 kN D 40 kN
13 A pendulum is suspended in a train that is accelerating at 2.5 m s-2 (see Fig. 13). What
angle does the string make with the vertical?
Fig. 13
A 14o B 17o C 25o D 32o
14 Particles X (of mass 4 units) and Y (of mass 9 units) move directly towards each other,
collide and then separate. If ∆vx is the change of velocity of X and ∆vy is the change of
velocity of Y, the magnitude of the ratio ∆vx / ∆vy is
A 9/4 B 3/2 C 2/3 D 4/9
15 A trolley moves along a track from P to Q, as shown in Fig. 15. The trolley has a
kinetic energy of 60 kJ at P. Its potential energy at Q is 40 kJ less than that at P. The
work it does against friction from P to Q is 10 kJ.
trolley
P
Q
Fig. 15
The kinetic energy of the trolley at Q is
A 10 kJ B 50 kJ C 90 kJ D 100 kJ
7
16 An electric motor is required to haul a cage of mass 200 kg up a mine shaft through a
vertical height of 800 m in 4.0 minutes. What will be its electrical power required if its
overall efficiency is 75%?
A 0.89 kW B 4.9 kW C 5.2 kW D 8.7 kW
17 N small conductors, on the edge of an insulating disc of radius r, are each given a
charge of Q, as shown in Fig. 17. The frequency of rotation of the disc is f.
r
Q
Q
Fig. 17
What is the equivalent electric current at the edge of the disc?
A NQf B NQ/f C NπrQf D Nqf/πr
18 Fig. 18 shows the dimensions of a metal block used as a resistor of resistance R, with
the current along the 20.0 mm direction as shown. The resistivity of the metal is 3.0 x
10–4 Ω m. What is the value of R?
20.0 mm
10.0 mm
Fig. 18
2.0 mm
Current Direction
A 3.0 x 10–4 Ω B 3.0 x 10–3 Ω C 3.0 x 10–1 Ω D 7.5 x 10–2 Ω

8
19 Two electrical conductors of 200 kΩ and 50 kΩ respectively, form a potential divider.

Junction Y is maintained at +3 V and junction P is earth as shown in Fig 19.
P
X 200 kΩ 50 kΩ Y
Fig. 19
What is the potential at junction X?
A 12 V B –12 V C 15 V D –15 V
20 A constant 60 V d.c. source is connected across two resistors of resistance 400 kΩ and
200 kΩ as shown in Fig. 20.
60 V
d.c.
supply
V
200 kΩ
Fig. 20
400 kΩ 200 kΩ
What is the reading of the voltmeter, also of resistance 200 kΩ when connected across
the second resistor as shown in the diagram?
A 12 V B 15 V C 20 V D 30 V
9
21 Three parallel conductors, carrying equal currents in the directions shown, pass
vertically through the corners of an equilateral triangle PQR.
What is the direction of the resultant force F on the conductor at Q?
A B C D
22 An electromagnetic pump is used in a nuclear power station to move molten materials

about. One such pump consists of a rectangular section of pipe as shown in Fig. 22. A
current of 1000 A is passed horizontally in a vertical magnetic field of 0.02 T. What is
the direction of the applied current and the magnitude of the force on the molten metal
for a section of the pipe illustrated?
Fig. 22
A The current is directed from X to Y and the force is 2.0 N

B The current is directed from Y to X and the force is 2.0 N
C The current is directed from X to Y and the force is 1.2 N
D The current is directed from Y to X and the force is 1.2 N
10
23 Suppose a particle P is projected in a uniform field, which can be magnetic, electric or

gravitational as shown in Fig. 23.
P
Fig. 23
Field
For the particle to move in the plane of the paper in parabolic path indicated, the
conditions would have to be:
Particle Field
A Negatively charged Electric
B Positively charged Magnetic
C Uncharged Gravitational
D There are no conditions which could produce such a motion.
24 Data transmitted along glass-fibre cables is in the form of pulses of monochromatic red
light each of duration 2.5 ns. Which of the following is the best estimate of the number
of wavelengths in each pulse?
A 103 B 106 C 109 D 1012
25 The diagram shows a transverse wave on a rope. The wave is travelling from left to
right. At the instant shown in Fig 25, what is the phase difference between points P and
Q?
Fig. 25
π π
A zero B C D π
4 2
26 A stationary wave is formed by superimposing two longitudinal waves of frequency 20

MHz. The adjacent nodes in the stationary waves are 25 µm apart. What is the speed
of the progressive waves?
A 330 m s-1 B 500 m s-1 C 1000 m s-1 D 2000 m s-1

11
27 Under which of the following conditions will the separation between the bright fringes of
a double slit interference pattern be the greatest?
Distance between slits Distance from slits to Wavelength

screen
A large small long
B large large short
C small large long
D small small long
28 In a photoelectric experiment, the saturation current produced by shining light of

frequency f on a particular piece of metal is 6.0 nA. What would be the value of this
current if f is increased to 1.5 f while keeping the rate of incidence of photons on the
metal constant?
A 6.0 nA B 8.0 nA C 10 nA D 12 nA
29 What is the wavelength of electrons that are accelerated from rest across a potential
difference of V? h is the Planck constant, e the electronic charge and m is the mass of
electron.
A hm B eV C eV D h
h 2h
eV m m 2meV
30 Fig. 30 shows the three lowest energy levels of an atom.
Fig. 30
What is the highest frequency of radiation possible from transition within these levels?
A 2.10 x 1015 Hz B 1.17 x 1016 Hz C 7.21 x 1016 Hz D 7.75 x 1016 Hz
End of Paper
Candidate Name _________________ ______________ Civics Class ___________
TAMPINES JUNIOR COLLEGE

PHYSICS 8866/02
Higher 1
PAPER 2
THURSDAY 2 SEPTEMBER 2010
2 hour
Time 0800 – 1000 hr

Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
Do not use paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Section A For Examiner's Use

1 8
Section B
2 8
3 6
You are advised to spend about one hour on each section.
4 6
together. 5 12
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each
question or part question. Section B
6 20
7 20
8 20
Total 80

2
Data
Formulae

2
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
hydrostatic pressure p = ρ gh
3
Section A
1 (a) Galileo’s famous demonstration at the Tower of Pisa showed that falling objects
accelerate equally, regardless of their masses. This is strictly true if air resistance is
negligible.
Using Newton’s Second Law, show that a 10 kg canon ball and a 1 kg stone, when
dropped together from the top of the tower, can strike the ground at the same time.
[2]
(b) A body is released in a fluid. With the aid of a free body diagram, explain how the
body falling through a fluid can reach terminal velocity.
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) A parachutist has a mass of 80 kg. When he falls with his parachute open, the air
resistance R he encounters is given by the equation R = k v2, where v is the
parachutist’s velocity and k has the value of 35 N s2 m-2.
Determine the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of the parachutist when
his velocity is 5.0 m s-1.
magnitude of acceleration = ……………………………….. m s-2
direction of acceleration = ………………………………… [3]

4
2 Sphere P of mass 2.0 kg and sphere Q of mass 1.0 kg are moving towards each other
with speeds 2.0 m s–1 and 1.0 m s–1 respectively, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
2.0 m s–1 1.0 m s–1
P Q Fig. 2.1
2.0 kg 1.0 kg
The spheres have a head-on, inelastic collision. The force that P exerts on Q during the
collision varies with time as shown in Fig. 2.2.
F/N
150
Fig. 2.2
0
0 20 40 t / ms
(a) State the principle of conservation of momentum.
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) Determine the momentum change of mass Q after collision.
change of momentum = ……………………………….. kg m s-1 [1]

5
(c) Sketch, with clear labeling of values, a graph of the force that Q exerts on P using
the axes provided.
F/N
0 t / ms
[2]
(d) Calculate the velocities of P and Q after collision.
velocity of P = ……………………………….. m s-1
velocity of Q = ……………………………….. m s-1 [2]
(e) Calculate percentage loss in total kinetic energy of P and Q after the collision.
percentage loss in total kinetic energy = ……………………………….. % [2]

6
3 A rectangular coil ABCD has its plane set parallel to a uniform magnetic field of 0.2 T as
shown in Fig. 3 (not drawn to scale). The coil of sides AB and BC are of length 30.0 cm
and 20.0 cm respectively. A current of 2.0 A is flowing through the coil from P to Q.
B C
N A D S
P Q
Fig. 3
(a) Indicate in Fig. 3, the direction of the force acting on sides AB and CD
respectively. Label them F.
[2]
(b) Calculate the force F.
force F = ……………………………….. N [2]
(c) Hence calculate the torque acting on the coil ABCD at the instant shown in Fig. 3.
torque = ……………………………….. N m [2]
4 (a) What is meant by the photoelectric effect?
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
[1]
7
(b) The circuit as shown in Fig. 4 is used to study the photoelectric effect with sodium.
When a piece of sodium metal is irradiated by monochromatic light of wavelength
420 nm, the stopping potential is found to be 0.65 V. When light of wavelength 310
nm is used, the stopping potential is 1.69 V.
light
Variable voltage source

Fig. 4
(i) What is meant by stopping potential?
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………...
[1]
(ii) Determine the work function of sodium metal and the value of Planck
constant.
work function of sodium metal = ……………………………….. J
value of Planck constant = ……………………………….. J s [4]

8
5 Capacitors are used in virtually every electronics circuit that is built today. A capacitor is
an electrical device that is able to store electrical energy. It is basically made up of two
conducting sheets or plates which are separated by an insulator, such as mica, ceramic
or paper. It is charged by using direct current, which will result in the capacitor having a
potential difference and the two conductors carrying charges of opposite sign. A
charged capacitor is able to deliver electrical energy to a resistor in a way similar to a
cell.
A particular capacitor C is connected in a circuit as shown in Fig. 5.1, to a cell with an
emf of 12.0 V and a resistor of 30.0 kΩ. A current sensor is used to measure the
variation of current in the circuit with time, and a part of the graph is shown in Fig. 5.2
below.
C
12.0 V 30.0 kΩ
A
Current sensor
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2
9
At any instant, the emf of the cell E, the potential difference across the capacitor Vc and
the potential difference across the resistor VR are related by the following equation:
E = VC + VR
(a) As the capacitor is charged by the current flow, indicate on Fig. 5.1 which plate is
positively charged.
[1]
(b) Suggest why the current decreases with time.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) If the circuit remains closed for a sufficiently long time, state the final value of
(i) the current in the circuit,
current = ……………………………….. A [1]
(ii) the potential difference across the capacitor
potential difference across capacitor = ……………………………….. V [1]
(d) At time t = 10 s, deduce the potential difference across the capacitor.
potential difference across capacitor = ……………………………….. V [2]
(e) Use Fig. 5.2 to estimate the charge stored on the capacitor after 10 s.
charge stored on the capacitor = ……………………………….. C [2]

10
The capacitance of a capacitor is defined as the ratio of the charge stored to the
potential difference across it.
(f) Use your answers above to determine the capacitance of C.
capacitance of C = ……………………………….. C V-1 [1]
It is suggested that the relation between the current and time is
where I0 is the current at time t = 0 s, and k is a constant for this circuit.

Some data from Fig. 5.1 are used to plot the graph of ln I with time as shown in Fig. 5.3.
Fig. 5.3
(g) Use Fig. 5.3 to deduce the value of k.
Value of k = ……………………………….. s [2]

11
Section B
Answer two of the questions in this section
6 The following data concern a tennis ball at a given instant just before it is struck by a
tennis racket:
horizontal momentum of tennis ball = 2.4 N s
kinetic energy of tennis ball = 45 J
(a) State Newton’s three laws of motion.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Why is it correct to give the direction of the momentum but not of the kinetic
energy?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[1]
(c) Use the data provided to calculate the mass and the velocity of the tennis ball
mass = ……………………………….. kg
velocity = …………………………….. m s-1 [4]

12
(d) When the racket hits the ball, it strikes the ball with a constant force of 60 N in a
direction opposite to that of its momentum, bringing it to rest momentarily.
Calculate
(i) the time the tennis ball takes to stop,
time = …………………………….. s [2]
(ii) the distance the tennis ball travels while stopping
distance = …………………………….. m [3]
(e) The force of 60 N then continues to act on the tennis ball for a further 0.060s.
Calculate
(i) the new momentum of the ball
new momentum = …………………………….. N s [1]
(ii) the new velocity of the ball
new velocity = …………………………….. m s-1 [1]

13
(f) Calculate the increase in kinetic energy of the ball for the whole time that the force
is applied to it and hence deduce the mean power being delivered to the ball while
it is in contact with the racket.
increase in kinetic energy = ……………………………….. J [3]
mean power delivered = …………………………….. W

(g) Suggest why in practice it is impossible for a constant force to be applied to the
ball.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
7 (a) (i) Define potential difference and the volt
………………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[2]
(ii) Using energy consideration, distinguish between electromotive force (e.m.f.)

and potential difference (p.d.).
………………………………………………………………………………………....
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[3]
14
(b) The variation of resistance R of a thermistor with temperature T is shown in Fig.

7.1. Temperature, T, is given in Kelvin (K) and is related to degree Centigrade , θ ,
by the relationship: θ = T – 273
R / kΩ
T/K
Fig. 7.1
The above thermistor is connected in a potential divider circuit as shown in Fig. 7.2
with a battery of e.m.f. 12.0 V and negligible internal resistors. The thermistor is
placed in the freezer of a meat handling factory. It functioned as a temperature
probe to activate a switch to power the freezer and the switch will be on if the
potential at point P is at 4.5 V.
12.0 V
P
0V
5.0 kΩ
Fig. 7.2
(i) What is meant by the expression an e.m.f. of 12 V ?
…………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………… [1]
15
(ii) Explain, in microscopic terms, the shape of the graph in Fig. 7.1.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[3]
(iii) State and explain the effect of a decrease in surrounding temperature in the
freezer on the potential at point P.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[3]
(iii) Use Fig. 7.1 to determine the temperature that would trigger the switch.
temperature = …………………………….. K [3]
(v) Suggest why it is reasonable to choose a value of 4.5 V as a trigger potential

in this context.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[1]
16
(vi) Without changing the thermistor and keeping the trigger potential at 4.5 V,
suggest one way that the circuit could be modified if a different trigger
temperature is desired.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[1]
(vii) Noting the usefulness of such a temperature probe, it was suggested that a
similar circuit in Fig. 7.2 to be used in a device for controlling a boiler. It is
desired that when the temperature is 78oC, the switch will be activated to boil
the liquid. Discuss whether this proposal is feasible.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[3]
8 (a) (i) State the principle of superposition.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[2]
(ii) Explain what is meant by constructive interference and destructive

interference.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[2]
17
(b) Sound produced by the loudspeaker shown in Fig. 8.1 has a frequency of 4.0 x 103
Hz. The sound waves arrive at microphone M via two different paths, LXM and
LYM. The left-tube is fixed in position, while the right-tube is a sliding-section. At
position M, the sound waves from the two paths interfere.
loudspeaker
L
sliding-section which can be
moved horizontally
X Y
Fig. 8.1
microphone
Initially, the lengths of paths LXM and LYM are equal. The sliding-section is then
pulled out horizontally by 0.020m, and the loudness at microphone M changes from
a maximum to a minimum.
(i) Determine the path difference between the two waves after the sliding-
section is pulled out.
path difference = …………………………….. m [2]
(ii) Calculate the speed at which sound travels through the tube.
speed = …………………………….. m s-1 [2]

18
(iii) When the opening at M is sealed, explain why a standing wave can be set up
in the tube.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[3]
(iv) The frequencies of the sound produced by the loudspeaker ranges from 40
Hz to 4.0 kHz. Calculate the range of wavelengths of sound produced by
loudspeaker.
range of wavelengths = …………………………….. m

to …………………………….. m [2]
(v) A good loudspeaker should be able to diffract sound over a large area.
Estimate the optimal diameter of the loudspeaker in order to achieve the
maximum spreading of sound waves at the frequency of 4.0 x 103 Hz. Explain
your answer.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[2]
19
(c) (i) Fig. 8.2 below shows a stationary wave formed between two fixed points.
A E
B D
C F
Fig. 8.2
State the point/s which is/are at rest at the moment as shown in the figure.
…………………………………………………………………………………………
[1]
(ii) If the distance between the two fixed points is 1.00 m and the frequency of
the waveform in Fig. 8.2 is 50 Hz, find the frequencies of three other modes
of oscillations which are lower than 50 Hz.
frequency 1 = …………………………….. Hz
frequency 2 = …………………………….. Hz
frequency 3 = …………………………….. Hz [4]
End of Paper
VICTORIA JUNIOR COLLEGE
2010 JC2 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATIONS
PHYSICS 8866/01
Higher 1
23/9/2010 1400 h – 1500 h

THURSDAY (1 h )

Write your name and NRIC number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided.
There are thirty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question
there are four possible answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the
separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully. Please shade the
ovals on the Answer Sheet correctly.
answer.

This document contains 14 printed pages.

VJC Preliminary Exams 2010 Physics H1/P1/8866/1
2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 108 m s-1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10-19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10-27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 × 10-31 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 × 10-27 kg
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, 1 2

s = ut + at
2
v2 = u2 + 2as
resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2+ …

3
1 Which of the following gives the estimated number of atoms in your body?
[Avogadro’s constant = 6.02 x 1023]
A 1024 B 1027 C 1030 D 1033
2 The ideal gas equation can be given as pVm = RT, where p is the pressure of a gas,
Vm is the volume per mole of gas, T is the thermodynamic temperature of the gas,
and R is a constant. The behaviour of many real gases deviates from the ideal gas
equation but can be represented quite closely by an equation of the form
⎛ a ⎞
⎜ p + 2 ⎟(Vm − b) = RT
⎝ Vm ⎠
in which the values of a and b are characteristic of the particular gas.
What are the units of a and b?
a b
A Pa m6 mol-2 m3 mol-1
B Pa m6 mol-2 m-3 mol
C Pa m-6 mol2 m3 mol-1
D Pa m-6 mol2 m-3 mol-1
3 An experiment was conducted to determine the mass per unit length m of a vibrating
wire by measuring its resonant length I and the tension T in it. The table shows the
results obtained, together with their uncertainties.
I =(14.5 ± 0.2) cm
T =(10.5 ± 0.2) N
The formula which relates T and I is
T = 4mf2 l2
where f is the frequency of vibration. It is given that f had a percentage uncertainty of

1%.
What was the percentage uncertainty of m?

A 4% B 5% C 6% D 7%

4
4 A rocket is launched from Earth with a constant vertical acceleration. After some
time, the engines are switched off, and the rocket is allowed to fall freely back to
Earth.
Which one of the velocity-time graphs best represents the journey?
v A v B
t t
v C v D
t t
5 Experimental data taken of a child sliding down a playground slide provided the
following data.
Time/s 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

Speed/m s-1 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Which diagram represents the slope of the playground?
A B
C D

5
6 An artillery gun sited at the top of a cliff fires a shell horizontally so as to hit a target
2.0 km away from the bottom of the cliff. If the cliff is 180 m high, the initial velocity of
the shell is
A 54 m s-1 B 99 m s-1 C 110 m s-1 D 330 m s-1
7 A sphere of mass 3.00 kg rests on a frictionless slope as shown.
Wall
30˚
The spring obeys Hooke’s Law. The spring constant is 500 N m-1. What is the
compression in mm of the spring?
A 58.9 B 51.0 C 29.4 D 34.3
8 The figure below shows two masses connected by a light cord passing over a light,
free-running pulley.
m1
m2
37.0o
Given that m1 rests on a frictionless plane inclined at an angle of 37.0o to the
horizontal, what is the ratio of the masses m1/m2 in order for the system to remain in
equilibrium?
A 0.602 B 0.799 C 1.33 D 1.66

6
9 The figure below represents the various forces acting on a car moving towards the
right. The driving force, D acts on the front wheels and the total resistive force is
represented by the force, R. The weight W of the car is 12000 N and it acts on the
centre of mass, G which is 90 cm above the ground.
1.5 m 0.50 m
R G
A B
D
B A
W
Given that the values of D and R are both 7000 N, what are the values of the normal
reaction forces at A and at B acting on the wheels?
Normal reaction force at A Normal reaction force at B
A 8100 N 3900 N
B 6000 N 6000 N
C 6150 N 5850 N
D 5850 N 6150 N
10 A helicopter rises vertically with a constant speed. According to Newton’s third law,
there is a force which makes an action-reaction pair with the weight of the helicopter.
Which of the following is this force?
A The lift force created by the engine of the helicopter.

B The gravitational force on the Earth due to the helicopter.
C The air resistance on the helicopter as it rises up.
D The upthrust acting on the helicopter due to air around it.
11 The graph below shows how the force acting on a 2.0 kg body varies with time.
F/N
6.0
2.0
t/s
0
1.0 3.0
Assuming that the body is initially moving in a straight line at 3.0 m s-1, what is its
final velocity?
A 8.0 m s-1 B 10.0 m s-1 C 13.0 m s-1 D 16.0 m s-1

7
12 The figure below shows a 7.00 kg and a 2.00 kg blocks hung by an inextensible
string over a smooth pulley.
7.00 kg
2.00 kg
What is the magnitude of the acceleration of the 7.00 kg block when released?
A 1.96 m s-2 B 2.80 m s-2 C 5.45 m s-2 D 7.01 m s-2
13 A small metal sphere of mass m is falling vertically from rest in liquid glycerine. When
it reaches a constant velocity v, which of the following statements is false?
A The resistive force acting on the metal sphere is constant

B The gravitational potential energy decreases at a rate of mgv.
C The kinetic energy is constant and equal to ½ mv2.
D The total mechanical energy of the sphere is constant.

14 Two identical blocks are released from rest from the tops of two ramps as shown
below.

X

Y

60°
30°

Assuming no friction, what is the ratio of their speeds if the ratio of the length X/Y is
2.0?
A 1.1 B 1.9 C 2.0 D 3.5


8
15 The speed of a vehicle of total mass 1.60 x 103 kg was brought down to 14.0 m s-1 on
a level road by applying brakes. On braking, 550 kJ of heat was produced.
What is the speed of the vehicle just before the brakes were applied?
A 40.2 m s-1 B 29.7 m s-1 C 26.2 m s-1 D 22.2 m s-1
16 Which expression may be used to calculate power?

A Work done x Time taken
B Force x Distance moved in the direction of the force
C Charge x Electrical Potential Difference
D Velocity x Force in the direction of the velocity
17 In a progressive transverse wave set-up in a string, Fig 17.1 below shows the shape
of the string at time t = 0. X and Y are two points on the string.
Displacement
position
X Y
Fig 17.1
Displacement
time
0
Fig 17.2
Which of the following statements is true if Fig 17.2 represents the displacement-time
graph for point X?
A Point Y will have a similar displacement-time graph as it is of the same phase

as X in oscillation.
B Point X has maximum kinetic energy while Y has maximum potential energy.
C The progressive wave is travelling towards the left.
D The point Y is moving upward with maximum speed at time t = 0.

9
18 The planet Neptune is 30 times further from the Sun than the Earth so the quantity of
solar energy falling per unit time on an area of Earth of 1.0 m2 covers an area of
900 m2 on Neptune.
How does the intensity and amplitude of light waves from the Sun compare on Earth
and Neptune?
Amplitude at Intensity at Amplitude at Intensity at

Earth Earth Neptune Neptune
A a I a / 30 I / 900
B a I a / 900 I / 900
C a I a / 30 I / 30
D a I a / 900 I / 30
19 Which one of the following statements must be true about two wave-trains of
monochromatic light arriving at a point on a screen if the wave-trains are coherent?
A They are in phase.
B They interfere constructively.
C They have a constant phase difference.
D They have approximately equal amplitudes.
20 A vertical pipe open at both ends is partially submerged in water as shown in the
diagram below. A tuning fork vibrating at frequency f is placed over the top of the
pipe. The sound waves generated by the fork are reinforced when the length of air
column L corresponds to one of the resonant frequencies of the pipe.
What is the value of f if the smallest value of L for which resonance occurs is
10.0 cm? You may assume the speed of sound is 340 m s-1.
A 850 Hz
B 1700 Hz
C 2750 Hz
D 3400 Hz

10
21 Two wave generators S1 and S2 produce water waves of wavelength 2.0 m. They are
placed 6.0 m apart as shown and are operated in phase. A sensor D which
measures the amplitude of water waves is 7.0 m away from S1 as shown in the
diagram below.
S1 6.0 m S2
7.0 m
The shortest distance D could be moved along the straight line S1D in order to detect
large amplitude of the resultant wave motion is
A 1.0 m towards S1
B 3.0 m towards S1
C 1.0 m away from S1
D 3.0 m away from S1
22 Two wires X and Y, each of the same length and the same material, are connected
in parallel to a battery. The diameter of X is half that of Y.
What fraction of the total current passes through X?
A 0.20 B 0.25 C 0.33 D 0.50

23 An electrical source with internal resistance r is used to operate a lamp of resistance
R. What fraction of the total power is delivered to the lamp?
R+r R−r R R
A B C D
R R R+r r

11
24 The current I flowing through a component varies with the potential difference V
across it as shown.
Which graph best represents how the resistance R varies with V?
A B
A
C D
A
25 In the figure shown, a potential difference of 6.0 V is applied across XY.
The current I through the resistor A in the circuit is
A 0.6 A B 1.2 A C 1.8 A D 3.6 A


12
26 A p-n junction diode with the forward characteristic shown in Fig 25.1 is connected in
series with a variable, low voltage d.c. power supply, a meter of negligible internal
resistance and a 50 Ω resistor as shown in Fig 25.2.
current / mA
20
15
10
5 Fig 25.1
0
p.d. / V
0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00
Fig 25.2
When the meter reads 5 mA, the potential difference across the supply is about
A 0.25 V B 0.75 V C 1.05 V D 1.25 V
27 A small horse shoe magnet is placed on a smooth horizontal table. A wire carrying a
current is inserted into the space between the poles of a magnet as shown in the
figure. The wire is held fixed by two insulating stands on the ground.
What happens to the magnet?
A It remains stationary
B It accelerates towards the North
C It accelerates towards the East
D It accelerates towards the West

13
28 Two long straight wires, X and Y, are placed perpendicular to each other at a
distance d apart. A current flows out of page in wire X. The same current flows
from left to right in wire Y.
X
d
Y
P Q
What are the directions of the forces acting on wire Y at points P and Q due to
the magnetic field produced by wire X?
Force at P Force at Q
A out of page into page
B into page out of page
C towards X away from X
D away from X towards X
29 A blue laser beam is incident on a metallic surface, causing electrons to be ejected

from the metal. If the frequency of the laser beam is increased while the intensity of
the beam is held fixed,
A the rate of ejected electrons will decrease and the maximum kinetic energy
will increase.
B the rate of ejected electrons will remain the same but the maximum kinetic
energy will increase.
C the rate of ejected electrons will increase and the maximum kinetic energy will
increase.
D the rate of ejected electrons will remain the same but the maximum kinetic
energy will decrease.

14
30 Part of the energy level diagram of a certain atom is shown in Fig 30 below. The
energy spacing between levels 1 and 2 is twice that between 2 and 3. If an electron
makes a transition from level 3 to level 2, the radiation of wavelength λ is emitted.
Fig 30
What possible radiation wavelengths might be produced by other transitions between
the three energy levels?
λ
A Only
2
λ λ
B Both and
2 3
C Only 2λ
D Both 2λ and 3λ

Name: ________________________ Class: 09S ___________
VICTORIA JUNIOR COLLEGE

2010 JC2 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION
PHYSICS 8866/2
Higher 1
Paper 2
21/9/2010 0800h – 1000h

TUESDAY (2 Hours)
This paper consists of two sections: For marker’s use

Section A
Section A (40 marks) consists of 5 short structured
questions. Write your answers in the spaces provided Q1
for each question. Q2
Section B (40 marks) consists of 3 long structured Q3

questions. Answer any two questions. Write your Q4
answers in the spaces provided for each of the chosen
questions. Q5
The intended marks for each question or part question in

sections A and B are given in brackets [ ]. Section B
Q6
N.B. You will hand in the whole question set issued to
you at the end of the examination. Do not separate the Q7
question set into parts. Q8
s.f.
unit
Total (80)
This question set consists of a total of 19 printed pages.

2
Data
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, 1 2

s = ut + at
2
v2 = u2 + 2as
resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2+ …

3

Answer all questions in the spaces provided.
1 (a) A student set up the apparatus shown in Fig 1 in order to determine the
spring constant k of a spring by finding the extension of the spring when
additional mass is loaded.
metre rule
Fig 1
scale reading
mass
The following readings with their errors were recorded in a particular

experiment:
mass added initial scale reading final scale reading

(20 ± 1) g (32.00 ± 0.05) cm (36.30 ± 0.05) cm
Using the readings above, calculate the spring constant k with its
associated uncertainty and present your answer in SI units of N m-1. [4]
4
(b) A second student repeated the experiment in (a) with the same spring. In
this new experiment, the additional masses were loaded and the
corresponding extension readings were tabulated. A graph showing the
variation of the extension and loaded masses was then plotted. Discuss
three advantages of this procedure for the determination of the spring
constant as compared to that used in (a). [3]
2 (a) The figure below shows a thin taut wire held horizontally by two supports
placed 0.40 m apart.
0.40 m
Fixed Movable
weights
When the wire is plucked at its centre, a standing wave is formed and the
wire vibrates in its fundamental mode of frequency 50 Hz.
Explain why a standing wave is formed between the supports. [2]

5
(b) The wire is then connected to an a.c. source in a closed circuit and a
magnet is brought near to the wire as shown in the next figure below. This
causes the wire to vibrate in its fundamental mode with a large amplitude.
When the movable support is shifted from its position, the amplitude of
vibration decreases abruptly.
0.40 m B-field due to magnet
Fixed Movable
a.c. supply weights

(i) Explain the change in amplitude of the wire’s vibration when the
movable support is shifted. Hence, deduce the frequency of the a.c.
source. [3]
(ii) Suggest how the same wire can be made to resonate with a
fundamental frequency of 100 Hz.
[1]
6
3 (a) State the Law of Conservation of Momentum. [1]
(b) A 200g rubber ball is tied to a 1.0 m long string and released from rest at
angle θ. It swings down and at the very bottom has a elastic collision with
a 1.0 kg block. The block is resting on a frictionless surface and is
connected to a 20 cm long spring of spring constant 2.0 kN m-1. After
collision, the spring compressed a maximum distance of 2.0 cm.
1.0 m θ
1.0 kg spring
200 g
20 cm
(i) Determine the strain energy stored in the spring. [1]
(ii) Determine the speed of the block after collision with the ball. [2]
7
(iii) Given that the collision is elastic, determine the speed of the ball
before collision with the block. [2]
(iv) Hence, determine from what angle was the rubber ball released. [2]
4 (a) Define resistance. [1]
(b) A wire with a resistance of 6.0 Ω is stretched so that its new length is three
times its original length. Assuming that the resistivity and density of the
material are not changed during the stretching process, calculate the
resistance of the longer wire. [3]
8
(c) The circuit shown in Fig. 4 is constructed of resistors, each of which has a
maximum safe power rating of 0.40 W.
160Ω
Fig.4
1000Ω 1000Ω
(i) Find the maximum potential difference that can be applied between
X and Y without damage to any of the resistors. [3]
(ii) If this potential difference were exceeded, explain which resistor

would be most likely to fail. [2]
9
5 Read the following passage and then answer the questions which follow it.
Lithium solid-state batteries
Lithium solid-state batteries represent a new concept in battery

technology. Solid-state means that the liquids and pastes present in
ordinary battery systems are replaced by a solid plastic film which cannot
leak. This plastic film separates a lithium metal anode (positive electrode)
from a composite cathode (negative electrode) which is in contact with
aluminum foil. (See Fig 5.1) The resultant cell can be constructed so that it
has a large electrode area but is less than 0.2 mm thick. It is in many ways
similar to a sheet of paper and can be cut and formed into almost any
shape. Lithium solid-state cells such as this are rechargeable and can be
incorporated into the cases of equipment or into such items as credit
cards.
Fig. 5.1
The initial e.m.f. of the cell at full charge is 3.4 V but it rapidly falls to about
2.8 V when being used and thereafter falls as shown in Fig. 5.2. The cell
needs to be recharged when the e.m.f. reaches 2.0 V. In practice, its
average e.m.f. is 2.5 V.
The current density, energy density and charge capacity all have to be
considered for a particular application.
The recommended maximum value of discharge current density is

0.15 mA cm-2 of electrode area, the charge capacity is 3.6 C cm-2 of
electrode area, and the energy density is 4.32 x 105 J kg-1 of cell mass.
Charging one of these cells should be carried out with a constant applied
voltage of 3.4 V and with a current density limited to 2.5 mA cm-2. A typical
charging current against time graph is shown in Fig. 5.3 for a cell of
electrode area 50 cm2.
10
Fig. 5.2 Fig. 5.3
(a) By reference to the paragraphs between Fig. 5.1 and Fig. 5.2, answer the
following questions for a cell of electrode area 50 cm2.
(i) Calculate the charge-storage capacity of this cell.
(ii) Calculate the recommended maximum value of the discharge

current.
(iii) Calculate the length of time for which the cell can supply this
maximum current.
11
(iv) Calculate the energy it supplies in this time, assuming that the e.m.f.
has a constant value of 2.5 V. [6]
(b) Fig. 5.3 shows the charging graph for a cell of the same electrode area as
in (a).
(i) From the graph, estimate the average charging current over the
5-hour charging time.
(ii) Calculate the energy used in charging the cell. [3]
(c) Using your answers to (a)(iv) and (b)(ii), deduce the electrical efficiency of
the charge/discharge cycle. [1]
12
Section B [40 marks]

Answer any two questions for this section. Each question carries 20 marks. Write your
answers to each part of the questions in the spaces provided.
6 (a) (i) The figure below shows a uniform shelf of width 60.0 cm and weight
50.0 N, which is hinged at H. A box of tiles is placed at a distance 10.0
cm from the edge of the shelf. The chain is attached to the table near
its edge to keep it in equilibrium and the force in the chain is 90.0 N.
Determine
60°
wall
box
H
10.0 cm
5.0 cm
60.0 cm
1. the weight of box. [3]
2. the reaction force acting on the shelf at the hinge. [4]

13
(ii) State and explain how the tension in the chain would change if the
box is placed closer to the hinge. [2]
(b) A painter of mass m1 stands on a platform of mass m2 and pulls himself up

by two ropes which hang over massless pulleys. He pulls each rope with a
force F and accelerates upwards with a uniform acceleration a.
(i) Draw on separate diagrams, the forces acting on the platform and [4]
those acting on the man.
14
(ii) Hence or otherwise, show that the acceleration of the man, a, can be
expressed as
4 F − (m1 + m2 ) g
a= , where g = acceleration due to gravity. [3]
(m1 + m2 )
(iii) The mass of the man is 55.0 kg and the mass of the platform is
5.0 kg. If the breaking tension in the rope is 160 N, determine the
maximum acceleration at which the man can pull himself up safely. [2]
(iv) Hence, determine the maximum force that the man can exert on the
platform. [2]
15
7 (a) (i) Define magnetic flux density and state its SI unit. [2]
(ii) Express the unit of magnetic flux density in terms of its base units. [1]
(b) In the space below, draw a diagram to illustrate the magnetic field near a
long, straight wire carrying a current. [2]
A rail gun is basically a large electric circuit, made up of three parts: a

power source, a pair of parallel conducting rails and a movable conducting
projectile as shown in Fig 7.1. Fig 7.2 shows the top view of the same
construction.
Fig 7.1
16
Fig 7.2
(c) Both rails have an identical cross-section of 2.25 x 10−4 m2 and are made
of metal of resistivity 2.00 x 10−5  Ωm.
(i) Calculate the resistance of one metre length of the rail. [1]
(ii) Assuming that the projectile has negligible resistance, show that
when a 1.0 kV potential difference is applied, the current that passes
through the rails is 56 kA. (The position of the projectile is fixed at
0.100 m away from the power supply.) [2]
(d) When the power is on, the current I will run from the power supply to the
positive rail, across the projectile and back to the power supply through the
negative rail as shown in Fig 7.2.
With reference to Fig 7.2, state clearly the following:

(i) the direction of the resultant magnetic field acting on the projectile [1]
17
(ii) the direction of the force experienced by the projectile. [1]
(iii) Calculate the resultant magnetic field B at the centre of the projectile.
(The magnetic flux density B at a distance r from a straight long
μ I
conducting wire is given by B = o , where μ0 = 4π x 10-7 H m-1). [3]
2πr
(iv) Assuming that the magnetic field calculated in (d)(iii) is the same
throughout the projectile, find the magnitude of the force
experienced by the projectile. [2]
(v) State with a reason whether this force would be higher or lower in
practice. [2]
(e) Explain one way in which the force exerted on the projectile can be
increased. [1]
(f) Discuss two design problems of a rail gun in practice. [2]

18
8 (a) The photoelectric equation may be written in the form

.
Explain the physical meaning of the three terms in this equation. [3]
(b) Light of wavelength 540 nm is incident normally on a metal surface having

a work function of 3.38 eV. The light energy is totally absorbed by the
surface. Calculate the threshold wavelength for this metallic material and
discuss whether the photoelectric emission of electrons occurs. [3]
(c) The light has intensity 1.2 mW m-2 and the area of the metal surface is
1.4 cm2.
Calculate
(i) the momentum of a photon of the incident light, [1]
(ii) the rate at which photons are incident on the metal surface, [3]
19
(iii) the force exerted by the light on the surface, assuming that all the
light is absorbed. [2]
(iv) Suppose that the light is now incident on a piece of thin metal foil.
Suggest whether the force calculated in (c)(iii) is a practicable
means of moving the piece of foil. [2]
(d) Although electrons, protons and neutrons are usually treated as particles,
they also possess “wave” characteristics, which can be exploited by
Transmission Microscopes to obtain high-resolution images of extremely
small objects. For instance, electrons with a de Broglie wavelength of
5.0 nm can be used by such microscopes to image the structure of viruses.
(i) Determine the kinetic energy of an electron which has a de Broglie
wavelength of 5.0 nm.
(ii) The resolution of an image can be improved by using particles with

shorter de Broglie wavelengths. Suggest two ways to decrease the de
Broglie wavelength further, and explain your answer. [6]
Suggested Solution to 2010 JC2 Physics Prelims H1 P1
Section A (MCQs)
1. Ans: B
The mass of an average person is about 60 kg and it consists of mainly water. Molar mass of water
is 18 g = 0.018 kg.
60 kg consist of 60/0.018 = 3.3 x 103 moles.
Hence no. of molecules = 3.3 x 103 x 6.02 x 1023 = 2 x 1027 molecules.
2. Ans: A
⎛ a ⎞
⎜ p + 2 ⎟(Vm − b) = RT
⎝ Vm ⎠
Units of (a/Vm2) is equivalent to units of pressure.
Hence units of a = Pa x (m3. mol-1)2 = Pa m6 mol-2
Units of b = units of Vm = m3 mol-1
3. Ans: D
T = 4mf2 l2
m = T/f2 l2
Δm ΔT Δf Δl
= +2 +2
m T f l
0.2 ⎛ 0.2 ⎞
= + 2(0.01) + 2⎜ ⎟
10.5 ⎝ 14.5 ⎠
= 0.066 = 0.07
4. Ans: B
Gradient of the v-t graph gives the acceleration.

When rocket engine is on, the vertical acceleration is a positive constant (upwards).
When engine is switched off, the acceleration is acceleration of freefall downwards (negative g).
This is true provided the rocket is not to high up (constant value of g).
-1-
5. Ans: A
Time/s 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

Speed/m s-1 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Acc/m s-2 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5
For the first 3 s, the acceleration is constant and equal to 1.0 m s-2.
For t = 3 to 6 s, the acceleration is constant and equal to 0.5 m s-2.
The slope in option A gives the best possible way to attain this acceleration.
6. Ans: D
sy = uyt + ½ gt2
180 = 0 + ½ (9.81)t2
t = 6.06 s
sx = uxt
2000 = ux(6.06)
∴ ux = 330 m s-1
7. Ans: C
F = kx
mg sin θ = kx
(3.00)(9.81) sin 30°
x= = 0.0294 m = 29.4 mm
500
8. Ans: D
m1g sin 37° = T = m2g T

T
m1 1
= =1.66 m1
m2 sin 37° m1g 37.0o m2
37.0o
m2g
9. Ans: D
Taking moments about B:

W (1.5) = R(0.90) + FA(2.0)
(12000)(1.5) − (7000)(0.90)
FA = = 5850 N
2.0
-2-
Since net force in the vertical plane = 0
12000 = 5850 + FB
FB = 6150 N
10. Ans: B
Action and reaction pair must act on different bodies.
11. Ans: A
Change in momentum,
1
Δp = Area under F − t graph = (2 x4) + (2 × 3) = 10 kg m s −1
2
Δp 10
Final velocity, v = u + = 3.0 + = 8.0 m s −1
m 2
12. Ans: C
Applying Newton’s 2nd Law on both masses,

m1 g − m 2 g = (m1 + m2 )a
(7 − 2)(9.81)
a= = 5.45 m s − 2
( 7 + 2)
13. Ans: D
Total mechanical energy is not constant since energy is lost to the surrounding as heat produced by
drag force.
14. Ans: B
Using v 2 = u 2 + 2as
v 2 = 0 + 2( g sin θ )l
1
∴ v ∝ (l sin θ ) 2
1
vX 2 sin 60° 2
Ratio = =( ) = 1.86
vY 1 sin 30°
-3-
15. Ans: B
ΔKE = Energy lost as heat
1
m(u 2 − v 2 ) = 550 × 10 3
2
1
(1.6 × 10 3 )(u 2 − 14 2 ) = 550 × 10 3
2
⇒ u = 29.7 m s −1
16. An: D
At constant velocity, Power = Force x Velocity
17. Ans: C
Displacement
position
X Y
Figure 1
If the wave is travelling to the left, its next position can be represented by the dotted line shown
above. X can be seen to be moving from equilibrium to a displacement in the positive direction.
This matches the displacement-time graph of X shown in Fig 17.2.
18. Ans: A
1 1
I ∝ a2 ∝ 2
⇒a∝
r r
aE rN
⇒ =
aN rE
rE a
⇒ aN = × aE =
rN 30
-4-
2
I N ⎛ rE ⎞
=⎜ ⎟
I E ⎝ rN ⎠
2
⎛ 1 ⎞
=⎜ ⎟
⎝ 30 ⎠
I
⇒ IN =
900
19. Ans: C
Coherent means having a constant phase difference.
20. Ans: A
10 cm = ¼ λ => λ = 40 cm 10 cm
v=fλ
f = (340)/(40 x 10-2) = 850 Hz
21. Ans: C
By quick calculation of the 4 options given, it can be shown that only option C will meet the
condition for constructive interference to occur (i.e. path difference = nλ, where n is an integer):
When D is moved 1.0 m further away from S1,
Path difference = ( )
8.02 + 6.02 − 8.0 = 2.0 = nλ, where n is 1.
22. Ans: C
Vx = V y
⎛ l ⎞
ρ⎜ ⎟
Ix Ry ⎝ 2A ⎠ 1
= = =
I y Rx ⎛l ⎞ 2
ρ⎜ ⎟
⎝ A⎠
I y = 2I x
total current , I = 3I x
1
Ix = I
3
-5-
23. Ans: C
Total power , P = I2(R + r)

Power dissipated by lamp, PR = I2R
PR R
fraction, =
P (R + r )
24. Ans: B
1 I
=
R V
as V ↑, I ↑ linearly ⇒ gradient of graph is constant
1
as V ↑, I↓ ↓⇒ R ↑
R
25. Ans: B
VXY = 6.0 = IARBC 2.0Ω 2.0Ω

2×4 ⎞
= IA ⎛⎜ 2 + ⎟
⎝ 2+ 4⎠
IA 2.0Ω 2.0Ω
IA = 1.8 A I
VCD = 6.0 - VBC B D
C
(2.0) I = (6.0 – 1.8 x 2.0) = 2.4 X Y
2.0Ω
I = 1.2 A
Ans: C
I = 5 mA, V across diode= 0.80 V (from graph)
VR = (5x10-3)x 50 = 0.25 V
Vsupply = V across diode + VR

= 0.80 + 0.25
= 1.05 V
27. Ans: D
Using Fleming’s Left Hand rule, the wire experiences a force to the East.
By Newton’s 3rd Law, the magnet will experience a force to the West.
-6-
28. Ans: B
d
Bx
Y
P Q
Bx
The magnetic field Bx due to current in wire X is as shown. It acts in the directions as given by the
arrows Bx at points P and Q as shown.
By Fleming’s Left hand rule, the point P will experience a force into the page, and the point Q
experiences a force out of the page.
29. Ans: A
hf = Φ + K max
Φ is a constant, depending on the type of metal. When the frequency of the incident photons is
increased, Kmax will increase.
Constant intensity, I =
power ( )
n hf
= t
area area
The area illuminated remains unchanged, so the increase in f will be accompanied by a decrease in
(n/t), i.e. the no. of incident photons per unit time will decrease. As a result, the rate of ejected
electrons will decrease.
30. Ans: B
hc
Let E32 = E =
λ
The other possible transitions are:
⎛ hc ⎞ hc ⎛ hc ⎞ hc
E21 = 2E = 2 ⎜ ⎟ = and E31 = 3E = 3 ⎜ ⎟ =
⎝ λ ⎠ ( λ / 2) ⎝ λ ⎠ (λ / 3)
λ λ
These transitions will produce the wavelengths and .
2 3
-7-
Suggested Answer to VJC Prelim 2010 H1 P2
Section A
1(a) F mg
k= =
e (x2 − x1 )

0.020 x 9.81
=
(36.30− 32.00)
= 4.563 N m −1
Δk Δm Δe
= +
k m e
1 0.1
= + = 0.073
20 4.3

Δk = 0.073 x 4.563 = 0.3 N m (to 1 sf)
-1

Hence k = (4.6 ± 0.3) N m‐1

(b) Advantages of many sets of readings and drawing graph: (state any 3)
1. By drawing best fit line, random errors are reduced.
2. Systematic error can be spotted eg. if the F‐e graph does not pass
through origin.
3. Can spot erroneous points that are out of the trend.
4. Can check if the proportionality limit is exceeded eg. if the F‐e
graph turns into a curve instead of a straight line.

2 (a) (i) Incident waves travel along the wire to the ends are reflected.
The incident and reflected waves travelling in opposite directions have same frequency
and amplitude. They superimpose to form standing waves.
(b) (i) When the support is shifted, the natural frequency of the wire is changed and no longer

matches that of the driving frequency of the periodic force produced by the alternating
current in the wire and magnetic field.
The system no longer resonates and hence its amplitude decreases.
The frequency of the a.c. source must therefore be the natural frequency of the wire
which is 50 Hz.
(ii) The length l can be reduced to 0.20 m to double the fundamental frequency.
1
The weights attached to the wire can be increased to increase the speed of the waves to
80 m s‐1.
3 (a) In a system of interacting bodies, the total momentum of the system remains
constant provided no external force acts on the system.

(b) (i) Strain energy stored =
1 2 1
2 2
( )(
kx = 2.0 × 10 3 2.0 × 10 − 2 )
2
= 0.40 J
(ii) By Conservation of Energy,
KE of block after collision = Strain energy stored in spring
1 1
∴ mv 2 = 0.40 ⇒ (1.0)v 2 = 0.40
2 2
−1
v = 0.894 m s
(iii) By conservation of momentum, m1u1 + m2 u 2 = m1v1 + m2 v2

(0.2)u1 + 0 = (0.2)v1 + (1.0)v2
For elastic collision, u1 − u 2 = v2 − v1
u1 − 0 = v2 − v1

⇒ v1 = v2 − u1
∴ 0.2u1 = 0.2(v2 − u1 ) + v2
1.2
0.4u1 = 1.2v2 ⇒ u1 = (0.894) = 2.68 m s −1
0.4
Speed of ball = 2.68 m s‐1
(iv) By Conservation of Energy,
Gain in KE of ball = Loss in GPE of ball
1
∴ mv 2 − 0 = mg (l − l cosθ )
2
v2 2.68 2
⇒ (1 − cosθ ) = =
2 gl 2(9.81)(1.0)
θ = 50.7°

2
4 (a) The resistance of a conductor is the potential difference across the
V
conductor per unit current flowing through it. ( R = )
I
(b)
ρl
Using R = = 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - (1)
A
ρ (3l )
(A 3 )
R' = - - - - - - - - - - - - - (2) for same density of material,

m
R' original area, A=
(2) =9 ρl
(1) R
m A
R ' = 9 x 6 .0 = 54 Ω new area, A = '
=
ρ (3l ) 3
(c) C
X

160Ω

B

1000Ω 1000Ω

Y A

(i) If the safe power rating is 0.40 W,
V2
Using P = , the maximum safe voltage for
R
V2
1000 Ω 0.40 =
1000
V = 20 V

2
V
160 Ω 0.40 =
160
V =8V
3
1000 V XY
V XY = I ( + 160) , I =
2 500 + 160
V AB = IR AB
⎛ V XY ⎞
if VAB = 20V , 20 = ⎜ ⎟ × 500 ,
⎝ 500 + 160 ⎠
V XY = 26.4 V
⎛ V XY ⎞
if VBC = 8V , 8=⎜ ⎟ ×160 ,
⎝ 500 + 160 ⎠
V XY = 33 V
∴ Max safe voltage would be 26.4V

Or By Potential divider principle (good to know this method!)

1000
V AB = 2 ×V

500 + 160
XY
500
if VAB = 20 V , 20 = × V XY
500 + 160
VXY = 26.4V
(ii)
(iii) 160
if VAB = 8V , 8= × V XY
500 + 160
VXY = 33V
(iv) If this potential difference were exceeded, one of the 1000 Ω resistor would most likely
fail. This is because when VXY exceeds 26.4 V , the max safe power for the 1000 Ω would
be exceeded first.

4
5 ai. Charge‐storage capacity = (charge capacity) x (electrode area)
= 3.6 x 50
= 180 C
ii. Maximum discharge current = (maximum discharge current density) x (electrode area)
= 0.15 x 50
= 7.5 mA
Q
iii. Time t =
I
180
=
7.5 × 10 −3
= 24 000 s
iv. Energy supplied = IVt
= 7.5 x 10‐3 x 2.5 x 24 000
= 450 J
bi. The area under the graph (Fig. 5.3) is the total charge. Divide it by the time
period of 5 hours to get the average charging current.

Average current = 42.5 / 5
= 8.5 mA
ii. Energy used = IVt
= 8.5 x 10‐3 x 3.4 x 5 x 3600
5
= 520 J
450
c. Efficiency = × 100 %
520
= 87 %
Section B
6 (a) (i) 1. sum of clockwise moment = sum of anticlockwise moment
(50.0)(30.0) + (Wbox )(50.0) = (90.0 cos 60)(55.0)
Wbox = 19.5 N
2. Since the shelf is in equilibrium, ∑F = 0
Vertical component of reaction force at hinge:
Fy = 50.0 + 19.5 – 90.0 cos 60
= 24.5 N
Horizontal component of reaction force at hinge:
Fx = 90.0 sin 60
= 77.94 N
Reaction force = 24.52 + 77.942 = 81.7 N
77.94
θ = tan −1 = 72.5° to the vertical
24.5
(ii) The tension will be smaller.
When box is placed closer to the hinge, the clockwise moment due to its weight is thus
smaller. The anti‐clockwise moment due to the tension will thus be smaller too and
hence the tension in the chain will be smaller.
6
F
F
(b )(i)
F F

N

Wplatform
Wman
N
F : force of string on man (tension)

F : force of string on platform (tension) Wman : weight of man

Wplatform : weight of platform N : Force of platform on man

N : Force of man on platform

(ii) From free body diagram of platform:
2F – m2g – N = m2a ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ (1)
From free body diagram of man:
2F + N – m1g = m1a ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐ (2)
(1)+(2):
4F – m1g – m2g = (m1 + m2 )a
4 F − (m1 + m2 ) g
Hence a = (shown)
(m1 + m2 )

4(160) − (55.0 + 5.0)(9.81)

(iii) amax =
(55.0 + 5.0)
= 0.86 m s‐2
(iv) From eqn (1):
2(160) – (5.0)(9.81) – N = (5.0)(0.86)
N = 266.7 = 270 N
7
7 5(a)(i) Magnetic flux density is defined as the force per unit current per unit length acting on a
straight conductor that is placed perpendicularly to the field.
SI units: tesla (T)

F
(ii) B=
IL
N
Units of B =
Am
kg m s -2
= = kg s -2 A -1
Am

(b)

ρL
R=
A
(c)(i)
2.00 x 10 −5 x 1.0
= = 0.0889 Ω
2.25 x 10 − 4

(ii) Resistance in 0.200 m of rail = 0.0889 x 0.200 = 0.0178 Ω
Hence current I = V/R = 1000/0.0178 = 56 kA

(d)(i) Direction of B‐field is into the plane of paper.

(ii) The force is towards the right.
(iii) The B - field due to one rail is
μo I
B=
2πr

4π x 10 − 7 x 56000
= = 0.56 T
2π x 0.020
Hence, the resultant B - field due to 2 rails is 0.56 x 2 = 1.12 T

(iv) F = BIL
= 1.12 x 56000 x 0.040 = 2.5 kN
8

(v) Possible answers: The force may be lower in reality because at high current, the wires would be
very hot and hence increased resistance.
Or: The force may be higher because the B‐field calculated in d(iii) is the B‐field at the centre.
The B‐field nearer the rails will be of higher value, thus the force may be larger.

(e) Increasing the p.d. of the power supply, thus increasing the current in the rails and projectile. In
this way, both B‐field due to wire and the current increases through projectile.

(f) Any two design problems:
1. Current may be too high. May produce so much heat that it would melt the rails.
2. The current in each rail of a rail gun runs in opposite directions. This creates a repulsive force,
proportional to the current, that attempts to push the rails apart. Because the currents in a rail
gun are so large, the repulsion between the two rails is significant.
3. Wear and tear on rail guns is a serious problem. Many break after a few uses, and sometimes
they can only be used once.

8 (a) hf is the energy of the incident photon
Φ is the work function, which is the minimum energy required to cause photoelectric
emission
1 2
mv is the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons
2
hc
(b) Work function, Φ = , where λth is the threshold wavelength.
λth
hc (6.63 × 10 −34 )(3.00 × 108 )

So, λth = = = 3.68 × 10−7 m = 368 nm
Φ 3.38(1.60 × 10 −19 )
Since 540 nm is above λth, the incident photons do not possess sufficient energy to
cause photoelectric emission.
(c) (i) Momentum of an incident photon,
h 6.63 × 10 −34
p= = = 1.23 × 10−27 kg m s−1
λ 540 × 10 −9
(ii) Incident power on the metal surface, P = Intensity × Area
= (1.2 mW m−2)(1.4 × 10−4 m2)
= 1.68 × 10−7 W
9
hc (6.63 × 10−34 )(3.00 × 108 )
Energy of a single incident photon, E = =
λ 540 × 10− 9
= 3.683 × 10−19 J
P 1.68 × 10 −7
No. of photons incident per unit time, n = = −19
= 4.56 × 1011 s−1
E 3.683 × 10
(iii) Magnitude of the change in momentum of each photon as it is absorbed,
Δp = | pf − pi | = | 0 − 1.23 × 10−27 | = 1.23 × 10−27 kg m s−1
⎛ Δp ⎞
Force exerted on the surface, F = (nΔt )⎜ ⎟ = n × Δp
⎝ Δt ⎠
= (4.56 × 1011)(1.23 × 10−27)
= 5.61 × 10−16 N
(iv) Suppose the piece of foil has a mass of 1 g, the acceleration resulting from F
would be
F 5.61 × 10 −16
a= = −3
= 5.61 × 10−13 m s−2
m 1 × 10
This is extremely small, so the effect on the foil would be negligible. Hence, the force
would not be a practicable means to move the piece of foil.
h 6.63 × 10 −34
(d )(i) Momentum of the electron, p = = = 1.326 × 10−25 kg m s−1
λ 5.0 × 10 −9
Kinetic energy of the electron, K =
p2
=
(
1.326 × 10− 25 )
= 9.65 × 10−21 J
2

2m 2(9.11 × 10− 31 )
h h
(ii) The de Broglie wavelength of a particle may be expressed as: λ = =
p 2mK
If we increase the kinetic energy K of the particle, the above relation tells us that λ
would be reduced.
So, the electrons can be accelerated through a larger potential difference to achieve a
greater K, so that λ is smaller.
10
If we use a more massive particle (larger m), then λ would also be reduced.
So, instead of electrons, we can accelerate more massive particles like protons to
achieve a shorter λ.
11
Candidate’s Name ………………………………. CTG ……….…
YISHUN JUNIOR COLLEGE

JC 2 Preliminary Examinations 2010
PHYSICS 8866/2
HIGHER 1
19 August 2010
Paper 2
Candidates to answer on the Question Paper Thursday
2 hours
YISHUN JUNIOR COLLEGE YISHUN JUNIOR COLLEGE YISHUN JUNIOR COLLEGE YISHUN JUNIOR COLLEGE YISHUN JUNIOR COLLEGE
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. Section A
Write your name and CTG in the spaces at the

1 /4
top of this page.
2 /6
Write in dark blue or black pen on both sides of the 3 /8
paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams,
graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper 4 /6
clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
5 /8
Section A
Answer all questions. 6 /8
Section B Section B
7 /20
You are advised to spend about one hour on each
section. 8 /20
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work 9 /20

securely together. /80
Total
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at
the end of each question or part question.
8866/02/JC2 Prelims/YJC2010
2
Data
Formulae
1 2
2
v2 = u2 + 2as

resistors in series, R = R1 + R2+……….
resistors in parallel, 1 1 1
= + + ........
R R1 R 2
8866/02/JC2 PRELIM/YJC2010
3
Section A
1 Estimate the following quantities and give appropriate units.
(a) The momentum of an Olympic sprinter during a 100 m race.
momentum = …………... Unit ……...[2]
(b) The energy of a photon of red light.
energy = …………... Unit ……….[2]
2 A satellite orbiting the Earth receives electromagnetic signals and then re-transmits back to
Earth at a frequency of 2.3 GHz.
(a) Calculate the wavelength of the re-transmitted signal.
Wavelength ...........................m [2]
(b) State the region of the electromagnetic spectrum to which these waves might belong.
...........................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The satellite is positioned 35 000 km from the Earth. The power received by the dish
antenna on the Earth is 16 nW.
Calculate the power that would be received at the dish if the satellite were to be re-
positioned at a distance of 17 500 km from Earth. Give your reasoning.
Power received = .........................W [2]

.............................................................................................................................................[1]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a stretched string driven by a vibrator on one end and is fixed to a wall on the
other end. A stationary wave is produced on the string as shown.
vibrator
Position of string ½ cycle wall

later than solid curve
Fig 3.1
(a) State the physical conditions that are necessary for a stationary wave to form on the string.
................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain how you know that the wave on the string is transverse.
................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Compare the amplitude and phase of the oscillations of points A and B on the string.
Amplitude............................................................................................................................[1]
Phase..................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The length of the string is 1.2 m and the speed of the transverse wave on the string is 6.2
m s-1. Calculate the vibration frequency of the vibrator.
Vibration frequency.......................Hz [2]
5
(e) The frequency of the vibrator is tripled. Sketch the new shape of the stationary wave on
Fig. 3.2.
Fig 3.2
[1]
4 (a) State the conditions for the equilibrium of a body which is acted upon by a number of
forces.
................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A student holds a uniform metre rule at one end in two different ways, as shown in Fig. 4.1
and 4.2 below.
(i) On Fig. 4.1 draw and label an arrow to represent the weight W of the metre rule and
an arrow to represent the force F exerted by the student’s hand on ruler. State the
relationship between the magnitudes of F and W. [2]
Fig. 4.2
Fig. 4.1
6
(ii) In Fig. 4.2, the rule is held horizontally using the thumb and first finger. On Fig. 4.2
draw and label the three forces acting on the metre rule. List these forces in order of
increasing magnitude.
1 ……………………………………………………..
2 ………………………………………………………
3 ……………………………………………………… [2]
5 Fig. 5 is a top view of a metal wire of length 0.53 m and cross sectional area 1.0 x 10-6 m2 is
situated at an angle of 60o to a uniform magnetic field of flux density 1.8 x 10-3 T.
0.53 m Magnetic field

direction
600
Metal wire
Fig. 5
The metal wire has a density of 7.9 x 103 kg m-3 and resistivity of 8.8 x 10-8 Ω m.
A potential difference is applied between the ends of the wire so that there is an
electromagnetic force acting on the wire in the direction out of paper.
(a) On Fig. 5, mark the direction of the current in the wire. [1]
(b) For the wire, calculate

i) its weight
Weight = …………………N [2]

ii) its resistance
Resistance = …………………..Ω [2]
7
(c) Calculate the potential difference required between the ends of the wire so that the
electromagnetic force on the wire can balance its weight.
Potential difference = ………………….. V [2]
(d) the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field is 1.8 x 10-5 T. State and explain
why in practice current-carrying wires are not seen to lift off the ground.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………..…….[1]
6 A model rocket of initial mass 1.3 kg is fired vertically into the air. Its mass decreases at a
constant rate of 0.23 kg s-1 as the fuel burns. When the fuel is completely burnt, the final mass
of the rocket is 0.38 kg. During the flight, the gravitational field strength acting on the rocket may
be considered to have a constant value of 9.8 N kg-1.
(a) Calculate
(i) the initial weight of the rocket,
Initial weight = ………………….N [1]
(ii) the final weight of the rocket,
Final weight = ………………….N [1]
(iii) the time taken for the fuel to be completely burnt.
Time = ……………….s [1]
8
(b) The variation with time t of the upward force on the rocket during the first 3 seconds
after firing is shown in Fig. 6.
Force / N
Fig. 6
(i) On Fig. 6, use the same scales to draw a line to represent the variation with time t
of the total weight of the rocket during the first 5 seconds after firing.
[1]
(ii) Read off from Fig. 6 the time delay between firing the rocket and lift-off.
Time delay = ……………………s [1]
(c) Write down an equation to represent the relation between the resultant force F on a body,
the time t for which the force acts and the change in momentum ∆p of the body.
[1]
(d) The energy stored in the fuel is converted partly into kinetic energy and thermal energy of
the rocket. State two other forms of energy into which the energy of the fuel is converted.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..…..…
……………………………………………………………………………………………...………[2]
9
Section B
Answer any TWO questions
7 The aeroplane shown in Fig. 7.1 is travelling horizontally at 95 m s-1. It has to drop a crate of
mass 10 kg of emergency supplies.
The air resistance acting on the crate may be neglected.
95 m s-1
P
Q R
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) The crate is released from the aircraft at point P and lands at point Q. Sketch the
path followed by the crate between P and Q as seen from the ground. [1]
(ii) Explain why the horizontal component of the crate’s velocity remains constant while
it is moving through the air.
............................................................................................................................................
…….....................................................................................................................................
…….................................................................................................................................[2]
10
(b) (i) To avoid damage to the crate, the vertical component of the crate’s velocity on
landing should not exceed 32 m s-1. Determine the maximum height from which the
crate can be dropped.
Maximum height = .......................m [2]
(ii) Calculate the time taken for the crate to reach the ground if the crate is dropped
from a height of 52 m.
Time taken = .......................s [2]
(iii) If R is a point on the ground directly below P, calculate the horizontal distance QR.
QR = .......................m [2]
(c) In practice, air resistance is not negligible. State and explain the effect of air resistance on
the maximum height from which the crate can be dropped.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………[2]
(d) (i) After the crate landed on Q, it continued to move with initial horizontal velocity
reduced to ¼. It came to rest after travelling a distance of 4.0 m. Determine the
frictional force experienced by the crate.
Frictional force = .......................N [3]
11
(ii) Assuming the frictional force is constant, sketch in Fig. 7.2 the variation of speed of
the crate with distance covered, after it landed on Q. [2]
v / ms-1
d /m
Fig. 7.2
(iii) After covering a distance of 1.5 m, determine the speed of the crate.
Speed of crate = .......................m s─1 [2]
(iv) To ensure the emergency supplies reach a longer distance, describe and explain
the changes that need to be made.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………[2]
8 (a) Define the terms potential difference and resistance.
.…..……………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………[2]
(b) Two sets of coloured lamps A and B are designed for use with a 240 V supply. There is a
total of 12 lamps in each set. In set A, the lamps are arranged in series, while in set B, they
are arranged in parallel. The lamps in each set are identical, but the lamps in set A are
different from the lamps in set B.
12
The total power dissipated by the lamps in each set is 60 W.
For each lamp in the set connected in series and in parallel, calculate the following
quantities. [8]
Set A (Series) Set B (Parallel)

(i) current flowing
(ii) potential difference
(iii) resistance
(c) The circuit for set A (connected in series) is shown in Fig. 8.
Fig. 8
The lamps do not light up when the circuit is closed. Hence a voltmeter is used to test the
circuit. For each of the following observations, identify the fault.
(i) the potential difference between A and M is zero
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………...………………………………………………….[1]
(ii) the potential difference is zero across every lamp except EF, across which the
potential difference is 240 V.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………...………………………………………………….[1]
13
(iii) potential difference between A and M is 240 V but the potential difference is zero
across every single lamp.
…………………………………………………………………..………………………..……………
…………………………………………………...………………………………………………….[1]
(d) A battery of e.m.f 8.00 V and internal resistance 0.60Ω is connected to a resistor of
resistance 8.36 Ω.
Determine
Current = ……………….. A [2]
(ii) the potential difference across the 8.36 Ω resistor
Potential difference = ……………………… V [2]
(iii) the power dissipated by the internal resistor.
Power dissipated = ……………… W [2]
(iv) Explain why the potential difference across the terminals of a battery is normally
lower then the battery’s e.m.f.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………[1]
14
9 (a) (i) Describe the meaning of a photon.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………[1]
(ii) Show that E, the energy of a photon is related to λ its wavelength by
E λ = 1.99 x 10-16,
where E is measured in J and λ is measured in nm.
[2]
(b) Wave theory predicts that, if electromagnetic radiation strikes a metal surface and ejects
an electron, the kinetic energy of the electron should depend on the intensity of the wave.
However observation shows that, in its interaction with matter to release an electron, it is
the frequency of the electromagnetic wave, and not the intensity, which controls the
maximum kinetic energy of the electron.
A lamp is placed above a metal surface which contains atoms of radius 2.0 x 10-10 m. Each
electron in the metal requires a minimum energy of 3.2 x 10-19 J before it can be emitted
from the metal surface, and it may be assumed that the electron can collect energy from a
circular area which has a radius equal to that of the atom. The lamp provides energy at an
intensity of 0.40 W m-2 at the metal surface.
(i) Estimate on the basis of wave theory the time required for an electron to collect
sufficient energy for it to be emitted from the metal.
Time = …………………….s [4]
15
(ii) Using the particulate nature of matter, comment on the validity of your answer to
(b)(i).
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………[2]
(b) Two metal electrodes A and B are sealed in an evacuated glass envelope and a potential
difference V, measured using the voltmeter, is applied between them as shown in Fig. 9.1.
A
+ Variable
V
B d.c.
- supply
Fig. 9.1
B is then illuminated with monochromatic light of wavelength 365 nm and I, the current in
the circuit is measured using the ammeter for various values of V. The results are shown in
Fig. 9.2.
I/mA
V/V
-1 1 2 Fig. 9.2
(i) From this graph, deduce the p.d. required to stop photoelectric emission from
B.
P.d = …………………. V [1]
16
(ii) Calculate the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons.
Maximum kinetic energy = ………………………….J [2]
(iii) Calculate the work function of B.
Work Function energy = ……………….. J [2]
(iv) Deduce the threshold frequency of the metal surface B
Threshold frequency = …………………. Hz [2]
(v) State with a reason, what modifications would be required, separately, to

increase
1. the kinetic energy of a photoelectron [2]
……………………………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………….
2. the rate of production of photoelectrons [2]
…………………………………………………………….………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………
End of paper

JC 2 Preliminary Examination 2010
PHYSICS 8866/1
HIGHER 1
19 August 2010
Paper 1 Multiple Choice Thursday
Additional Material: Optical Mark Sheet 1 hour
Write your name and CTG on the Optical Mark Sheet in the spaces provided.
Shade your last two digits of your CTG and the last 3 digits of your IC number in the
space provided.
E.g. if you are from CTG 219 and the last 3 digits of your IC number were
S92XX808 Z, you will shade 19808.
There are thirty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question
there are four possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider
correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate optical mark sheet.
Read the instructions on the answer sheet very carefully.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

Each correct answer will score a credit. Marks will not be deducted for a wrong
answer. Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
2
Data
Formulae
1 2
2
v2 = u2 + 2as

= + + ........
R R1 R 2
3
hc
1. The energy of a photon of wavelength λ is given by E = , where c is the speed of light and
λ
h is the Planck constant. What are the base units of h?
A kg m s─1
B kg m2 s─1
C kg m2 s─2
D kg m2 s─3
2. A body of mass 10 kg is dropped from rest from a tower of measured height (20 ± 2) m. If the
acceleration of free fall is taken as 10 m s─2, the time it takes to fall to the ground should be
recorded as
A (2.00 ± 0.02) s
B (2.0 ± 0.1) s
C (4.00 ± 0.02) s
D (4.0 ± 0.1) s
3. Which of the following pairs includes a vector and a scalar?
A Displacement; acceleration
B Momentum; force
C Power; velocity
D Frequency; speed
4. A small rubber ball is thrown upwards from a horizontal table and allowed to bounce on a
horizontal table. Which graph best represents the variation with time, t of the acceleration
experienced by the ball, a?
A a B a
t t
C
a D
a
t
t
4
5. An object is projected to reach T, as shown below at an angle to the horizontal in a

gravitational field and it follows a parabolic path, PQRST. These points are the positions of
the object after successive equal time intervals.
R
Q S
P T
The displacements PQ, QR, RS, and ST
A have equal horizontal component

B have equal vertical component
C decrease at constant rate in the horizontal direction
D increase at constant rate in the vertical direction
5
6. A mass of m hits a massive wall normally at a speed of u. If the collision is inelastic, which of
the following is correct?
Motion of mass Principle of Total kinetic energy

conservation of
momentum
A Mass returns along its Conserved Not conserved
original path with speed u.
B Mass returns along its Conserved Conserved

original path with speed
less than u.
C Mass does not rebound Conserved Not conserved
D Mass does not rebound Not conserved Not conserved
7 A body of mass 5 kg, starts from rest and is acted on by a net force, F which varies with time,
t as shown below. What is the value of the momentum at t = 4 s?
F /N
10
0 t /s
0 2 4 6
A 0Ns B 10 N s C 30 N s D 40 N s
8. A parachutist descends vertically with uniform acceleration towards the ground, the net
resultant force acting on him
A Is zero
B Is constant and non-zero
C Increases uniformly with respect to time
D Is proportional to the displacement moved
6
9. A spring obeying Hooke’s law has an unstretched length of 50 mm. When the spring is
extended to 70 mm, the tension in the spring measures 8.0 N. What is the value of the stored
elastic potential energy in the spring?
A 0.08 J
B 0.98 J
C 8J
D 0.098 J
10. A ladder resting on a rough floor and leaning against a smooth wall is in equilibrium. It is of
weight W and the contact forces exerted on the ladder by the wall and floor are X and Y
respectively. Which of the following shows the correct free body diagram of the ladder?
A B
X
X
Y W W
C D
X X
Y Y
W W
11. An electric motor is required to haul a cage of mass 400 kg up a mine shaft through a vertical
height of 1000 m in 3.00 minutes. How much electrical power is required if the overall
efficiency is 87%?
A 2.55 kW
B 19.0 kW
C 21.8 kW
D 25.1 kW
7
12. The diagram shows a skateboarder descending a ramp.
skateboarder
The skateboarder starts from rest at the top of the ramp at P and leaves the ramp at Q
horizontally with a velocity v.
In going from P to Q, the skateboarder’s centre of gravity descends a vertical height of 1.5 m.
What is the horizontal velocity, v?
A 3.8 m s─1
B 5.4 m s─1
C 14.7 m s─1
D 29.4 m s─1
13. A raindrop falls at a constant vertical velocity of 1.8 m s─1 in still air. The mass of the raindrop
is 7.2 × 10─9 kg. What is the work done on the raindrop as it falls through a vertical distance
of 4.5 m?
A 3.2 x 10─7 J
B 1.2 x 10─7 J
C 2.0 x 10─7 J
D 4.2 x 10─7 J
14. Transverse progressive sinusoidal waves of wavelength λ are passing vertically along a
horizontal rope. P and Q are points on the rope 5λ/4 apart and the waves are traveling from P
to Q. Which one of the following correctly describes Q at an instant when P is displaced
upwards but is moving downwards?
Displacement of Q Movement of Q
A upwards downwards
B upwards upwards
C downwards upwards
D downwards downwards
8
15. A sound wave of amplitude 0.20 mm has an intensity of 3.0 W m─2.

What will be the intensity of a sound wave of the same frequency which has an amplitude of
0.40 mm?
A 4.2 W m─2
B 6.0 W m─2
C 9.0W m─2
D 12 W m─2
16. In a Young’s double slit interference experiment, monochromatic light placed behind a single
slit illuminates two narrow slits and the interference pattern is observed on a screen placed
some distance away from the slits. Which one of the following decreases the separation of
the fringes?
A increasing the width of the single slit

B decreasing the separation of the double slits
C increasing the distance between the double slits and the screen
D using monochromatic light of higher frequency
17. Which of the following correctly states the difference between a progressive wave and a
stationary wave?
Progressive wave Stationary wave

A all the particles on the wave some of the particles on the wave do not vibrate
vibrate
B all the particles on the wave vibrate all the particles on the wave vibrate
with different amplitudes with the same amplitude
C all the particles on the wave none of the particles on the wave vibrate in
vibrate in phase with each other phase with each other
D some of the particles on the wave all the particles on the wave vibrate in phase
do not vibrate in phase
9
18. The diagram shows a microwave transmitter T which directs microwaves of wavelength λ at
two slits S1 and S2 formed by metal plates. The microwaves that pass through the two slits
are detected by a receiver.
P
S2
O
T S1 Receiver
When the receiver is moved to P from O, which is equidistant from S1 and S2, the signal
received decreases from a maximum to a minimum. Which one of the following statements is
a correct deduction from this observation?
A The path difference S1O - S2O = 0.5 λ

B The path difference S1O - S2O = λ
C The path difference S1P -S2P = 0.5 λ
D The path difference S1P - S2P = λ
19. A battery of e.m.f 24 V and negligible internal resistance is connected to a resistor network as
shown in the circuit diagram below.
30 Ω 40 Ω
B
A
60 Ω 120 Ω
R1 24 V
What is the resistance of the single equivalent resistor that could replace the four resistors
between the points A and B
A 50.0 Ω
B 20.0 Ω
C 250 Ω
D 70.0 Ω
10
20. Referring to question 19, if R1 is 50 Ω, what is the current in the 60 Ω resistor?
A 0.08 A
B 0.12 A
C 0.16 A
D 0.24 A
21. A metal wire has resistance, R. The wire is now stretched to twice its original length by a
process that keeps its volume constant. If the resistivity of the metal of the wire remains
constant, determine the new resistance in terms of R.
A 0.5R
B R
C 2R
D 4R
22. In the circuit shown the battery has emf ‫ א‬and internal resistance r.
2.4 Ω
When the switch S is open, the voltmeter, which has infinite resistance, reads 8.0 V. When
the switch is closed, the voltmeter reads 6.0 V.
Determine the value of r.
A 0.5 Ω
B 0.8 Ω
C 1.0 Ω
D 1.2 Ω
11
23. Four resistors are connected as shown.

1Ω
P Q
4Ω 2Ω
S R
3Ω
Between which two points does the maximum resistance of the combination occur?
A P and Q
B Q and S
C R and S
D S and P
24. Three similar light bulbs are connected to a constant-voltage d.c. supply as shown below.
Each bulb operates at normal brightness and the ammeter (of negligible resistance) registers
a steady current.
The filament of one of the bulbs breaks. What happens to the ammeter reading and to the
brightness of the remaining bulb?
Ammeter reading Bulb brightness

A increases increases
B increases unchanged
C unchanged unchanged
D decreases unchanged
12
25. An electron is moving along the axis of a current carrying solenoid. Which of the following is a
correct statement about the electromagnetic force acting on the electron?
A the force acts in the direction of motion

B the force acts in the opposite direction to the motion
C the force acts perpendicular to the direction of motion
D no force acts on the electron
26. The diagram shows three long straight wires P, Q and R normal to the plane of the paper.
Wires P and R carry currents directed into the plane of the paper, and wire Q carries a
current directed out of the paper. All three currents have the same magnitude.
P
B Q
C D
Which arrow best represents the direction of the resultant force on wire P?
13
27. A long straight wire XY lies in the same plane as a square loop of wire PQRS which is
free to move. The sides PS and QR are initially parallel to XY.
P Q
R
S
When steady current passes through the wire and the loop, as shown in the diagram, what
will be the effect on the loop?
A It will move towards the long wire.

B It will move away from the long wire.
C It will rotate about an axis parallel to XY.
D It will be unaffected.
− 13.6
28. The energy levels of an electron in a hydrogen atom are given by E = eV , where n =
n2
1, 2, 3, ….
The energy required to excite an electron from the ground state to the first excited state is
A 3.4 eV
B 4.5 eV
C 10.2 eV
D 13.6 eV
14
29. When a parallel beam of white light passes through a cool vapour, dark lines appear in the
spectrum of the emergent light. This is principally because energy is absorbed and
A is not re-radiated at all.

B is re-radiated as infra-red.
C is re-radiated as ultra-violet.
D is re-radiated uniformly in all directions.
30. An ultra-violet radiation causes the emission of electrons from a zinc plate. How would a
more intense source having radiation of the same wavelength affect the maximum energy per
electron, AND on the number of electrons emitted per second?
Maximum energy Number of electrons emitted per second

per electron
A less more
B the same the same
C the same more
D more the same
END OF PAPER
1 B 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 A
6 C 7 C 8 B 9 A 10 C
11 D 12 B 13 A 14 B 15 D
16 D 17 A 18 C 19 A 20 A
21 D 22 B 23 B 24 D 25 D
26 C 27 A 28 C 29 D 30 C

JC 2 Preliminary Examinations 2010
PHYSICS 8866/2
HIGHER 1
19 August 2010
Paper 2
Candidates to answer on the Question Paper. Thursday
. 2 hours
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so. Section A
Write your name and CTG in the spaces at the

1 /4
top of this page.
2 /6
Write in dark blue or black pen on both sides of the 3 /8
paper. You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams,
graphs or rough working. Do not use staples, paper 4 /6
clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
5 /8
Section A 6 /8
Section B
Section B
Answer any two questions. 7 /20
You are advised to spend about one hour on each 8 /20

section.
9 /20
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work /80
securely together. Total
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at

the end of each question or part question.
8866/02/JC2 Prelims/YJC2010
2
Data
Formulae
1 2
2
v2 = u2 + 2as

= + + ........
R R1 R 2
3
Section A
1 Estimate the following quantities and give appropriate units.
(a) The momentum of an Olympic sprinter during a 100 m race.
Mass = 50 – 70 kg
Speed = 10 ms-1
Momentum = 500 to 700 kg ms-1 or Ns
momentum = …………... Unit ……...[2]
(b) The energy of a photon of red light.
λred approx = 700 nm
hc
E= = 2.84x10-19 J or 1.78 eV
λ
energy = …………... Unit ……….[2]
2 A satellite orbiting the Earth receives electromagnetic signals and then re-transmits them back
to Earth at a frequency of 2.3 GHz.
(a) Calculate the wavelength of the re-transmitted signal.
recognises GHz as 109

λ = 3 × 108/2.3 × 109
= 0.13 m
Wavelength ...........................m [2]
(b) State the region of the electromagnetic spectrum to which these waves might belong.
.........................radiowaves(microwave is acceptable)...................................................[1]
(c) The satellite is positioned 35 000 km from the Earth. The power received by the dish
antenna on the Earth is 16 nW.
Calculate the power that would be received at the dish if the satellite were to be re-
positioned at a distance of 17 500 km from Earth. Give your reasoning.
4
mention of/evidence of use of inverse-square law

64 nW
Power received = .........................W [2]

.............................................................................................................................................[1]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a stretched string driven by a vibrator on one end and is fixed to a wall on the
other end. A stationary wave is produced on the string as shown.
vibrator
Position of string ½ cycle wall

later than solid curve
Fig 3.1
(a) State the physical conditions that are necessary for a stationary wave to form on the string.
Reflection implied /2 waves in opposite directions/fixed end (not ends)

Similar amplitude/little energy loss at wall
frequency constant or same frequency/wavelength (any 2)
...........................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain how you know that the wave on the string is transverse.
String displacement perpendicular to rest/average/mean position of string or string
displacement perpendicular to energy propagation
(c) Compare the amplitude and phase of the oscillations of points A and B on the string.
Amplitude.......... A larger than B
Phase....... A 1800 (or π) out of phase with B
5
(d) The length of the string is 1.2 m and the speed of the transverse wave on the string is 6.2
m s-1. Calculate the vibration frequency of the vibrator.
λ = 1.2
c = fλ;
f = 6.2/1.2 = 5.2 Hz
Vibration frequency.......................Hz [2]
(e) The frequency of the vibrator is tripled. Sketch the new shape of the stationary wave on
Fig. 3.2.
Correct diagram :6 loops must be drawn
Fig 3.2
[1]
4 (a) State the conditions for the equilibrium of a body which is acted upon by a number of
forces.
The sum of forces acting on the body must be zero and the sum of moments about any
point must also be zero
(b) A student holds a uniform metre rule at one end in two different ways, as shown in Fig. 4.1
and 4.2 below.
(i) On Fig. 4.1 draw and label an arrow to represent the weight W of the metre rule and
an arrow to represent the force F exerted by the student’s hand on ruler. State the
relationship between the magnitudes of F and W. [2]
6
Fig. 4.2
Fig. 4.1
For Fig 4.1,

F=W
Length of F and W should be reasonably equal and location of W should be at centre of
gravity of rule
For Fig 4.2,

Direction and location of the arrows are important
(ii) In Fig. 4.2, the rule is held horizontally using the thumb and first finger. On Fig. 4.2
draw and label the three forces acting on the metre rule. List these forces in order of
increasing magnitude.
1 ……Index finger force upwards………………..
2 ……Thumb force downwards…………………
3 ……Weight of ruler downwards……………………
7
5 Fig. 5 is a top view of a metal wire of length 0.53 m and cross sectional area 1.0 x 10-6 m2 is
situated at an angle of 60o to a uniform magnetic field of flux density 1.8 x 10-3 T.
0.53 m Magnetic field

direction
600
Metal wire
Fig. 5
The metal wire has a density of 7.9 x 103 kg m-3 and resistivity of 8.8 x 10-8 Ω m.
A potential difference is applied between the ends of the wire so that there is an
electromagnetic force acting on the wire in the direction out of paper.
(a) On Fig. 5, mark the direction of the current in the wire. [1]
(b) For the wire, calculate

i) its weight
weight, mg = (1.0 x 10-6)(0.53)(7.9 x 103)( 9.81)

= 0.0411 N
Weight = …………………N [2]

ii) its resistance
resistance of wire = (ρl)/A

= (8.8 x 10-8 x 0.53)/(1.0 x 10-6)
= 4.7 x 10-2 Ω
Resistance = …………………..Ω [2]

(c) Calculate the potential difference required between the ends of the wire so that the
electromagnetic force on the wire can balance its weight.
I = F/(BLsin600)
Potential difference = R (I)
=2.32 V
8
Potential difference = ………………….. V [2]
(d) the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field is 1.8 x 10-5 T. State and explain
why in practice current-carrying wires are not seen to lift off the ground.
The component of Earth’s magnetic field is even smaller than the magnetic field in this
question. This would mean that an extremely large current would be required for the wire
to be lifted off the ground
6 A model rocket of initial mass 1.3 kg is fired vertically into the air. Its mass decreases at a
constant rate of 0.23 kg s-1 as the fuel burns. When the fuel is completely burnt, the final mass
of the rocket is 0.38 kg. During the flight, the gravitational field strength acting on the rocket may
be considered to have a constant value of 9.8 N kg-1.
(a) Calculate
(i) the initial weight of the rocket,
Wi = 1.3 (9.8) = 12.7 N
Initial weight = ………………….N [1]
(ii) the final weight of the rocket,
Wf = 0.38 (9.8) = 3.72 N
Final weight = ………………….N [1]
(iii) the time taken for the fuel to be completely burnt.
Time taken = (1.3 – 0.38)/ 0.23 = 4 s
Time = ……………….s [1]
(b) The variation with time t of the upward force on the rocket during the first 3 seconds
9
after firing is shown in Fig. 6.

Force / N
Fig. 6
(i) On Fig. 6, use the same scales to draw a line to represent the variation with time t
of the total weight of the rocket during the first 5 seconds after firing.
[1]
A straight line with coordinates (0, 12.7) and (4, 3.72)
Or a line that has negative gradient = 0.23 (9.8)
(ii) Read off from Fig. 6 the time delay between firing the rocket and lift-off.
The time is the intersection of line and curve where upward force = weight of rocket.
Time delay = 0.52 s [1] (read to ½ the smallest square)
Time delay = ……………………s [1]
(c) Write down an equation to represent the relation between the resultant force F on a body,
the time t for which the force acts and the change in momentum ∆p of the body.
[1]
Δp
F=
t
(d) The energy stored in the fuel is converted partly into kinetic energy and thermal energy of
the rocket. State two other forms of energy into which the energy of the fuel is converted.
Gravitational potential energy and sound energy
10
………………………………………………………………………………………...………[2]
Section B
Answer any Two questions
7 The aeroplane shown in Fig. 7 is travelling horizontally at 95 m s-1. It has to drop a crate of mass
10 kg of emergency supplies.
The air resistance acting on the crate may be neglected.
[1]
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) The crate is released from the aircraft at point P and lands at point Q. Sketch the
path followed by the crate between P and Q as seen from the ground. [1]
(ii) Explain why the horizontal component of the crate’s velocity remains constant while
it is moving through the air.
.......... no horizontal force acting

(hence) no (horizontal) acceleration
…….................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) To avoid damage to the crate, the vertical component of the crate’s velocity on
landing should not exceed 32 m s-1. Determine the maximum height from which the
crate can be dropped.
11
(use of v2 = u2 + 2as gives) 322 = (0) + 2 × 9.81 × s

s = 1024 /19.62 =52.2 m
Maximum height = .......................m [2]
(ii) Calculate the time taken for the crate to reach the ground if the crate is dropped
from a height of 52 m.
(use of s = ½ at2 gives) 52 = ½ 9.81 × t2

t = 3.26 s
Time taken = .......................s [2]
(iii) If R is a point on the ground directly below P, calculate the horizontal distance QR.
x (= QR) = 95 × 3.26
= 310 m
QR = .......................m [2]
(c) In practice, air resistance is not negligible. State and explain the effect of air resistance on
the maximum height from which the crate can be dropped.
maximum height is greater

because vertical acceleration is reduced
(d) (i) After the crate landed on Q, it continued to move with initial horizontal velocity
reduced to ¼. It came to rest after travelling a distance of 4.0 m. Determine the
frictional force experienced by the crate.
Fx d = ½ m v2 – ½ m u2
Fx 4 = -½ (10)(23.75)2
F = - 705 N
Frictional force = .......................N [3]
12
(ii) Assuming the frictional force is constant, sketch in Fig. 7.2 the variation of speed of
the crate with distance covered, after it landed on Q. [2]
v / ms-1
23.8
4 d /m
Fig. 7.2
(iii) After covering a distance of 1.5 m, determine the speed of the crate.
Fx 1.5 = ½ m v2 – ½ m (23.75)2
-705x 1.5 = ½ m v2 – ½ (10)(23.75)2
v = 18.8 m s-1
Speed of crate = .......................m s─1 [2]
(iv) To ensure the emergency supplies reach a longer distance, describe and explain
the changes that need to be made.
Release the supplies at a higher height so that when the supplies reach the ground, they
have a greater speed to cover a longer distance.
No credit for reducing air resistance, friction or reducing mass ( because assuming
friction is directly proportional to normal reaction, the deceleration remains unaffected,
hence no change in the stopping distance)
8 (a) Define the terms potential difference and resistance.
Potential difference between 2 points is the amount of electrical energy that can be
converted into other forms of energy per unit charge.
Resistance is the ratio of the potential difference to the current flowing through it.
(b) Two sets of coloured lamps A and B are designed for use with a 240 V supply. There are a
total of 12 lamps in each set. In set A, the lamps are arranged in series, while in set B, they
are arranged in parallel. The lamps in each set are identical, but the lamps in set A are
13
different from the lamps in set B.

The total power dissipated by the lamps in each set is 60 W.
For each lamp in the set connected in series and in parallel, calculate the following
quantities. [8]
Series Parallel
(i) current P = 60/12 = 5 W P = 60/12 = 5 W
P = IV = I (20) P = IV = I (240)
I = 0.25 A I = 0.021 A
(ii) potential difference 240 p.d = 240 V

P.d = = 20 V
12
(iii) resistance
V=IR V=IR
20 = (0.25) R 240 = (0.021) R
R = 80 Ω R = 11520 Ω
(c) The circuit for set A (connected in series) is shown in Fig. 8.
Fig. 8
The lamps do not light up when the circuit is closed. Hence a voltmeter is used to test the
circuit. For each of the following observations, identify the fault.
(i) the potential difference between A and M is zero
Open circuit in the connecting wires from bulb A to supply (or open circuit in connecting
wire from bulb M to supply)
(ii) the potential difference is zero across every lamp except EF, across which the
potential difference is 240 V.
Open circuit at lamp EF
(iii) potential difference between A and M is 240 V but the potential difference is zero
across every single lamp.
14
More than one bulb is spoilt.
(d) A battery of e.m.f 8.00 V and internal resistance 0.60Ω is connected to a resistor of
resistance 8.36 Ω.
Determine
E = IR + Ir
8 = I (8.36 + 0.6)
I = 0.89 A
Current = ……………….. A [2]
(ii) the potential difference across the 8.36 Ω resistor
V=IR
V = (0.89)(8.36)
V = 7.46 V
Potential difference = ……………………… V [2]
(iii) the power dissipated by the internal resistor.
P = I2 R ]
P = (0.89)2 (0.6) = 0.475 W
Power dissipated = ……………… W [2]
(iv) Explain why the potential difference across the terminals of a battery is normally
lower then the battery’s e.m.f.
There is the presence of an internal resistance
9 (a) (i) Describe the meaning of a photon.
A photon is a quantum (or packet) of energy of electromagnetic radiation.
(ii) Show that E, the energy of a photon is related to λ its wavelength by
E λ = 1.99 x 10-16,
where E is measured in J and λ is measured in nm.

[2]
15
E = hc/λ
= 6.63 x 10-34 x 3 x 108 / 10-9
= 1.99 x 10-16
(b) Wave theory predicts that, if electromagnetic radiation strikes a metal surface and ejects
an electron, the kinetic energy of the electron should depend on the intensity of the wave.
However observation shows that, in its interaction with matter to release an electron, it is
the frequency of the electromagnetic wave, and not the intensity, which controls the
maximum kinetic energy of the electron.
A lamp is placed above a metal surface which contains atoms of radius 2.0 x 10-10 m. Each
electron in the metal requires a minimum energy of 3.2 x 10-19 J before it can be emitted
from the metal surface, and it may be assumed that the electron can collect energy from a
circular area which has a radius equal to that of the atom. The lamp provides energy at an
intensity of 0.40 W m-2 at the metal surface.
(i) Estimate on the basis of wave theory the time required for an electron to collect
sufficient energy for it to be emitted from the metal.
A, Area of atom = π(2.0 x 10-10)2

= 4.0 x 10-20 π m2
P, Power of light on an area of atom = I x A

= 0.40 x 4.0 x 10-20 π W
Time taken to collect energy, t = (3.2 x 10-19)/P

= 6.4 s
Time = …………………….s [4]

(ii) Using the particulate nature of matter, comment on the validity of your answer to
(b)(i).
The answer is not valid because using particulate nature of matter, there is no appreciable
time delay between illumination and electron emission .
(b) Two metal electrodes A and B are sealed in an evacuated glass envelope and a potential
difference V, measured using the voltmeter, is applied between them as shown in Fig. 9.1.
16
A
+ Variable
V
B d.c.
- supply
Fig. 9.1
B is then illuminated with monochromatic light of wavelength 365 nm and I, the current in
the circuit is measured using the ammeter for various values of V. The results are shown in
Fig. 9.2.
I/mA
V/V
-1 1 2 Fig. 9.2
(i) From this graph, deduce the p.d. required to stop photoelectric emission from
B.
1V
P.d = …………………. V [1]
(ii) Calculate the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons.
KEmax = eVs
= 1.6 x 10-19 J
Maximum kinetic energy = ………………………….J [2]
(iii) Calculate the work function of B.
hf = Ф + KEmax
Ф = KEmax – hf
= 3.8 x 10-19
17
Work Function energy = ……………….. J [2]
(iv) Deduce the threshold frequency of the metal surface B
fo = Ф/h
=5.8 x 1014 Hz
Threshold frequency = …………………. Hz [2]
(v) State with a reason, what modifications would be required, separately, to

increase
1. the kinetic energy of a photoelectron [2]
Increase the frequency of the wavelength of electromagnetic radiation

because this would increase the energy of each photon
2. the rate of production of photoelectrons [2]
Increase the intensity of the electromagnetic radiation because this would

increase the number of photons hitting the metal surface
End of paper

8866 H1 Physics 2010 JC Prelims With Ans

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

8866 H1 Physics 2010 JC Prelims With Ans

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

A-PDF Merger DEMO : Purchase from www.A-PDF.

Anglo-Chinese Junior College

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.

Read the instructions on the Answer sheet very carefully.

This paper consists of 15 printed pages

speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1

elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10−19 C

the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s

unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg

rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg

rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg

acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s−2

uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + 1

work done on/by a gas, W = p ΔV

hydrostatic pressure, p = ρgh

resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + …

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1

1 Which of the following pairs consists of two base SI units

The values measured are

What is the percentage uncertainty in the value of c?

A 8.0 % B 7.0 % C 6.6 % D 6.5 %

2010ACJC8866P1 [Turn over

A the displacement of the particle

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1

7 A block of mass 0.60 kg is on a rough horizontal surface in Fig 7. A constant force of

block 4.0 m s−2

What is the magnitude of the frictional force acting on the block?

− 15 m s−1 + 2.6 m s−1

A 18600 Ns to the right

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1 [Turn over

What is the speed of the masses after impact?

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1 [Turn over

Distance of fall / m Distance of fall / m

Distance of fall / m Distance of fall / m

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1

At the instant shown the displacement is zero at the point P.

A 0.01 s B 0.02 s C 0.03 s D 0.07 s

16 A sound wave of frequency 400 Hz is traveling in a gas at a speed of 320 m s-1.

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1 [Turn over

17 Fig 17 shows a trace produced by a sound wave on a cathode-ray oscilloscope. The

What is the frequency of the sound wave?

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1

Which change will cause the diffraction of the waves to decrease?

A increasing the wavelength of the waves

A Increasing the slit separation

A They interfere constructively

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1 [Turn over

What is the radius of cross-section of the wire?

23 Which of the following expression is used to define resistance?

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1

The orientation of the wire and direction of the current are

orientation of wire direction of current

A north-south south to north

B north-south north to south

C east-west west to east

D east-west east to west

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1 [Turn over

The direction and magnitude of the current along length PQ are

A in the positive z direction

2010 H1 8866 Prelim Exam P1